j^-^ .,J!|l i UJ, I .JlU,. ^#jp} .i \ ij.Jm ':^^. ^nyi HE^BH| • . ..^^ 'fb^'i^^^:- .:y i y^, 1 - ■M/sLi ^jV^J^X./^ , 1 'i 1, m' •'' ^^F ■^IS "Jkxi ^ '^i -r^^. V- iv •o" ?'• \>^ /:*^ - ;. -rv^f/M .-«\. &■ ^•'a\ i^:'?}^^^ ^:f ■■'■-St ^"■1 :; -^^ ^ 1 y' ''•'■■ 1 k.-^-,^*?/"^ \ -ARTEMIS- ABSTRACT OF THB ANTHROPOMETRIC Aly SIGNAI^MBNT I. Height. 4. Length of head. 7. Left foot. 2. Reach. 5. Width of head. 8. Left middle finger, (ii) 3. Trunk. 6. Right ear. 9. Left forearm. SiGNALETic Instructions INCLUDING THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF ANTHROPOMETRICAL IDENTIFICATION By ALPHONSE BERTILLON Chief of the Judicial Identification Service of France TRANSLATED FROM THE LATEST FRENCH EDITION with i}2 figures, plates and tables, fully illustrating the Bertillon methods of measurement, description and statement of peculiar marks, including a large chromolithographic chart of the colors of the human eye Edited under the Supervision of MAJOR R. W. McCLAUGHRY late General Superintendent of Police of Chicago 1896 THE WERNER COMPANY CHICAGO NEW YORK LONDON 5- Copyright, 1896, HY R. W. McClaughry. The Bertillon System of Identification PREFACE OF AMERICAN PUBLISHERS. A very considerable portion of the crimes and wrongs which disturb the order of human society result either directly or indirectly from the apparent impossibility of distinguishing in every case and with unerring certainty one individual from another. It is for this reason, especially, that so many of the professional and habitual criminals who abound in every land have hitherto gone "unwhiptof justice." Men would be unlikely to render themselves liable to the penalties of the law if they knew that, wherever they might flee, their identity could not fail to be discovered. A sure means of identification would not only have the effect of deterring from crime in general, but would evidently nullify all attempts of whatever kind at a substitution of persons. No impersonations of a pensioner, or a missing heir, or a business man could ever hope to be successful. How much more precious still would such a means of identification be if it could be applied, not only to the living man, but to his dead body, even when crushed, mangled or dismembered beyond the recognition of his near- est friends and relatives! The life insurance companies and associations of mutual benevolence, for example, could not be robbed under cover of the pretended death of the holder of a policy, indicated by the finding of a body resembling his, or unrecognizable by ordinary means on account of mutila- tion, fire or decay, but dressed in his clothes and furnished with his papers. Then, too, those who fell in battle, no matter how mutilated they might be, would not need to be buried in nameless graves, but could be recognized and taken, when peace returned, to lie among their own kin. This powerful instrument of social order is already in existence. One of the most remarkable steps in modern progress is the development of a new form of applied science which has for its object the description of any human being in a manner so complete, certai-n and characteristic that he can by no possibility ever be permanently confused with any other. Such a descrip- tion is called a signabnent; the process of making it signalizing, and the body of facts, principles and rules that govern this process the signaletic art, signalism or signaletics. The inventor of this truly epoch-making system is Dr. Alphonse Bertillon, a prominent French anthropologist, who in 1882 was made chief of an iden- tification bureau then established in connection with the Prefecture of Police in Paris. Since then the system has come into use in all the police stations, jails and penitentiaries of France, its whole machinery being directed by the central bureau of Paris, over which Dr. Bertillon still presides. As improved and developed with the aid of so many years of practical experience the system has reached a high degree of perfection, and its abso- lute efficiency is recognized by all competent authorities throughout the world who have investigated its character and history. (vu) PUBLISHERS' PREFACE The Bertillon signaletic system is divided into three parts: the anthro- pometrical signalment, which consists in measuring with the utmost pre- cision, under prescribed conditions, some of the most characteristic dimen- sions of the bony structure of the human body ; the descriptive or morpho- logical signalment, which is the observation of the bodily shape and movements, and even the most characteristic mental and moral qualities; and the signalment by peculiar marks, or the pathological signalment, as it might almost be called, which is the observation of the peculiarities of the surface of the body, resulting from disease, accident, deformity or artificial disfigurement, such as moles, warts, scars, tattooings, etc. By means of such a threefold signalment, performed according to the method prescribed by Dr. Bertillon, the exact identity of any adult person can be established with so much definiteness that when signalized a second time he can be recognized with infallible certainty by a simple reference to the file in which the former signalment is kept. Even if this file represented the entire pop- ulation of the countrj', the process of identifying two correctly-taken signal- ments by its means could be performed in most cases in a few minutes, without any assistance from a similarity of names. According to the theory of the S}^stem, and in order for society to reap its full benefit, every human being should be partially signalized (especially by that part of the descriptive signalment relating to the ear) at about the age of ten years, and completely so at the age of maturity; and every country should have a national signaletic office where all the signalments of its inhabitants should be filed. The process of signalment would take the place of passports at every national frontier, and signalments would appear on all life insurance policies, permits and other papers whose value depends upon the establishment of personal identity. It would then be possible to find any person at once whenever desired, whether for his own good or that of society at large, in whatever place he might be and however he might alter his appearance or his name. Crime could thus be rooted out, elections purified, immigration laws effectively enforced, innumerable misunderstand- ings and much injustice prevented and all business relations greatly f aciUtated. But while this ultimate aim and destiny of signalism may stiU be far from realization, it has an enormous practical utility even under existing circum- stances, and is already in operation on a large scale as a police science — a means of recognizing criminals, thus protecting the innocent, insuring the punishment of the guilty and enabling a distinction to be made between new and old offenders, etc. For such purposes as these it is already used in the most widely separated parts of the world — in Europe, Asia, Africa, North America ( i ) , South America and Australasia — and it is spreading rapidly in (1) It was introduced into the United States in 1S87 by Major R. W. McClaughry (then Warden of the Illinois State Penitentiary at Joliet, and Secretary of the United States and Canada Wardens' Association), to whose attention it was brought by the chief clerk of that institution, the late Gallus Muller. Shortly afterwards it was oflScially indorsed by the Wardens' Association above mentioned, and at the present time there are in the United States nearly twenty prisons and reformatories and at least seven police depart- ments which are making use of it to some extent, although the absence hitherto of a complete exposition of the system in the English language has prevented it from being understood and applied in its entirety. (viii) PUBI,ISHRRS' PREFACE proportion as its unique advantages come to be appreciated. While, natu- rally, the representatives of justice make first use of it, its utility is also in other departments of life becoming gradually recognized. The military authorities are beginning to use it for the recognition of deserters, and banks, insurance companies, and other business enterprises are taking under advisement the practical measures which will secure to them the protection it alone can afford. To meet the demand created, here as elsewhere, for the fullest possible information regarding the theory and practice of signalnient, the work which constitutes the only complete and official compendium of the system is now for the first time rendered into the English tongue. The translation has been carefully edited by Merwin-Marie Snell, member of the Anthropo- logical Society of Washington, and of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, and the entire work has received the personal super- vision of Major R. W. aicClaughry, Superintendent of the Illinois State Reformatory and formerly Superintendent of Police of the city of Chicago, and delegate to the International Prison Congress of 1895 in Paris. It can therefore be relied upon, both as an accmrate reproduction of the original, and as being no less perfectly adapted for the purposes of practical instruction and application. In view of the future extension of the sj-stem it has been thought advisable to preserv'e Dr. Bertillon's international abbre- viations, which are indispensable to its perfect workings on a large scale and are already employed not only by the police and prison ofiicials of France but by those of Russia, Holland, Belgium, Brazil, the Argentine Republic and many other countries. Alternative English equivalents are given in the few cases where the abbre\-iations are based upon foreign or unfamiliar words or are of the nature of conventional signs. The English nomenclatiu-e has been very carefully selected in such a man- ner as to preserve all the peculiarities of Bertillon's system, and at the same time make the memorizing of the abbre\'iations as easy as possible. To further facilitate the use of signalments received from abroad and the prepar- ation of those for international exchange, the forms used in the original are given in parenthesis in the case of the few signaletic terms which are not so nearly alike in the two languages as to be easily recognizable. The index at the end of the book serves also as a vocabulary of technical terms, and, as it includes whenever necessary references to the French equivalent expressions, it will render superfluous the use of a dictionary of the French tongue (which for a large part of the world might be called the international language of police as well as of diplomacy), or the employment of a translator, in sig- naletic offices having occasion to make frequent or occasional use of foreign signalments. Several other additions have been made in this edition, chiefly with a view to bringing the work up to date, especially a translation of Bertillon's circu- lar relating to the bi-zygomatic measurement and to finger-prints (Appendix C), and copies of the new forms of signaletic cards used at Paris (plates 79 a and 79 d). The additions may be recognized in the analytical table of con- tents and lists of figiures and plates immediately following this preface, by the brackets in which the corresponding titles are enclosed. (ix) PUBLISHERS' PREFACE The arrangement of the book can easily be understood by reference to the analysis and lists just mentioned, and its apparent technicalities will be no obstacle to those who desire to understand and apply the system, for Dr. Bertillon has taken pains to fully explain and illustrate every point in the clearest possible manner, and often several times over. This splendid work will be a necessity to every up-to-date la^vyer and prison or police official; and it cannot fail to be welcomed eagerly by the mil- itary and customs authorities in all English-speaking lands, and by some of the leading representatives of life insurance companies and other great moneyed corporations. To social and political reformers it will have a keen interest when they realize the far-reaching possibilities that the system embodies, and it will furnish to ph3-siognomists and phrenologists multi- tudes of new facts calculated to be of peculiar ser\-ice. It goes %\'ithout say- ing that anthropologists will find the volume abounding in data and sugges- tions of the utmost importance to their science, of which the Bertillon sys- tem is, after all, only an application and amplification. The signalments taken by the methods described already afford to this branch of pure science some of the most valuable materials ever yet placed at its disposal, and every step in the diffusion of the art of signalment will be a proportional enlarge- ment in the field of anthropological inquiry. A word must be said about the altogether special and indispensable value of this work to detectives, who by its use will cease to depend upon acci- dental clews and vague intuitions and surmises, and to be constantly led astray by general resemblances of physiognomy, but will be able to find and to recognize the objects of their search with almost mechanical accuracy. From this point of view the Bertillon system may justly be called the detec- tive's art raised to the level of an exact science. The Appendix B, on the Verbal Portrait, is the key to the whole work from the detective's point of view. He will depend chiefly on the descriptive signalment, while the prison official is primarily concerned with the anthropometrical signalment, and the lawyer more especially, perhaps, with the signalment by peculiar marks. From a purely theoretical standpoint the anthropometrical portion will espe- cially attract the anthropologist and the descriptive portion the physiogno- mist, while the portion relating to the peculiar marks has an interest of its own to the physician. We feel that to all the classes mentioned, as well as to the public at large, we are rendering an incalculable service by putting before them in an Eng- lish dress a work which may justly be considered one of the most important publications of recent years. The Publishers. (s.) CONTENTS ANALYSIS OF THE TEXT pp. Preface of American Publishers vii-x Author's Preface l-io INTRODUCTION I. — Theoretical Study of Signalment ii II. — Account of the Three Kinds of Signalment 14-63 I. Anthropometrical Signalment 14 The Classificati07i 0/ Sigtialments 19 II. Descriptive Signalment 32 III. Signalment by Peculiar Marks 55 III. — Final Considerations and Conclusions 63-81 I. Comparative Place of the Three Kinds of Sig- nalment 63 II. Organization of Identification Service at Paris 66 III. Workings of the Service in Other Parts of France 69 IV. Statistics of Results Obtained in France 71 V. Advice to Officials Desiring to have Anthro- pometrical Files Consulted. . . 76 VI. Internationalization and Diffusion 78 INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALMENT PRELIMINARY CHAPTER 83-99 I. — Advice on Manner of Studying Instructions 83 II. — Choice of a Place 85 III. — The Measuring Furniture 85 IV. — Non-Metallic Instruments and Accessories of Meas- urement 87 V. — Metallic Instruments 90 VI. — The Secretary- 92 VII. — Manner of Announcing Figures 93 VIII. — Manner of Replying to Sociological Headings 95 (xi) CONTENTS FIRST PART— ANTHROPOMETRICAL OBSERVATIONS 100-129 Chapter I. — General Measurements by Means of Mural Graduations 100-106 Section A. Measurement of the Height 100 Section B. Measurement of the Reach 103 Section C. Measurement of the Trunk 105 Chapter II. Measurements on Head by Means of Caliper Rule 107-117 Section A. Diameters of Head I. Length 107 II. Width no Section B. Diameter of Right Ear I. Length 113 II. Width [but see Appendix C] 116 Chapter III. — Measurements by Means of Large Caliper Rule 118-129 Section A. Left Foot 118 Section B. Fingers I. Left Middle Finger 122 II. Left Little Finger 125 Section C. Left Forearm 126 SECOND PART— DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION i3c^2ii Chapter I. — Chromatic Characters 130-15 1 Section A. Notation of Color of Left Eye I. General Observations 130 II. The Parts of the Eye 134 HI. Principles of Classification 135 IV. Complementary Signs 139 V. Exceptional Cases 143 VI. Peculiarities 145 VII. Abbreviations and Final Summary 146 Section B. Notation of Color of Hair and Beard 147 Section C. Coloration of Skin and Ethnic Indications 150 Chapter II. — Morphological Characters ha\nng Special Headings on Card 152-177 Section A. Shape and Dimensions of the Forehead . 152 Section B. Description of the Nose I. Shape 141 II. Dimensions 157 III. Peculiarities 158 Section C. Description of the Ear I. Detailed Analysis of Parts 162 II. Forms to be Described in all Cases 174 Section D. Notation of the Build 176 (xii) CONTENTS Chapter III. — Morphological Characters having no Special Headings on Card 178-211 General Principles 1 78 Section A. Complementary Features of the Profile I. Lips 180 II. Chin iSi III. General Contour of the Head Seen in Profile 182 Section B. Complementary Features of the Face I. General Contour of the Head seen from in Front 186 II. Nature and Growth of Hair 187 III. Beard 189 IV. Eyebrows 190 V. Fyelids 192 VI. Eyeball and Orbit 195 VII. Mouth 197 VIII. Wrinkles and Furrows 199 IX. Physiognomical Expression 200 Section C. General Characters and Sundry Infor- mation I. Neck 203 II. Inclination of Shoulders 202 III. Attitude 204 IV. General Demeanor 205 V. Voice and Language 206 VI. The Habiliments 210 VII. General Impressions and Presumptions Regarding Social Status 210 THIRD PART— STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS. .. . 212-238 Preliminary Notions and Definition of Anatomical Faces . . 212 Chapter I.^ — Description of the Mark 215-220 a) Nature or Designation 215 b) Form and Opening 217 c) Dimension 218 d) General Direction or Inclination 219 Chapter II. — Localization of the Mark 221-229 e) Use of Locative Prepositions 221 y ) Designation of Parts of Body 222-9 I. Left Upper Limb 223 II. Right Upper Limb 223 III. Face and Front of Neck 226 IV. Chest 227 V. Back 228 VI. Other Parts of the Body 229 (xiii) CONTENTS Chapter III. — Manner of Announcing and Recording the Marks 230-238 I, Rapidity in Announcing 230 II. Rapidity in Recording 23 1 Abbreviatiotis in Stenographic Fortn 233 ,Abbreviations Redtcccd to Initial Letter . . 236 Abbreviations Containing Consonants 0?ily 236 Abbreviations in Usual Form 238 APPENDIX A.— JUDICIAL PHOTOGRAPHY 239-248 General Considerations 239 Technical Instructions a ) Light 240 b) Reduction 240 c) Pose 241 d) Trimming and Mounting of the Prints 242 General Observations 242 Full-length Portraits 243 Special Posing Chair Theoretical Considerations 244 Practical Instructions 247 B.— THE VERBAL PORTRAIT 249-258 Table of Mean Dimensions 254 Photographic Identification 256 C— ADDITIONS TO THE ANTHROPOMETRICAL SIG= NALMENT 259-260 I. Measurement of the Bi-zygomatic Diameter 259 II. Digital Impressions 260 I/ist of Tables and Figures in Text Abstract of Anthropometrical Signalment ii Table of Metric System xx Fig. 1 Reduction of Plate 24 of Album 8 Fig. 2. Reduction of Plate 25 of Album 8 List of MEASUREMENTS I5 Table of necessary approximation in measurement 24 Fig. 3. Binomial curve of probability OF masculine height in France.... 29 Tables of numerical limits of adjectives of height 36 (xiv) CONTENTS Fig. 4. Binomial curve of the seven categories of height 38 Fig. 5. Diagram of the seven categories of height 39 Fig. 6. Schema indicating progressive approximation of ground-shades of IRIS 44 Fig. 7. Diagram of the colors of the iris, showing relative frequency 44 Fig. 8. Nose with ridge concave, rectilinear and convex 48 Fig. 9. Nose with ridge concave-siNuous, rectilinear-sinuous and convex- sinuous 48 Eig. 10. Forms, open, intermediate and adhering, of POSTERIOR BORDER OF ear 48 Fig. II. Lobe of ear with contour square, intermediate and gulfed 49 Fig. 12. Antitragus with profile rectilinear, intermediate and projecting . . 49 Fig. 13. Inferior fold of ear, with horizontal section concave, intermediate and convex 50 Fig. 14. Lobe of ear with blending, intermediate and separatedADHERENCE ... 50 Fig. 15. Lobe of models channeled, intermediate and elevated 50 Fig. 16. Antitragus turned outwards, with intermediate bending and erect. 51 Fig. 17. Antitragus with inclination horizontal, intermediate and oblique 51 Fig. 18. Forehead with inclination receding, intermediate and vertical. ... 51 Fig. 19, Nose with base elevated, horizontal and depressed 52 Fig. 20. Schema of degrees of inclination on a human profile 52 Table showing structure of cicatricial sentence 63 Fig. 21. Diagram showing number of recognitions of recidivists at Paris, 1883-1893 72 Fig. 22. Section of millimetric scale, showing possible mistakes in reading.. . 95 Fig. 23. Measurement of an ear with a descending lobe II5 Fig. 24. Examination of the color of the left iris 132 Fig. 25. Designation of the parts of the eye 134 List of technical terms and abbreviations for the eye 146 Fig. 26. Designation of the parts of the nose 154 List of abbreviations for the nose 161 Fig. 27. Plan of the ear, with designation of parts 163 Fig. 28. Guiding-rod for ascertaining form of inferior fold of anthelix .... 166 Fig. 29. Method of using guiding-rod 168 Table of technical terms and abbreviations for the ear 177 Table for analysis of eyebrow 190-191 List of abbreviation for datum points of body 237-238 Table of average dimensions corresponding to different heights 254 (xv) LIST OF TABLES AND PLATES IN ALBUM FIRST PART.— PLATES RELATING TO THE ANTHROPO- HETRICAL OPERATIONS NO. The Measuring Furniture i Caliper Compass 2 Small Caliper Rule 3 Large Caliper Rule 4 Measuring the Height 5 Measuring the Reach 6 Measuring the Trunk 7 Measiu-ing the Length of Head First Stage a General View 8 b Special View 9 Second Stage c General View 10 d Special View 11 Measuring the Width of Head First Stage a General View 12 b Special View 13 Second Stage c General View 14 Third Stage d Verification, 3 figs 15 Measuring the Length of Right Ear a General View 16 b Special View 17 [Measuring the Bi -zygomatic Diameter First Stage a General View 18 b Special View] 19 Measuring the Length of Left Foot a General View 20 b Special View 21 Measuring the Left Middle Finger First Stage a General View 22 (xvi) CONTENTS Second Stage b General View 23 Third Stage c General View 24 d Special View 25 Measuring the Left Little Finger a General View 26 b Special View 27 Measuring the Left Forearm First Stage a General View 28 b Special View 29 Second Stage c General View 30 a Third Stage d General View 30 5 SECOND PART. —PLATES RELATING TO THE DE- SCRIPTIVE INFORMATION Forehead Dimensions and Shape, 9 figs 31 Peculiarities, 9 figs 32 Nose Shape, 9 figs 33 Abnormalities in Shape, 9 figs 34 Peculiarities in Dimensions, 9 figs 35 Dimensions, in Profile View, 9 figs 36 Dimensions, in Front View, 9 figs 37 Miscellaneous Peculiarities, 9 figs 38 Lips and Chin Lips, 9 figs 39 Chin, 9 figs 40 General Shape of Head Profile View, 9 figs 41 Front View, 9 figs 42 Hair Of the Head, 9 figs 43 Of the Beard, 9 figs 44 Eyes Eyebrows a) Shape, 9 figs 45 b) Size and Growth, 9 figs 46 Eyelids, 12 figs 47 Eyeballs and Orbits, 9 figs 48 (xvii) CONTENTS Mouth Size and Shape, 9 figs 49 Wrinkles Number, Position and Direction, 9 figs 50 Pecuharities and Physiognomical Expression, 9 figs. 51 Right Ear Border, 12 figs 52 Lobe, 12 figs 53 Antitragus, 1 2 figs 54 Internal Windings, General Form and Prominence, 12 figs 55 Recapitulatory View, 16 figs 56 Peculiarities Of Border and Lobe, 16 figs 57 Of Other Parts, 16 figs 58 General Physiognomy Identity of Individuals with Physiognomical Dissimi- larity At Some Interval of Time, S figs 59 a With and Without Beard 59 <^ Non-Identity of Individuals with Physiognomical Resemblance Similar Peculiarities 60 a Similar Origin 60 b Table of Descriptive Information [60 r] [List of Abbreviations for Descriptive, Anthropometric and Other Terms] [60 d} THIRD PART.- PLATES RELATING TO THE STATE- MENT OF PECULIAR MARKS Body at Large Subject in Position of the Soldier Without Arms Profile View 61 Front View fig. i 62 Rear View fig- 2 62 Upper Limbs Anterior Face 63 Posterior Face 64 Palm of Left Hand [a] Designation of Parts 65 {b) Localization of Marks 66 Back of Left Hand ( a ) Designation of Parts 67 {b) Localization of Marks 68 (xviii) CONTENTS Face Profile View (a) Designation of Parts 69 (b) Ivocalization of Marks 70 Front View {a) Designation of Parts 71 ( d ) Localization of Marks 72 Trunk Front View (a) Designation of Parts 73 ( l>) Localization of Marks .74 Rear View ( a ) Designation of Parts 75 ( b) Localization of Marks 76 Abbreviations Description of Peculiar Marks in Abridged Writing 77 Synoptical Table of Terms and Abbreviations for Statement of Peculiar Marks [77 a] SIQNALETIC CARDS Ordinary Form (1893), filled out Recto (side placed upward in file) 78 Verso (other side) 79 [Special Forms used at Paris for Anthropometrical File With Photograph (recto, showing judicial photograph in two poses, and finger-prints) [79^] Without Photograph (recto, with space for finger- prints) ] [796] Special Form for Verbal Portrait, filled out Recto, with space for Judicial Photograph 80 Verso 81 COLORS OF THE HUMAN IRIS Chromotypographical Chart [Si a} (x«) TH^ METRIC SYSTEM OP lylNBAR MEASURE I millimetre = o.OJQjy inch 10 millimetres - - make i centimetre lo centimetres - - - - - make I decimetre lo decimetres (or loo ceiitimetres) - make I metre I metre = ^ ft. j^^ in., nearly 10 metres ----- make i decametre 10 decametres _ _ - . . make i hectometre lo hectometres _ _ _ - make i kilometre / kilometre = O.621 statute miles, or nearly ^ of a mile The portion in bold-faced type is an essential part part of the Bertillon method. See the scale on p. 95, in which the short lines represent millimetres and the long lines centimetres. The metric system of weights and measures is now used in the arts and sciences in every civilized land, and has been officially adopted by the Gov- ernment of the United States. All signaletic measurements must be expressed in its terms. (xx) AUTHOR'S PREFACE. It may not be strictly accurate to call a volume a new edition when the new portion greatly exceeds the old, as is the case in this pubUcation, the text of which, including the Album, has been increased from 95 pages to more than 300. It should be observed, however, that the dominating idea, which is the apphcation of the methods of anthropological anatomy to questions of judicial identiiScation, was already at least partially developed in the edition of 1885, and that, a point of capital importance, the anthropometric portion has undergone no changes sufl&ciently great to cause any discrepancies with the previous observations. But it must not be supposed that the increase in the size of the volume involves any increase in the diflBculty of applying its directions or any additional demands upon the intelligence of the operator. The incomplete edition of 1885 was prepared in great haste, in the space of a few months, in order to comply with the request of Messrs. de Renzis and Bodio for the presentation of the new method before the International Prison Congress at Rome. Thus is explained the fact that the greater number of the instructions added to the present volume were already carried out and formed an integral part of the new signalment several years before their publication here. All the improvements introduced have, there- fore, been subjected to the indispensable preliminary test of experience, and all, or nearly all, have been presented from a theoretical point of view in the scientific reviews of France and other countries without giving rise to any objections on the part of the learned world. We may safely say, then, of this new edition that it is final in its main outlines and in most of its details, and that any future edi- tion, if such there should be, will differ from it very little. (1) Edition of 1885 Edition of 1893 5 10 nothing nothing 72 14 21 19 25 67 15 20 5 15 30 90 2 AUTHOR'S PREFACE Here, by way df a document, is a table shownng the distribution of the materials, with the approximate indication of the number of pages [in the original] , part by part, first in the edition of 1S85 and then in that of 1893. Preface - . . . . Introduction (general exposition of the method) - - . . . Practical directions of a general order - First Part, Anthropometrical Observations Second Part, Descriptive Information - Third Part, Statement of Peculiar Marks - Appendix on Judicial Photography and the Verbal Portrait - . . . Album ----- Total - . - 55 213 The portion which has contributed most to the increase in the size of this edition is that which, under the title of Inttvdudion, opens the volume immediately after this preface. In these new pages we have attempted to give a general view of the whole system of anthropometrical signalments, and particularly of the classification which forms its essential machinery. Hence many questions will be found to be treated twice in this volume; first in the Introduction, from the point of \dew of popvdar presentation, and then in the Instructions from the practical point of view; while in the l7itroductio7t alone 'will be found a development of the whole speculative side of anthropometry. Incidentally we shall be led to study some of the natural laws which govern the distribution of anomalies of dimension, form and color, and we will conclude with an account of the workings of the central Anthropometrical Service at Paris, and a statistical statement of the recidivists recognized by this new procedure from the time of its intro- duction down to the present year. We hope, therefore, that the reader will not be surprised at the inten- tional repetitions, both of words and ideas, with which he may often meet in different parts oi' the book. Nevertheless, the order and treatment of the materials in the Instructions proper being determined by the imperative requirements of practice, we have undertaken to throw a new light on the subject by a more philosophic grouping. Often, then, the same theme which in the Introduction may seem to hover in the clouds of abstraction, will assume an entirely different aspect when it is taken up again from the point of view of its practical application. But it must not be supposed that the preliminary and general knowledge that the reader will thus have gathered in the Introduction vrill become useless as soon as he has entered upon the technical portion; the repetition is a cerebral g>-mnastics indis- pensable for fixing the new ideas and words in the memory'. We readily admit that many of the considerations that we have enlarged upon in the hitroduction cannot be put to any immediate use \)\ the mere attendant. But does not the distinction of a man consist precisely in know- AUTHOR'S PREFACE 3 ing, over and above the practice, all that bears on the theoretical side of his profession, in being acquainted with what is popularly called the adjacent territory ? The prtsott warden, whose life is passed face to face with human beings, and who is literally a keeper of men, should tend to become an anthropol- ogist. This desideratum is to-day almost realized, and the experience of these latter years has shown that the men in such positions were equal to the effort and the special information that was asked of them. We hope that those officials also of all kinds connected with the prison and police service, who, without having to apply anthropometry with their own hands, are called upon either to make use of its results or to supervise its performance, will find in the Introduction a sufficient explanation of it. Finally, we should be happy if magistrates, who for some years have been making more and more use of the results of anthropometry, but who could not spare the necessary time for so dry a study as that of the Technical Insttuclions, would seek in these preliminary pages the general ideas indis- pensable to the due appreciation of signaletic information. The PRELIMINARY CHAPTER brings together all the information of a general and at the same time technical character which could not have found a place elsewhere, such, for example, as ad\-ice on the manner of giving instructions in anthropometry and conducting a measuring room; description of the furniture and instruments; the manner of filling out a signaletic card and of responding to the headings relating to the ci\dl status; numerous points the determination of which is important for the rigorous uniformity indispensable to a vast file, and the greater part of which were not even mentioned in the first edition. The small increase noticed in the anthropomettical portion is more especially attributable to the modifications in the measuring of the diameters of the ear ( 113 ) and the length of the fore-arm ( 126 ); measurements whose importance has been demonstrated by the experience of recent years. The augmentation of the Itistrudions proper is chiefly due to the fact that we have given three times as much space to the DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION, that is to Say, to the very chapter which treats of the old ordinary signalment used on passes and hunting permits, etc. Is it not astonishing that while there have existed from time immejnotial, under the name of Hippology, special works for the precise descriptioii of the shape and color of the horse, there has never existed until the present time, so far as we know, a method- ical treatise on human signalment? The cause of this should be sought in the difficulty of the sub- ject, especially in the multiplicity of the points of view from which it must be regarded. We do not think that we are far from the .truth in saying that the number of pages devoted to the exposition 4 AUTHOR'S PREFACi: of each of the three parts of our signalment (anthropometry 25 pages, description 67 pages, and pecuHar marks 20 pages) is pro- portional to the difl&culties arising in their practical application. In this respect the anthropometrical part should be considered as much easier than the descriptive part. We woiild add, moreover, that an immediate and perfect acquaintance with the pages relating to description is not indispensable, and that it is even recommended to postpone their study until the close of the apprenticeship. Their principal aim is to teach the close observation of the human counte- nance and the storing of it in the memory, whether in the case of a living subject or of a photograpliic portrait. They are therefore addressed to the police officer rather than to the prison warden. If there is a commonplace in police circles it is the comparative uselessness of photography for the discovery of a fugitive criminal. "As excellent as it is," they say, '^ for confirming a suspected identity, it is no less insufficie^it as a means of search, and it is a matter of daily experience for the most conscientious detectives to pass by a man whose picture they have in their pocket without recognizing him. ' ' Certainly there is a little contradiction in attri- buting these failures to the insufficiency of photography while at the same time recognizing in it so considerable a power of identification. "We affirm, and believe that we have demonstrated, that the photographic portrait would become a much more effica- cious instrument of search and of recognition if detectives were more familiar with the manner of using it; of analyzing it, describ- ing it, learning it by heart, and, in a word, of drawing from it all that it is possible to draw from it; for it is necessary in order to see well, or rather to perceive what one sees, to know beforehand what are the points to be looked at. It is this idea that the celebrated anatomist Peisse has summed up in the sentence that Dr. Paul Richer has placed by way of a motto upon his recent magnificent treatise on Artistic Anatomy: ' ' The eye sees in things onxy what it looks at in them, and it looks only at that of which the idea is already present in the mind." We have already had occasion to show, in a little work on Judicial Photography ( i ) , that the best and even the only means for an agent to impregnate his visual memory with a photographic (1) Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1890. AUTHOR'S PREFACE 5 portrait is to make in writing a sort of morphological description of it, exact and complete: " It has long been said that we really think only what we are able to express in words. It is the same way with the visual memory; we can behold in thought only what we are able to describe. The detective charged with so difficult a mission as the discovery and arrest of a criminal by means of a photograph should be able to analyze and describe from memory the face of him whom he is pursuing, to make of him, in other words, a kind of verbal portrait. That is the best way of prov- ing to his chiefs that he has entered with all his heart into the task that has been entrusted to him^ These instructions have received, since their publication in the former edition, the high and complete approval of Messrs. Loze, Prefect of Police; Viguie and Cavard, Chiefs of his Cabinet; Goron, Chief of the Ser\'ice of Public Safety in Paris; Taylor, ex-Chief of the same Service; Dr. Guillaume, General Secre- tary of the International Prison Association; Le Rover, Under- Secretary of the Department of Justice and Police in Geneva ( i ) ; McClaughry, General Superintendent of Police in Chicago, etc. There will be found in the Albiun models of descriptive for- mulae and numerous photographs of phj^siognomical types pre- sented in tabular form in order to serve as a guide in the produc- tion of the verbal portrait. Their popularization in the work of the active police force is now only a question of time; the theoretic position is alreadj^ gained. But it is well understood that so complete a table of descriptive headings need not be prepared in the case of every subject examined; this outline, being intended for the analysis of a photographic portrait in order to facilitate the discovery and recognition of a fugitive criminal, should be used only when circumstances require. Investigators of this kind have at their disposal all the time that is necessary, and the importance of the task which is entrusted to them is such that the additional labor that this imposes upon them is unworthy of consideration. (1) " It is necessary to give to the detectives such instruction as will enable them to utilize to good effect a card provided with a photograph, to know, for example, how to recognize an ear, for this part of the body is the most important from this point of view and furnishes numerous and valuable indications which permit of no confusion." H. Le Royer, L. J., in Revue penale Suisse, 4th year." 6 AUTHOR'S PREFACE So all our efforts in drawing up the Instructio7is on the Descrip- tive Information have been directed towards putting within reach of the agent of the public power a method at once rigor- ously scientific and as simple as the subject permits. It was worth the trouble, for it is evident that the pure anthro- poinetric signalmcnt (upon which we could not be suspected of being too severe) cannot enter into competition with the descriptive for the purposes of the exterior poUce, and especially for the ide7i- tificatio7i of a fugitive malefactor. Now, when we look at the matter from a high standpoint, the whole work of the poUce force hinges upon questions of ideiitijica- tio7i. A crime has just been committed by some unknown person: the task of the police will consist, first, in discovering the individ- uahty of the culprit; secondly, in searching for him in order that he may be arrested, that is to say, in individualizijig him in the midst of the multitude of human beings. From the beginning to the end of the judicial inquiry the only questions to be elucidated are those of identity', of description, of signalment; taking as a basis the vague and often deceptive evidence of witnesses, it is true, but even upon this the new method has the merit of throw- ing some light. Is not this a first step towards a scientific poHce system, in which all the technical information connected with the 77ian hunt will be brought together in a scientific way ? Hitherto this mat- ter has been left entirely to instinct, that is, to routine. The pro- fessional instruction of the police has been limited to some odds and ends of legislation. Now legal learning always has been and always will be primarily the attribute of magistrates, who know the law better than anybody else. But what a difference when we go on to the application! While the justice should execute only what the law commands him to do, all means are useful to the police that can aid in the discovery of the truth : in the matter of legislation they hardly need to know an^'thing more than the limits beyond which law and custom forbid them to go. Nothing, then, prevents the police system from undergoing in its turn an evolution along the line of the application of scientific principles. Anthropology is in its definition nothing else than the natural history of man. Have not hunters in all ages been incited by information connected with natural history, and, in- versely, do not naturalists have something of the hunter's instinct? author's preface 7 No doubt the police of the future will come to apply the rules of anthropology to their particular kiud of hunting, just as the firemen of our locomotives put into practice the laws of mechanics and thermodynamics. We may further remark among the technical modifications the innova- tion in regard to the classifying numerals of the color of the eye, which, by rendering the notation of the shade more exact and more simple, has sup- pressed the heading limit, the use of which was very generally misunder- stood. Thus corrected and illustrated by a chromotypographic plate, the chapter on the eye will need to be studied anew by the old operators. The changes introduced into the third part, the statement of peculiar- ities, consist in the replacing of certain terms by others susceptible of more rapid abbreviations. Thanks to this transformation the symbols now recom- mended are common in their initials to English and French, or to French and Latin. Several synoptical tables, arranged especially with a \dew either to the writing or the reading of descriptions of scars, will offer a ready guide to persons unfamiliar with the use of these signs. In the appendix on judicial photography will be found a descrip- tion of a new posing-chair, which, while allowing an easy and rapid operation, assures a rigorous uniformity of reduction between the full-face and profile photographs. From the mechanical point of view, this edition is distinguished from the preceding: ist, by numerous figures from the pen of an artist who is at the same time a distinguished anthropologist. Colonel Duhousset ( i ) ; 2nd, by 30 collographic [in the American edition half-tone] plates giving more than two hundred photographic portraits taken conformably to our rules, and a hun- dred enlargements of the ear; 3rd, by a chromotypographic plate relating to the color of the eyes, reproducing exactly a series of models painted in oil, after nature, under my direction. In order to facilitate the reading and intrepretation of the technical direc- tions, the plates and designs have been brought together in a separate volume [bound together with this]. The figures have been intentionally multiplied, especially in the anthropometric portion, in such a way as to represent separately every important change of position. Furthermore, whenever it has been judged necessary the positions have been reproduced from two different points of view: 1st, a general view, usually taken on a horizontal projection, indicating the respective positions of the subject and the operator; (1) The union of these qualities in so eminent a personality as that of Col. Duhousset has been for us a piece of good fortune that we have not hesitated to use, and sometimes even to abuse, without ever exhausting the kindness of our collaborator. His participa- tion in the work has not been limited to the drawings alone, for his advice has also been very useful in the preparation of the Instructions themselves, We would mention also among those by whose advice we have profited Dr. Manouv- rier, professor in the Anthropological School of Paris. 8 author's preface 2nd, a partial view, on a much larger scale, usually taken from above at an angle of from 45 to 90 degrees, in order to show the relations between the instrument and the organ to be measured, as well as the fingering peculiar to each operation. The plate representing the fingering is always placed opposite the general view and turned in the same direction. The corresponding position of the two images is a rule which has been carried out in every instance; so it has sometimes brought about an odd turning of the pictures. "We have carried our solicitude for exactness so far as to indicate those of our illustrations of the fingering in which the views, representing the measurer from the front, would appear to the latter as turned about, that is to say, where the right side falls on the left of the drawing, and inversely. It is easy to assure oneself that this reversal, which is likely to embarrass a novice, can be avoided only when the illustration is taken in such a way as to follow the glance of the operator, that is to say from the back or three- quarters as regards the latter. Whenever it has not been possible to proceed in this way a special head- ing, printed upside down above the figure, reminds the inexperienced measurer that he has to turn the plate before reproducing its positions (figs. I and 2). Reduction, on a scale of one-sixth, of plates 24 and 25 of the Album, relating to the third stage in the measuring of the left middle finger. •3uij33ug ^^t puB luaiuiujsui aqi _)o uoi]isod aqj spjBSsj se Xnepadsa 'juauiaSuEjjB jpqj sDnpojdaj oj Suuisap j3jnsE3ui V Xq psipnjs aq pjnoqs S3jn3y sssqj qoiqM ujojj .^9ta JO ^UIOJ 'a A. Point of vie'W of an observer who, in the presence of a measurer oper- ating under his eyes, desires to verify the correctness of the positions taken. Fig. 1. — General view, taken at an angle of 45 degrees. Fig. 2.— Special view, taken at an angle of 90 degrees. Perhaps some may think that here as elsewhere we have entered into too minute details regarding the application of the rules. To this I would answer that there is good reason for even our most detailed directions, either in view of a uniformity of results, or of a greater facility of acquisition or performance. AUTHOR'S PREFACE 5 The following didactic question is often suggested in such cases .• Does it not take longer for the apprentice to read and apply such minute instructions, than to wait until he has discovered in practice the 7iecessity for them ? Experience has shown us that whatever was left to individual initiative ran a risk of either being misapplied or omitted altogether; so we have never hesitated to insert regulations occasionally even of a somewhat trifling character, whenever it has seemed to us they would result in a greater rapidity of instruction. Contrary to the opinion that we have very often heard expressed, we consider that the more a book is addressed to a wide public without special preliminary information, the more it is necessary to enter into infinite details. A difficulty cannot be overcome by eliminatiiig it from the text; it continues to arise to the perplexity of the learner; and the more inexperienced he is, the less intelligent he is, to speak plainly, the more he will be embarrassed if he does not receive assistance. Where we have found many pages necessary a word would have sufiiced if we had been writing only for professional anatomists. These Instruc- tions might have been so far abridged as to reduce them to a few pages of generalities. But the more they were abridged the smaller would be found to be the number of persons capable of understanding and applying them. So all the points which during the last five years have given rise to misunderstandings, either in France or elsewhere, even though this has occurred only in exceptional cases, have been the object of special supplementary explanations. This wealth of details is likewise of a nature to simplify very much the task of corrector of signalments which has been incimibent upon us. Thanks to the numbering of each paragraph we shall be dispensed from repeating continually the same explanations in the manuscript correspondence that we carry on with various French and foreign police officials. A mere refer- ence of a faulty measurer to such and such a paragraph of such a page will be sufficient to enable him to correct himself. In conclusion, although the modifications introduced do not involve, as we have already stated, any essential change, the practitioners who have studied the first edition ought to take it upon themselves to read over this new pub- lication in its entirety, indicating by a pencil mark the passages which require any change in their method of operating, so as to be able to find them readily again and to study them over at leisure. For, in addition to the important corrections pointed out above, there are few paragraphs, and few sentences even, which have not been to some extent modified. lO AUTHOR'S PREFACE The absoluteness of our aflfirmations in questions of identity, and especially in the most difiEcult cases of the identification of two photographs, still surprises, and sometimes disturbs for a moment, those functionaries of the police and judiciary who have not learned by long experience what they call at the Government House our infallibility. We owed it even to ourselves to demonstrate that the habitual preremptoriness of our responses did not result from any hasty judgment, but was the rational outcome of the combination of various processes which, when correctly applied, do not leave the least room for indecision. May the present volume answer this purpose, and thus contribute to insure the survival and general diffusion of the method. The execution of the engravings, and particularly of the chromotypographic plate of the eyes and the thirty photo- collographic plates devoted to the descriptive characters, has occasioned an expense which we could not have borne without the assistance of the Minister of the Interior and of his eminent director, Mr. Lagarde. Since the year 1889, on the proposition of Mr, Bompard and the report of Mr. Guichard, the Counsel- General for the Department of the Seine has on his part gener- ously granted us a subsidy to assist in making known this new method, which, invented by a Parisian (in March, 1879), and tried for the first time ten years ago in Paris, is now in use throughout the entire world. Alphonse Bertillon. Introduction Summary: /. Theoretical study of sigiialment. — //. Account of the three kinds of signalment : i. Anthropometrical signalment; 2. Descriptive signalment; 3. Signalment by peculiar marks. — ///. Final considerations and conclusions: i. The comparative place of the three kinds; 2. Organization of the Identification Service at the Parisian Prefecture of Police; 3. Workings of the service of anthropometrical signalment in other parts of France; 4. Statistics of the results obtained at Paris and in other parts of France; 5. Advnce to officials who \\'ish to consult the anthropometrical records; 6. The internationalization and enlargement of the system. THEORETICAL STUDY OF SIGNALMENT Signalment is the description of one whom it is desired to iden- tify (lyittre). In prison practice the signaletic notice accompanies every reception and every dehver}^ of a human individuahty; it is the muster-roll which preserves the evidence of the real and effective presence of the person had in \-iew by the administrative or judicial act. Whether in the case of an entrance to prison or a discharge, a liberation or a transfer, or merely the notification of a judicial or executive decision, the aim is always the same : to preserve a sufficient record of the personaHty to be able to identify the present description with one which may be presented at some future time. From this point of \dew signalment is the instrument, by excellence, of the proof of recidivation, which necessarily implies the proof of identity. So there could be no judicial records w^ithout the aid of signalment. Inversely, signalment sometimes interv^enes to prove non- identity, at the request of honorable persons (victims, it may be, of a forger, or of an unfortunate similarity of names,) who demand the effacement from their record of convictions unduly entered. 12 INTRODUCTION The new penal laws [of France] relating to banishment, con- ditional liberation, and suspension of sentence (Berenger laws) have singularly increased the number of concealments of identity by making such attempts more important to the criminal. It has, therefore, come to be expected of a system of signalment not only that it verify a declared identity, but that, on occasion, it shall cause the true identity to be discovered. Now, the making of original signalments, as well as their interpretation or correction, falls, in the nature of the case, upon the prison official. The prison must recognize its own. The police, which is a local authority, can lend to it in this emer- gency only an assistance limited to its own field of action. The law^s intended to prevent the repetition of crime practically make no distinction between a local recidivation and recidivation incurred in different parts of the territory of the Republic. The obligation then evidently rests upon the Administration of Prisons of identifying and describing, without distinction of origin, the recidivists of all countries who may seek to conceal themselves under false names in the midst of the prison population. This important result has only been attained by the centraliza- tion, in a special servdce, of copies of all the signalments taken in the different prisons of France. This is the side of the problem which more especially necessitates the anthropometrical part of the signaletic notice. Thirty years ago it was believed that photography was going to furnish the solution of the question. But the collection of judicial portraits thus brought together soon became so numerous that it became physically impossible to find, to discover, among them the likeness of an individual who concealed his name. During the last ten years the Parisian police have collected over 100,000 photographs. Do you suppose it possible to compare successively each of these 100,000 photographs with each of the 100 individuals who are arrested daily in Paris? If it were to be attempted in the case of some specially noteworthy malefactor, the search would take more than a week of application; not to speak of the errors and omissions which a work so delicate and fatiguing to the eye would not fail to occasion. There was need of a method of elimination analogous to that employed in the sciences of botany and zoology; that is to say, THEORETICAI, STUDY OF SIGNAI,MENT I3 taking as its basis the characteristic elements of the individuality, and not the name, which is liable to falsification. We may remark, in passing, that the absence of a natural classification is an objection which applies equally to all systems of judicial identification that have been proposed to supplant photography. We will mention, among others: ( i ) the impression of the tip of the thumb, a method which, it appears, is practiced by the Chinese; (2) the plaster cast of the jaw, which certain dentists would desire to impose upon our criminals; (3) the minute drawing of the areola and denticulation of the human iris, somewhat after the method proposed by me some ten years ago; (4) the impression, mold, or photograph of the ear, the hollows and projections of which present so great an individual variety that it is almost impossible to find two human ears exactly alike, and which are so persistent in the individual that the shape seems to remain unchanged from infancy to old age; (5) the anatomical description of peculiar marks, beauty-spots, scars, etc. Some one said long ago that it is impossible to find two leaves exactly alike; Nature never repeats herself. Select no matter what part of the human body, examine and compare it carefully in different subjects, and the more minute your examination is the more numerous the dissimilarities will appear: exterior vari- ations, interior variations in the bony structure, the muscles, the tracing of the veins; physiological variations in the gait, the expressions of the face, the action and secretion of the organs, etc. The dog that is seeking his master in a crowd goes over the place in every direction, his nose to the ground. Homer tells us that after an absence of twenty years Ulysses, disguised as a mendicant, was recognized only by his dog, ' ' the faithful and keen-scented Argos." Here there is evidently an element of individuality, and consequently of recognition, which entirely escapes the senses of man. But a few words pronounced in a natural voice, and "Kdisonized," would leave a very convincing trace of identity. Thus, the solution of the problem of judicial identification con- sists less in the search for new characteristic elements of indi- viduality than in the discovery of a method of classification. Certainly, I do not deny, to speak only of the Chinese method, that the filagreed arabesques found on the epidermis of the anterior face of the thumb may be at the same time permanent in the same sub- 14 INTRODUCTION ject and extraordinarily variable from one subject to another; and that every individual may thus possess a species of seal, original and entirely distinctive. Unfortunately, it is quite as undeniable, in spite of the ingenious investigations made by Mr. Francis Galton in England, that these designs taken by themselves do not present elements of variability suJB&ciently well-defined to serve as a basis of classification in a file of several hundred thousand cases ( i ) . The anthropometrical signalment, besides offering as much and even more variability than the several methods that we have just enumerated, is admirably adapted to classification; this is its aim,, its principal purpose, and the reason of its superiority. II ACCOUNT OF THE THREE KINDS OF SIGNALMENT I. ANTHROPOMETRICAL SIGNAI.MENT The use of anthropometry as a method of identification rests upon the three following data, which the experience of these last ten years has shown to be indisputable, to wit: 1. The almost absolute immutability of the human FRAME AFTER THE TWENTIETH YEAR OF THE AGE. The height only, or, to be more exact, the thigh-bone, often continues to grow for two or three years longer, but so little that it is easy to make allowance for it. Experience shows that this small increase is more than compensated for by the curving of the vertebral column (indicated on the signaletic card by the term C7i7'v.), which, commencing about the twentieth year, continues to accen- tuate itself by degrees until old age. 2. The EXTREME DIVERSITY OF DIMENSION WHICH THE HUMAN SKELETON PRESENTS WHEN COMPARED IN DIFFERENT SUBJECTS, to such an extent that it would be diflScult, if not impossible, to find two individuals whose bony structure is, we will not say exactly identical, but even sufficiently alike to make any con- fusion between them possible. (1) Since the publication of the French edition instructions have been griven to the French signaletic agents (by circular of January, 1S94,) for the taking of digital impres- sions, and a place has been provided for these on the card. (See Appendix C, p. 260.) ANTHROPOMETRICAI, SIGNAI,MENT 15 3. The facility and comparative precision with which CERTAIN dimensions OF THE SKELETON MAY BE MEASURED in the lixang subject by means of calipers of very simple construction. The following are, from among the innumerable measurements that it is possible to take of the human body, those to which, after minute criticism, we have finally given a place on the formula for anthropometrical signalment. Measurements of the body at large: Measurements of the head: Measiu-ements of the limbs: Height (height of a man standing). Reach (length of the outstretched arms, from finger-tip to finger-tip). Trunk (height of a man sitting). Length of the head. Width of the head. Length of the right ear. L Width of the right ear ( i ). Length of the left foot. Length of the left middle finger. Length of the left little finger. Length of the left forearm. These observations are of value only on the indispensable con- dition that they are taken in a rigorously uniform and exact way. The signaletic value of the length of a bone is, other things being equal, directly proportional to the accuracy' of its measurement. This is a very important point, upon which we must particularly insist. Let us suppose, for example, that in some way or other we were able, always and everywhere, to measure the stature in such a way as to commit an error one-half less than that to which this indication is ordinarily liable; it is evident that the figure thus obtained would permit the distinguishing of twice as many indi- viduals; in other words, it would have a double signaletic value. But what final results would one not obtain, supposing the same improvement in measuring to be afterwards applied success- ively to the ten other obser\'ations of the anthropometrical signal- ment! The reach taken with double precision would differentiate in the same way twice as many persons, which, taking account of the result already obtained from the height, would quadruple the (1) For this has been substituted since the publication of the French edition the measurement of the bi-zygoraatic diameter, that is, the width of the face across the cheek-bones, which is entirely distinct from the width of the head above the ears (see Appendix C). l6 INTRODUCTION number of subjects recognizable by these two characteristics taken together (2 x 2=4). A similar improvement in the measurement of the height of the trunk would also double on its part the pre- ceding number, which would thus become eig-M times as large as the original one. The transformation of the eight other meas- urements, each involving a successive reduplication, would progressively raise this co-efl&cient to the number of 2048 (8x2x2x2x2x2x2x2x2=2048)! Thus the simple fact of being able to take each of the eleven measures of the anthropometrical signalment with double pre- cision would render this instrument more than two thousand times better; in other words, if the first signalment, such as we have supposed it, would allow of a thousand persons being distinguished one from the other (we mention this number at random) the new one, after this ideal improvement, would distinguish among two million (1000x2000=2,000,000). Inversely, the least negligence, or even the least difference in the method of operating which diminished the accuracy of the observation, might, by continuing itself through our whole series of measurements, result in almost nullifying the signaletic value of an anthropometrical description. These considerations demonstrate beyond any question the abso- lute necessity of taking the measurements with all possible accu- racy, by means of special instruments and in exact conformity with the minute instructions which are the object of the technical part of this volume. The short summary that we shall give here, while manifestly insufficient for guidance in practice, will serve at least to impress upon the reader the signification of each of these observations (see frontispiece). The total height is projected by means of a wooden square of special form upon a graduated metre placed vertically against the wall. The subject, barefooted, is placed with his back to the wall, the vertebral column about fifteen centimetres to the left of the scale. The more rapidly the operation is performed the more accurate it will be. The r^a<:^, or length of the arms extended in the shape of a cross, is taken immediately afterwards, almost without moving the subject, by means of a mural graduation whose centimetrical vertical lines are adapted to all heights. ANTHROPOMETRIC AI. SIGNAI.MENT 1 7 The measurement of the height of the trunk (the height of a man when seated) is then effected by the aid of instruments analogous to those employed for the full height. The two cranial diameters {length and width of the skull) are both maximuvi dimensions. They should be taken by means of a special compass furnished with a graduated arc of a circle, of the type commonly called caliper compasses. The length of the head is measured from the hollow at the root of the nose, taken as the fixed point, to the most prominent part of the back of the head. The measuring of the width (the maximum tranverse diame- ter) is a little more dehcate operation. It differs notably from the preceding in that there is no fixed point and that the extrem- ities of the two branches of the instrument should in this case be removed together horizontally and symmetrically from each side of the head. Very important reinark: These two observations must always receive a verification called the control, which consists in fixing the branches of the compass, by means of the thumb-screw, at the distance ascertained by the first investigation, and then trying them again on the head of the subject, modifying the separation of the branches until the desirable double contact is attained ( i ) . The two diameters of the right ear are measured on their maximum axis, by means of a small caliper rule of special make, taking care not to depress in any manner the soft parts of the ear. These two last operations are the only ones which are per- formed on the right side of the individual, as all the unilateral observations which are to follow should deal with the left side alone. This exception results from the fact that it has seemed prefer- able to make the measuring and description bear on that ear which it is customary, for various technical reasons, to reproduce in judicial photography. The naked left foot should be measured with care to have the whole weight of the body rest on this foot extended flat on the ground (preferably on a stool), the right foot being lifted and (1) The measuring of the two diameters, whether at the time of the investigation or of the control, ought to be effected while holding the arms of the compass almost horizon- tally, and not vertically as is often done as the result of an erroneous interpretation of the illustrations in the last edition. l8 INTRODUCTION held backwards. The stem of the large caliper rule employed for this measurement is apphed along the foot on the side next the great toe. The fixed branch being placed against the heel of the subject, the movable branch ought to touch, without depressing, the extremity of the great toe. It is needless to say that the anthropometrical length of the foot is different from the meastire taken by the shoemaker, and that a shoe the measurement for which had been taken in so ex- act a manner could not be worn. The aim in this case is not to make a pair of shoes, but to obtain a constant length that will be unalterable and that may at any time be taken over again mth as much precision as at the time and place of the operation ( i ) . The middle a?id little fingers of the left hand are measured at right angles from the joint at the back of the hand by means of the small branches of the large caliper rule. These two observa- tions have considerable signaletic value if they are taken exactly according to the instructions. The left forearm is measured from the point of the elbow to the extremity of the middle finger, the forearm being bent at an acute angle with the arm and the hand extended flat on the table, nails upwards. This operation necessitates for its sat- isfactory performance the use of a table especiall}- high and nar- row, in the form of a trestle, the design and dimensions of which have been accurately indicated in plate I of the Album. Nothing is easier than to have one of this description constructed by penal labor. All the measurements of our system of signalment, the reach excepted, are taken by inclosing the part to be measured between two parallel surfaces the distance between which is shown on a graduated bar. In the three calipers employed, the reading of the graduation should be made by turning to the point opposite the (l) The shoemakers' pointing is equal to about 6.75 millimetres [,'3 inch], which gives in round numbers 3 points to each 2 centimetres. The maximum length of the shoe measured tfjr/^rzor/j', in conformity with the practice of the trade, is from 12 to 20 milli- metres (either two or three points) greater than the anthropometric length of the foot that it contains. Consequently, in order to transform the length of a foot into shoemakers' pointing, add, according to the case, from 12 to 20 millimetres to the anthropometrical figure and multiply the sum by 3 2. Inversely, to change a pointing into a signaletic length, sub- tract 2 or 3 points and multiply by 2 3 (Dr. Georges Bertillon, De la reconstitution du signalment anthropometrique au moyen des pieces de i'habillement, i. e.," Onthe Kecon- struction of the Anthropometrical Signalment by Means of Pieces of Clothing." Inaug- ural thesis, Paris, 1892). [Each point represents a size. The men's sizes, 5 to i3, measure 28K to 37^ points respectively. J ANTHROPOMETRICAI, SIGNAI.MENT 19 zero mark (analogous to that used in verniers) which will be found about in the middle of the movable bolt. The placing of this mark is determined, in practice as well as theory, by this very simple means, that the instrument wheti dosed ought to indicate zero. It is unnecessary to say that the arrangement of these instru- ments was the subject of many experiments and numberless improvements before they reached their present shape, which we consider as final. So we reject in advance every modification, every further change, however slight, either in their form or in the manner of using them. That is a great temptation to beginners, to whom numerous new ideas occur, but who are not aware that all these ideas, even those that they believe to be the most original, the most personal, have already been proposed by others, tried and finally rejected for divers reasons. In reality every change introduced into the anthropometrical manual of operation, whether in its essential parts mentioned above or in the details described in the first part of the bistruc- tions, can only result in augmenting the amount of the possible and inevitable error with which human observations are always more or less marred, that is to say, as has been demonstrated above, to weaken, if not to completely annul, the signaletic •value of these observations. The Classification of Signalments The measurements enumerated here have been taken on the 120,000 subjects who have passed through the prisons of Paris during these last ten years, and copied on as many slips of card- board, measuring 146 millimetres in length and 142 in width, which are arranged in small movable boxes. The following are the principal outlines of the method which has presided over the classification of this enormous mass of signalments. The men are placed on one side, the women on the other. The latter, much less numerous here than the men, do not amount to more than 20,000. From the 100,000 masculine signalments remaining there must be further deducted about 10,000 relating to minors under twenty-one years of age, which require a special classification. 20 INTRODUCTION As for the 90,000 signalments of adults, they are first dis- tributed according to length of head into the three following primary divisions: 1st div., the short lengths of head, comprising about 30,000 signalments. 2nd div., of the medium lengths of head, about 30,000 signalments. 3rd div., of the lo7ig lengths of head, about 30,000 signalments. The words short, medium and long are here rigorously defined by figures. Experience has proved it to be possible, after some trials, to fix their values once for all in such wise that each of the three classes shall contain an approximately equal number of signalments. Naturally this result can be obtained only by confining the medium class within narrower bounds than the short or the long. Thus the numerical limits of the medium length of head, according to the usage of the Prefecture of Police in Paris, cover an interval of only six millimetres (from 185 to igo^^^), while those of the long, which extends from 1 9 1 to the greatest possible dimension, include more than three centimetres, for heads more than 22 centimetres long are sometimes met with. The division of the short lengths includes in the same way heads 1 60 millimetres long, for example, along with others of 184, that is to say, 25 millimetres larger. In the threefold division: a to 184, 185 to 190, 191 to (^ (i), it is naturally the tw^o limit numbers of the median value which determine the whole sj'stem. Each of these three great masses of 30,000 signalments each is again subdivided, without any further regard to the length of head, into three groups, based on the width of head. It was long since observ^ed in anthropology that the wddth of the head varies independently of its length. In other words, it does not follow that because we know the length of a skull we ca7i foresee what will be its width. These new subdivisions, nine in number, are made up as follows: Those of the narrow -nndths of head - - only 10,000 signalments. Those of the medium \vidths of head - only 10,000 signalments. Those of the broad widths of head - - only 10,000 signalments. (1) The two Greek letters a and w Ca/;>Aa and omega) are used here abbreviately to represent: a the smallest or mm z>«i<»z and w the largest or tna xi mum ^{mension with which it is possible to meet. ANTHROPOMETRIC AI, SIGNALMENT 21 In their turn these nine subdivisions of 10,000 are each divided into three groups, according to the length of the medius or middle finger, giving us a total of 27 under- subdivisions, which now number: Those of small middle fingers - only about 3,300 signalments. Those of medium middle fingers- - only about 3,300 signalments. Those of large middle fingers - only about 3,300 signalments. The length of the foot furnishes a fourth indication, which again subdivides each of the groups previously obtained into three containing about 1,100 signalments each (i). Then come three subdivisions based on the length .of the forearm, which reduce the preceding number to less than 400. The variations in the height divide each of these last lots into three of about 130 signalments, which are finally distributed, still on the same principle, into classes of sixty by means of the variations in the length of the little finger (2 ), and into classes of twelve according to the color of the ej'^e. This last group of twelve signalments is itself arranged according to the increasing values of the length of the ear. It is thus that, thanks to the six new anthropometrical data (the sex, height, age and color of the eyes having appeared in signalments from time immemorial), the collection of 120,000 signalments at the Prefecture of Police in Paris finally becomes divided into groups of a dozen each ! (1) There is an indisputable relation between the length of the middle finger and that of the foot. The proof of this is the proceeding of the hosiers, who, when fitting their customers with stockings, ascertain the length of their feet by measuring the circumfer- ence of the closed fist. Nevertheless, experience proves that the dependence of one of these measures upon the other is not so strict but what it is possible to distribute a group of subjects having the same medius into three equal categories based upon the length of the foot. The independence of one dimension as regards the other increases in proportion to the degree of precision attained in the measuring of each. Nevertheless, the limits of the figures of the tripartite divisions by length of foot change according to the category of middle fingers which is to be subdivided. Thus the medium foot of one of the branchings of the small middle fingers will necessarily have other boundaries than the medium foot of the medium or lai-ge middle fingers. Each limit needs to be determined separately. (2) The variations in the length of the little finger, that of the middle finger being given, are not great enough to furnish the elements of a tripartite division approxi- mately equal. In such a case the difference is necessarily in favor of the median division, which is enlarged somewhat at the expense of those above and below; whence the approximate figure of 60 mentioned here, instead of about 40, the number which would have resulted from the division of 130 into three equal parts. 22 INTRODUCTION lyCt US suppose now that we wish to ascertain from the collec- tion whether an individual who has just been arrested and claims to have no judicial antecedents has not previously been classified under another name. It goes without saying that it will be necessar>', after having taken an anthropometrical signalment of him, to turn to the division for the length of head corresponding to that of the individual examined, stopping at the subdivision of his width of head, and after\vards looking for the subdivision of his middle finger, then that of his foot and that of his forearm. Thus, by one elimination after another, the final packet is reached which ought to contain the signalment sought for, if, of course, the arrested person has ever been convicted and meas- ured before. When one or more of the measurements taken anew on the individual fall on the limits of the divisions of the classification, the investigation should be pursued in the various adjoining com- partments, exactly as in a dictionary one looks in different places for a word the exact spelling of which he does not know. These limit explorations considerably prolong the investigations when they are required in the case of several of the measures. They- should therefore be conducted in a fixed order and according to a mechanical law of combinations which has received from the special employees upon whom the duty falls the characteristic name of double searches. In these resides the only difficulty of the anthropometrical identification. They fall, how- ever [in France] entirely upon the personnel of the central service. The results obtained in ten years of practice have demonstrated that this obstacle is very easily overcome. It will be noticed by this time that the anthropometrical elim- inations just indicated do not occur in the same order as that given in the list of the measures to be taken. This latter arrangement, which is that of the card and signaletic formulae used in prisons, follows the course which ought, as far as possible, to be followed in measuring the subject, in order especially not to have to lay down an instrument until all the indications have been exhausted in the taking of which it is used. It is likewise the order of exposition which has been followed in the chapters of the Anthropometrical Instriictions. The order of classification is determined by a consideration of an entirely different kind : that is, of placing at the beginning ANTHROPOMETRICAI. SIGNALMENT 23 those measures which have the greatest signaletic power, that is to say those which are at once the most stable in the same individual and the most variable from one individual to another, in order that the elimination first effected may give the least pos- sible occasion for hesitation and the double searches which it necessitates. The latter are more rapidly and easily effected in proportion as they concern the ultimate ramifications of the classification. It is important to bear in mind that the fact of two signalments being found in the same final compartment does not imply a necessary and absolute agreement between the figures of the two sets of measurements. Even in the median or mean division, where the resemblances are much the closest, three categories of dimensions may almost be distinguished, independent one of the other, according as the figure in question borders upon the small division or upon the large, or is intermediate between the two. A comparison of the numerical signalment on the cards classified in the same final compartment shows that it is well-nigh impossible, in looking at hazard through the anthropometrical files, to find two signalments exactly alike, so that the agreement of the figures comes at last to constitute a quasi-certitude of identity. The rational discussion of the figures of the metric signalment in the ultimate subdivisions of the classification, as well as the comprehension of those cases which approach so near to the limit of our threefold divisions as to necessitate the dotible searches spoken of in a preceding paragraph, presupposes an exact knowledge of the number of millimetres by which two measurements may differ that have been made on the same person at different places and times and bj- different observers. "We have shown above that it is of the utmost importance that these de\4ations should be as small as possible. But with what- ever care and uniformity the measuring may be done, some differences will always be met with; it is impossible for it to be otherwise. It is so much the more important to have fixed rigor- ously upon the figure that these differences may reach but cannot exceed. The measuring of one same individual repeated ten times in succession would almost inevitably furnish in practice ten signal- ments all differing one from the other by insignificant quantities, 24 INTRODUCTION although all equally exact. It is almost impossible, for example, to obtain twice over the same set of millimetrical figures for the height, the trunk and the width of ear (i). A thorough knowledge of what may be termed the inaximum of tolerable deviation, or the requisite degree of approximatio7i, forms the basis of every administrative verification and of every judicial utilization of the anthropometrical signalment. In a special paragraph at the end of the technical instructions relative to each measurement will be found a precise indication of this allowance, which varies greatly according to the part of the body measured. It is shown for the whole series in the fol- lowing recapitulatory table, with all the explanations of which the subject permits. Height Reach Trunk Length of head Width of head Length of right ear Width of right ear Length of left foot Length of left middle finger Length of left little finger. Length of left forearm Approxima- tion theoretically requisite (in + or in — ) 7 lO 7 0-5 0-5 I 1-5 1-5 0-5 0.75 1-5 Discrepancy beyond which GRAVE ERROR begins. 15 20 15 Mistakes of a very serious character, or discrepancies beyond which one is justified in declaring non-identity. 30 40 30 2 2 4 6 6 2 3 6 (1) Thus falls the popular argument which consists in enlarging upon millimetrical differences in the height, the trunk, the ear, the forearm, etc., to prove the non-identity of two signalments. The question here is to know, not whether there are differences (since it is impossible thai there should not be some) but how great they are, and especially whether they do not exceed the limits of necessary approximation. ANTHROPOMETRICAI. SIGNAI.MENT 25 The figures in columns B and C are obtained by doubling and quadrupling respectively those of column A. The latter, which thus determines the whole system, gives us, for each measure- ment, in millimetres and fractions of a millimetre, the maximum variation which a scrupulous observer is liable to make in plus or in minus ( + or — ) from the true figure ( i ) . Thus in the case of the height a difference of less than 7 milli- metres, either above or below the supposed true figure, is always admissible and could not be characterized as a mistake. The allowance is the same as regards the trunk. But for the reach the difference between two measures equally well taken of one and the same subject may rise to 10 milli- metres or one centimetre, which is not surprising, this length being the only one in the entire signalment which is taken in round centimetric numbers, that is to say, without adding the millimetres. As these three observations are likely to be interfered with to some extent by trickery on the part of the subject it will always be necessary in comparing the result to take account also of the corrections and indications which might be mentioned either by way of note or under the heading airvature. The approximation of a half-millhnetre (o™°i 5) requisite in the measuring of cranial diameters and of the length of the middle Furthermore^ an absolute similarity in the figures, under such circumstances, far from proving the successive transit oj one same individuality through the lock-up of a prison would be an infallible indication of a mistake. The minute diflferences in question should then be interpreted as being the incon- trovertible and precious evidence that two signalments have been taken independently of each other, at different times, and are not duplicates of one same original. (1) The possibility of attaining this degree of precision in practice will not be'disputed by any anthropometrist of a good school. Moreover, the accuracy of the figures in column A has been confirmed a posteriori by scrupulously compiled statistics based on the com- parison of more than 400 pairs of similar signalments of adult recidivists who, being again arrested and concealing their identity, were remeasured and finally recognized by the service during these last years. Here is for each measurement the exact figure obtained by dividing the total product of the errors by the number of cases: Height, 5 mm. 7; Reach, 7 mm. 8; Trunk, 7 mm. 3; Head: length, mm. 62; width, mm. 53; Ear: length, mm. 93; width, 1 mm. 3; Foot. 1 mm. 4; Middle finger, mm. 51; Little finger, mm. 66; Forearm, 1 mm. 35. The figures of column A, although obtained directly by experimentation, seem to be the transcription in round numbers of the mean error given by calculation. They are not then the expression of a desire, of an ideal unrealizable in practice, but give a sufficiently exact idea of the approximation which is attained every day by our anthropometric ofl&cers when they are operating under the worst conditions, that is to say, on a subject seeking to hide his identity and having an interest in cheating and without themselves knowing that these new observations are to be subjected to an ulterior comparison after the recognition of the identity. 26 INTRODUCTION finger will surprise at the outset those of our readers who, having had anthropometrical statements in their hands, may have remarked that the smallest decimal employed is the millimetre, in other words, that the half-millimetre is never mentioned. Nevertheless, it is easy to assure oneself, on a little reflection, that this degree of approximation is really attained, since dis- crepancies of one millimetre between two cranial diameters equally well taken on the same subject are only met with in anthropomet- rical practice when the trzie length falls almost exactly between two consecutive millimetrical figures. The other fractional numbers of the table, to wit: \^^ 5 (a milli- metre and a half) for the width of the ear and the lengths of the foot and forearm, and 0™°^ 75 (three quarters of a millimetre) for the length of the little finger, are explained in the same way by the necessity of taking account of the errors, either above or below the true number, which by their combination may produce a total non-fractional difference twice as great. The numbers in column A are the only ones in this table which are preceded by the signs -)- or — {plus or minus). The figures of column B, obtained by multiplying the preceding ones by 2, represent the maximum difference which may exist between two signalments of one same subject, without either of them, considered separately, having an error larger than that men- tioned in column A, that is to say, without necessarily indicating that a mistake has been made. Nevertheless, while discrepancies of this nature ought not in all cases to draw censure on either of the observers, they should, whenever possible (that is, whenever the subject is still present), give rise to 2i second verification with a view to making certain that the two divergent values are really both equally distant from the truth, which lies between them. If it were other\vise, if in the practice of anthropometry diver- gences so great as those of column B were allowed to creep in in ONE SINGLE DIRECTION, cases would necessarily arise in which these variations, occurring first in plus and then in minus, would attain an absolute difference equal to the figures of column C. But we have alread}^ insisted at sufficient length upon the necessity of attaining the greatest possible precision to make it useless to return to that point. It should then be considered that a mistake must have been made whenever a comparison of two signalments taken on the ANTHROPOMETRICAI, SIGNAI,MENT 27 same person discloses an error equal to that of column G (obtained by doubling the figures of column B). The mistake will be slight if it reaches in each signalment only half of this discrep- ancy (that is to say, the figures of column B); it will be very serious if it is attributable to one alone of the two signalments examined. Consequently, column C gives us the values beyond which one is justified in declaring the non-identity of two signalments of whose accuracy one is equally sure. Theoretically, a single variation greater than that indicated in colum^n C, as for example a difference of three millimetres in one of the cranial diameters, or of six millimetres in the length of the foot, etc., should sufl&ce to demonstrate the non- identity of two signalments. Nevertheless, in view of human frailty, it would be wise to accept this conclusion only after the discovery in another measurement of a farther marked discrepancy. A knowledge of the maximum discrepancy enables us to appre- ciate in an intelligent manner the recognitory value which should be attributed to anthropometrical signalment, and confirms what we have said above regarding the almost complete impossibility of finding in the collection two concordant signalments, that is to say two presenting approximately the same figures although not referring to the same person. This is a fundamental question which daily arises in the courts. The response to be given varies somewhat according to whether the discovery of the disputed signalment has been brought about: ist, by means of a judicial inquiry, properly so called; or, 2nd, by a spontaneous search by means of the threefold classification previously described. I^et us begin by examining the first case. The revelations of a witness, the casual admissions of the interested party, a seizure of papers, etc. , lead to the discovery in the criminal archives of an old judicial document containing an anthropometrical signalment all the observations of which correspond, within the limits of ad- missible discrepancy, with those made on the individual present. No hesitation ! the agreement of the figures ought to be regarded in such a case as an absolutely final proof. Witnesses may be led into error by physical coincidences in height, age, and complexion (see plates 59 and 60 of the A/dum). It may also happen that the interested party has been tempted to profit by 28 INTRODUCTION such resemblances as have come to his knowledge. But the anthropometrical observations are free from this suspicion, from the very fact that they are necessarily made by the use of instru- ments of precision. And even if the individual in question were to have at his disposal all the necessary instruments, the whole assembled population of a penitentiary would still be manifestly insufi&cient to enable him to meet with a single subject having approximately the same measurements as himself. For him to have any chance of succeeding, it would be necessary to suppose that the person in question, having at some period of his life had free access to the central files at Paris, for example, had been able to examine at leisure the final compartment into which his own sig- nalment would fall, in order to find there the name of some subject sufl&ciently resembling him in his measurements to be con- founded with himself. This is an hypothesis the impossibility of which it is needless to discuss. Even if it were admitted, the chance of meeting an interchange- able signalment would be very small. An examination of the second case will demonstrate this to us. In the presence of an individual who is manifestly concealing his name, investigations methodically carried on in the central archives, without any other clew than the necessary anthropomet- rical eliminations, have resulted in the discovery of a signalment all the metrical indications of which agree with those of the subject of the inquiry: what degree of confidence should be accorded to such a coincidence? The reply demands some preliminary explanations. Theoretically it ought to be admitted, indeed, that it is always possible, as soon as we have brought together a suflScient number of signalments, to find among them two which are equivalent although referring to two different individuals. The figm-es of our measurements varying only within certain fixed limits, the number of combinations that thej^ may present among themselves is equally limited. The whole question seems, then, to be summed up in knowing the number of signalments which must have been collected, in order to afford a chance of finding among them two similar ones. But to give to this problem a solution which will be at the same time accurate and practical, it is necessary to know of what figures the signalment in question is composed. It is evident, for ANTHROPOMETRICAI. SIGNAI,MENT 29 instance, that an individual having an exceptionally great height, combined with minimum cephalic diameters, would be very much more easily recognized than if his whole set of measurements corresponded to the average. These last conditions have been intentionally realized in the following signalment, which has been furnished with figures •exactly average, or rather median, that is to say, equally distant from the limits of the small and large divisions of the three-fold ■classification. ■^ r Length iSy^m Foot - - - i^ 880 ^ { ^,1^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ Eye chestnut (4th class) This is the signaletic combination which, completed by the indication of an age somewhere between 35 and 40 years, for ■example, is most likely, theoretically and practically, to be met with in an anthropometrical file (i). Now an experiment, the accuracy of which we guarantee, and which it is easy to repeat, shows that it is impossible to find an exact duplicate, within a millimetre, in the anthropometrical file ■of 90,000 methodically classified adult signalments at the Pre- fecture of Police. (1) The probability of meeting: any specified dimension, height, cranial diameters or osseous lengths, diminishes rapidly and symmetrically in proportion as we depart in either direction from the medium dimension, which is necessarily the most frequent- Thus, while a height of 1 m. 65, which is in France the medium height, is observed (to within 5 millimetres), 60 times among a thousand subjects, the heights of 1 m. 55 and 1 m. 74, which are only ten centimetres removed (plus and minus respectively), are met with only 22 times in the same group, and the heights of 1 m. 50 and 1 m. 79 only 6 times ! This distribution has been represented on the curve below, called binomial after the mathematical formula to which it seems to be subject. E;ach vertical line corresponds at any given height to a difference of 5 millimetres, plus or minus, and its height is proportional to the number of subjects of this stature that are likely to be found in each 1000 persons. The curve would approximately be the same if, instead of arranging the total height cen- timetre by centimetre, one were to arrange the lengths of the head millimetre by milli- -- metre. In the latter case the central mean dimension, instead of representing a length Fig. 3. of 1 m. 65, would have a v^lue of m. 1S7, and the adjacent numbers would be respectively 182 and 192—177 and 197, etc. The width of the head and the lengths of the middle finger, the foot, the forearm, etc., would furnish similar illustrations, by making the appro- vpriate corrections in the central value and in the mode of grouping. (over) nt5 i"5o r55 reo i'65 no ris rso 1-85 30 INTRODUCTION The search is equally vain if, in place of an absolute identity in the figures, one contents oneself with examining the signalments which might be confounded with it within the limit of approxima- tion given in column A. In order to succeed in finding a single signalment assimilable to the type above-mentioned it is necessary to alter the values plus or 7ninus by quantities equal to those of column B, differences which are known to be observed only in cases of careless measure- ment, if not of error properly so called. But if, instead of imposing upon our typical signalment the still admissible divergencies of column B,we subjected it to the varia- tions in plus or minus given in column C, the result of the search in our files takes on a very different aspect: in place of one corresponding card we find thirty of them ! It should not be sup- posed, however, that these thirty signalments, although confound- able with our median type, would all be so at the same time among themselves. In reality, to allow for variations equal to those of column C, in our search through the files, will result in giving to the preceding signalment the subjoined form: H. im 645 ± 30 R. im 680 ± 4 T. cm 880 ± .30 -% fi87 ± 2 Foot 259 + 5 a '^ 156 ± 2 M. f. 114 + 2 J3 ( 63 ± 4 L. f. 89 ± '^ I 37 ±6 Forearm 451 + The existence of these rules, which constitute what might be called the philosophy of anthropometry, may be easily verified, for a specified measurement, by distributing a hundred signalments into separate packets, corresponding to the variations observed either by millimetres, or by half-centimetres, or centimetres, etc. For each measure- ment, the thickness of the packets obtained by the superposition of cards bearing one same figure will grow proportionately to the number of similar cases observed, and will always end by realizing, in a greater or less degree, the theoretic curve. As has been said above, the increasing frequency of the cases in proportion as the mean is approached demonstrates the inevitable necessity of circumscribing the median division within narrow limits, if we wish to obtain packets of equal size in the tripartite division. Thus, to distribute a human group into three equal parts based on the stature, the median height ought to comprise only subjects of from 1 m. 620 to 1 m. 679 while the small division should extend from a to 1 m. 619, and the large from 1 m. 680 to u. On the other hand, one should not go from one extreme to the other by assigning, under pretext of an equal distribution, such narrow limits to the median division that the small and large divisions, being no longer separated from each other save by a merely nominal quantity smaller than the necessary degree of approximation, would be liable to be confounded one with the other. The establishment of the anthropometrical .signalment has consisted precisely in the choosing of such osseous lengths and processes of mensuration as would render these conditions practically realizable. ANTHROPOMETRICAL SIGNAI.MENT 3I The operation to be performed consists then in the extraction from our file of all the signalments, without exception, which represent a combination of figures comprised respectively between the upper and lower limits indicated in the followmg table: H. in>6i5 to in.675 1 I '^' '; '^l l^^^l ^54 to 264 ^ 1 154 to 158 M. f. 112 to 116 R. i"> 640 to I"! 720 '^ b f 59 to 67 L. f . 86 to 92 T. o-nSso to 0-^910 w I 31 to 43 Forearm 445 to 457 Now it is evident, to speak only of the height, that while it is within the bounds of possibility for our mean figure of i°^ 65 to be confounded on the one hand with a height of i™ 62, and on the other with one of i™ 68, it is absolutely impossible to suppose that one and the same individual could have ascribed to him the first time a height of i"^ 62, and the second one of i™ 69. The same mathematical discussion applied successively to each of the eleven anthropometrical indications leads to this conclusion, that there are scarcely a dozen cards in the thirty which agree within the limits of the greatest admissible discrepancy. Thus the observation of the facts confirms with sufficient exact- ness the exclusively mathematical deductions given at the outset of this discussion (p. 24), to wit, the very great difference which must be made regarding the degree of certainty in the identifica- tion of two signalments according as their figures agree within the limits of column A and B, or differ by the double quantities mentioned in column C. It must not be forgotten, moreover, that the type-signalment which has served as a basis for our demonstration is a signalment arbitrarily invented with a view to leading precisely to that one of our fifteen thousand final divisions whose limits are confined within the nearest figures (see note, p. 29), and that to remove one of the values in the same signalment a short distance from the mean would be enough to once more render it almost impossible to discover in the collection a second signalment like it. From the preceding facts we draw this practical conclusion that, when the anthropometrical observations contested by the inter- ested person are submitted to the judgment of a court, the agent or expert charged with the interpretation of these documents should never neglect (after having shown that the figures agree, by indicating that the necessary degree of approximation has been 32 INTRODUCTION attained separately for each measurement) to note which of the values are most distant from the mean and how far they are removed from it (see the appendix on the Verbal Portrait). The proof of identity will be so much the surer according as these anomalies of dimension manifest themselves in opposite directions: if, for example, a superior height is associated with a middle finger that is small or merely equal to the general average, etc. It must be repeated that a signalment approximating to the average in all its parts is very rarely met with, and that, even in this case, an identification based exclusively upon the anthropo- metrical signalment will be very near the truth, since, even allowing for the enormous errors of column C, it does not permit the confounding of more than ten individuals out of a total of over 40,000 of the same approximate age within fifteen years. Nevertheless, whatever may be the similarity in the figures of the two signalments, however abnormal from an anthropometrical point of view they may be supposed to be, they could not in themselves be sufficient to satisfy the demands of a court when their discovery is the result of a search by elimination in the central files. To the argument derived from such an agreement it should really be objected that it is not at all convincing when it has been wished for, sought after, chosen as such, among all the cards of an immense collection. The older this collection is and the more it has been increased by the annual accumulation of new signal- ments the more legitimate will be the doubt. ■ It is of the first necessity, in order to render the identification indisputable, that it should be subsequently confirmed by a body of independent facts which do not come under consideration during the classification and search of the signaletic card; such is the function of the descriptive information and the statement of peculiar marks, which ought to be attached to every signal- ment and are to form the subject of the two following chapters. II. DESCRIPTIVE SIGNALMENT The descriptive signalment as opposed to the anthropometrical is that which describes in words, by the aid of observation alone, without the assistance of instruments. Such is the well known type of the signalments still in use for passports, hunting permits, etc. DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI^MENT 33 We intend to show how it is possible to give to the descriptive signalment something of the accuracy of the anthropometrical signalment by applying it to the viethod of Imiits of approxijnation. For this let us turn to the note on page 29, where a prelim- inary allusion has been made to the law of seriation of dimensions. We have there noted the fact of the regular and symmetrical dim- inution of frequency in proportion as one departs from the central mean, and our readers have before their minds the form of the curve, mathematically termed bmomial , which by a stroke of the pen portrays the ensemble of these facts. We have seen that, whatever be the part of the body examined, the same distribution, reproducing the same curve, is met with everj'where. Now this law has a still more general bearing; it regulates not only the dimensions, but the lines and shapes of men as well as of animals, of living beings as well as of inanimate objects. All that lives, increases, or decreases, oscillates between a max- imum and a viinimum, between which are grouped the multitude of intermediate forms, growing so much the more numerous as they approach the mean and so much the rarer as they recede from it. This natural law, discovered by the illustrious Belgian, Quetelet, finds its explanation in the endless intermingling of creative causes, and more especially, as regards the human species, in the fusion of races, dark with fair, large with small, etc. However it may be a priori, we may lay it down as a principle, that our descriptive vocabulary will be so much the more conform- able to the nature of things, and consequently so much the more susceptible of being applied with exactitude and facility, the more it is inspired by this universal rule. Common parlance, the offspring of daily necessity, has no care for these general ideas. Most frequently it has no words at its disposal save for the extreme, well-defined cases, which for that very reason are exceptional, and it inconsiderately neglects the intermediate ones, that is to say nine-tenths of the cases, for which it only offers the qualifications ordinary, average, common, which are all summed up in the term, also much used, of nothing. Thus everyone knows, for instance, what is meant by blue eyes and dark eyes (which we call maroon^. But when there is question of naming the eyes intermediate between these two ethnic types, the current speech furnishes us only with inexact 34 INTRODUCTION words, in which all signs of graduation, of transition from one category to another, disappear. Thus the eyes usually termed grey, green, red, black, etc., are, strictly speaking, neither grey, nor green, nor red, nor black, but participate more or less in all these qualifications. The nose affords us an analogous illustration in the matter of shape. Common language tells us of a turned up or pug nose, of an aquiline or hooked nose, but it would be incapable of furnish- ing us with expressions for the multitude of noses which are neither distinctly turned up nor distinctly aquiUne. We might multiply these examples, which would all tend to prove that the public does not seek to describe but merely to depict, which is not the same thing, by means of a comparison or an image, those shapes that strike it, that is to say, the excep- tional shapes. This is unfortunate for the signalment writer, who, taken unawares nine times out of ten, will not know how to express the configurations coming under his notice which do not clearly belong to any of the kinds for the description of which he has terms at his disposal but are rather a mixture of all in various degrees. Thus the first of the conditions that a methodical notation should fulfil is to observ-e and transcribe, in appropriate terms, the order and the gradation that is seen in nature. This is the same principle that naturalists, from another point of of view, have expressed by the adage, Natura 7ionfacit salhis (Nature makes no leaps). In this respect no term of ordinary language could exceed the numerical form of expression, on account of the delicacy and sedation of its degrees : that is therefore the ideal which we must seek to approach. For greater definiteness let us compare the notation of the height of the body, formulated first by means of figures and then by the aid of words only. We all know that a height of i" 55, for example, is less than that of i"" 65, and this latter less than that of i"* 75; we have no difl&culty in supposing as many inter- mediate values as we wish, ranging from the smallest height to the greatest, by imperceptible degrees, centimetre by centimetre, or millimetre by millimetre. DESCRIPTIVE SIGNALIIENT 35 I^et US now seek to replace in the above example, the three foregoing figures b}^ words. The following appellations will immediately present themselves to the mind: s??iall height, viedium height, and large height. Their gradation is evident. However, we shall have rigorously fixed their value only when we have determined the lower and upper limits of the central term, in other words, when we know exactly where the small height ends, and where the large begins. Let us provisionally take for the first figure i ™ 60 and for the second i ™ 70. From this determination there will immediatel}' arise a dilemma. Suppose we have before us a height of about i ™ 69; as the errors in this measurement may easily amount to two or three centi- metres, we must expect to see the height in question signalized sometimes as medium and sometimes as large, without being able to allege the falsity of the latter appellation. As the same demonstration can be repeated for heights of from I ™ 58 to i°i62, bordering on the lower limit of the medium group, we are obliged to conclude that, when we read on a signal- ment the indication medium height, we may always foresee the possibility of discovering another signalment of the same indi\*idual in which the height is noted by the words either small or large. The term mediian loses then any sort of significance for the comparison of two written descriptions, since it may be connected with either of the three degrees of the series, small, m.edium or large. Now, according to the binomial cur\^e, the medium division alone contains half the cases, when the description is made by the eye without the aid of anthropometrical instruments, according to the ordinary methods of observation and notation. As the two extreme terms, large and small, are in the same manner liable to be confounded with the viedium term, which is of double frequency, their mention on a description eliminates only a quarter of the whole. We are thus led, in order to give to the term 77iedium any significance, to multiply the number of otur degrees by interpolating intermediate terms. The literary expression of these interpolations may take on many forms. Here is one example : 36 INTRODUCTION Limits proposed HEIGHTS Very small a to I'" 53 Small, properly speaking im 56 + 3cm Small, medium limit I"! 61 + 2cm jm 65 "1" ocm Large, medium limit I"> 69 Large, properly speaking im 74 1 -jcm Very large im 77 to W It must not be forgotten, moreover, that there is question here of describmg and not of measuring, that the example chosen is purely didactic, and that, as we have said above, the notation of the height in centimetres will always be infinitely preferable to even the most perfect vocabulary. If we have taken this example in preference to the color of the eye or the form of the nose, it is because of the convenience offered by the numerical notation for defining the gradation of terms, and because of the simplicity of the object of the description (the dimension in height), which is manifestly unique and easy to obtain. The number of grades, moreover, need not necessarily be limited to seven, as above. Thus, one might further add on the left a dwarf or extremely small height (from a to i™ 40), and on the right an extremely large or giant height (from i™ 90 to w). Here is a distribution into nine categories of a group of 1000 adult subjects : HEIGHTS LIMITS NUMBER OF CASES Dwarf and extremely small - a. to I"> 40 0.05 Very small - - - - im 47 ±6 35.95 Small, properly speaking im 56 ±3 148 Small, medium limit - im 61 ±2 198 Medium . . . - im 65 ±2 236 Large, medium limit - im 69 ±2 198 Large, properly speaking im 74 ±3 148 Very large - - - - im 83 ±6 35-95 Extremely large and giant im 90 to W 0.05 Total - - - - 1000 DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI^MENT 37 A seriation of this kind may be recognized as containing a sufficient number of subdivisions when confusion between two con- secutive quaUfications may take place readily and without incon- venience. One may be assured, on the contrary, that the intermediate cases have not been too much multiplied, in other words, that there is only the necessary number, when it is seen that it would scarcely be possible to skip a category and confound together two subdivisions separated by one or more inter- mediate ones. In fact the more numerous the terms of the graduation, the more precise will be the description. But this increase would cease to be useful and become cumbersome if one should reach the point of differentiating in words what it would be impossible to distinguish in practice. The objection that we made to the tripartite descriptive division that in it the word medium retained no sort of signaletic value, is thus obviated. What is medium proper is still liable to be quali- fied either as small medium limit, or as large m.edium. limit, but the four other categories will always be eliminated. When what we have said previously on anthropometrical approximation is remembered, it will be immediately evident that the result is theoretically attained only when the narrowest step in the graduation (which is necessarily the middle one) is approx- imately equal to the maximum degree of divergence admissible in description. This condition is necessary and sufficient to assure to a descriptive vocabulary the maximum of precision with a minimum of terms. However, it will be seen in the sequel that it will hardly do in practice to go beyond seven degrees in the descriptive gradation. We will indicate the method to which we have resorted for repre- senting the progression in an abbreviated way: it consists in replacing the word limit by a parenthesis surrounding the appella- tions small or large, and in underlining these same terms to express the word very. Represented in this manner the gradation takes the following form: 12 3 4 567 small small (small) medium (large) large large The parenthesis has the effect of approximating to the medium the term that it incloses, and the underlining that of removing 38 INTRODUCTION from it. The latter is equivalent to the adverb very, and the parenthesis to that of slightly: slightly small (no. 3), slightly large (no. 5). Here, as in the above illustration taken from the height, the words small, mediicm and large must be interpreted only as land- marks destined to be ultimately replaced by a sedation of terms more especially appropriate to the obser\'ation that one has in view, such as light, viediitm, dark — elevated, horizontal, depressed, etc. Thus, this last seriation divided into seven heads would become: 1334 5 67 raised raised (raised) horizontal (depressed) depressed depressed The following chapter will permit us to pass in review the whole of this vocabular3\ Here, by wa)^ of illustration, is the classification of 1,000 sub- jects into seven categories represented, ist, on the binomial curv^e of the height (fig. 4) and, 2nd, by means of a series of rec- tangles with the same base, but with a height proportional to the number of cases covered by each (fig. 5). The comparison of these two sets of figures shows clearly how possible it is to succeed in equalizing somewhat the distribution of the cases by means of a progressive widening of the limits of each category. Onl}^ the extremes (that is to say, the terms under- lined) remain on the right and left with an insignificant number of cases. ll'"41 Small SlTUlll. ^ledium Large, Large Very large prvperly m£dium tmdiu-m properly tpeakinff limit limit KpeakxTig Very small Fig. 4. Binomial curve of the height on which the positions of the seven categories of Height are separated by %'ertical lines. DESCRIPTIVE SIGNALMENT 39 798 798 748 S "I 748 c s ■^ <13 <0 a s & ? a> ^ .5 s ■^ .5 1 s 9 5 .3 ■5 5 ■S to » =5. Ol CO O.S 1 S 5. ^- ^ C 5> :§! •S 5n •5 -a 36 1 "5 s CO 36 |§ •«s =5. Q. ^ c ki c i oc 1"'41 1™53 l^SS i^ea I" 67 l'»71 l'"77 a™89 ! i to to to to to to to to to i \ l"'40 i^sa l^SS 1™62 i^ee l'»70 1™76 l'"88 " 1 Fig. 5. Diagram of the height, indicating by the proportio nal height of the col- umns the number of subjects coming under each of the seven categories of height indicated on the binomial curve. The Headings for the Descriptive Signalment The first difficulty to be overcome when it is desired to estab- lish the descriptive vocabulary of any organ, such as the eye, the nose, etc., is that of selecting among the multitude of characters those which vary the most. When this first choice has been made it remains to be discovered how much they vary. Whenever there is a variation from one subject to another we may be assured, as already observed, that the distribution of the individual cases will be according to the binomial curve. But often it is only after a delicate analysis that one can succeed in discovering the special point of view from which a characteristic should be examined in order to bring its serial variation into clear relief. The problem should be considered as solved only when the series of headings, tried upon some hundreds of subjects, shall have shown itself, in the statistical abstract, to really apply with a frequency symmetrically decreasing from the median part to the two extremes. Another obstacle with which one has to contend arises from the presence in current speech of expressions which, though very characteristic, bring together various attributes, and consequently cannot be given a place as such in any series. Often two descrip- tive terms that are currently applied to the same organ, and in 40 INTRODUCTION which, on account of the characteristic exaggeration which they express, one would be tempted at first to recognize the two extremes of one series, refer in reaHty to entirely different qualities. Thus, for example, we commonly speak of the ruddy com- plexion of a drunkard, and of the swarthy complexion of a mulatto; and yet it would be impossible to find a natural series of intermediate terms leading from one to the other. This is because the complexion is the result of a combination of two elements which vary independentl}^ : the sanguineous coloration and 'Ca.^ pigmentary coloration. The first term considers only the greater or less quantity of blood that the transparency of the skin allows to be seen; and the second the variations of the yellowish matter which colors more or less abundantly the skin of all human beings,' even of members of the white race. The drunkard often presents the maximum of sayiguineous coloration; the mulatto presents an exaggeration of the pignientaiy coloration. No correlation can be established between these two characters, each of which is the extreme of a special series requiring a special heading. In general, to obtain the series of intermediates constituting a binomial group and leading from one extreme to the other, it is necessary to carr}- the analysis and decomposition of the charac- teristics to such a point that it becomes possible to reply to each heading by one of the qualifications small or large or b}- a series of analogous terms. But, it will be said, this analytical decomposition carried to extremes will lengthen out the description and render it inappli- cable by excess of compUcation! In reality, it is rather the opposite phenomenon which will appear. It must not be forgot- ten that there is question here of responding to printed formulce. Now, it will take less time for the observer to satisfy two or three questions requiring but simple answers, foreseen and prescribed, than to seek in his own head for the proper word to express the same things all at once, even supposing that it exists. We will indicate rapidly the manner in which the problem has been successive!}^ met and solved for each part of the descriptive signalment, confining ourselves, as far as possible, to the question of method and referring any reader who may desire to make a more practical acquaintance with the subject to the text of the DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI,MENT 41 Instructions proper. The reader of these general views and sum- maries will at least have the advantage of familiarizing himself with the terms of our vocabular}-. The qualifications prescribed for noting the color of the beard and of the hair do not differ from those ordinarily emploj-ed hx the public at large; blonde, chestnut, and black forming a three-fold scale which is brought up to seven by the addition to the two first of the words light, medium or deep. The mahogany red, blonde red and chest7iiit red should be considered as forming a separate series parallel to the first and leading by insensible transitions from the most vivid red to the deepest auburn. The complexion or coloration of the skin will be analyzed, as previously observed, according to the intensity : ist, of the yellow pigmentation; and, 2nd, of the sanguineous coloration. Each of these will be answered by the words little, medium or great. The notation of the hue of the iris presents more difficulties. It is commonly said among the public at large that the color of the ej^e changes several times a day according to the state of the spirits and the health of the subject, etc. These beliefs have no serious foundation; the truth is that the iris, shaded by the overhanging superciliary arcades, is greatly influenced b}' changes in the direction of the surrounding light; so the first con- dition to be fulfilled in order that the obser\'ations may be comparable among themselves is to have them made under iden- tical conditions of illumination. "The operator," say the Instructions for Signalment, "should place himself opposite his subject, at about thirty centimetres from him, and with his back to the light, in such a manner that a clear bright light (but not the rays of the sun) falls upon the eye to be examined. Then he should direct the subject to look him directly in the eyes, while he slightly raises the middle of the left eyebrow. ' ' A few obser\^ations practiced in this way will suffice to show that the color of the eye, as it appears from a distance, results from the fusion of two independent elements : \h& ground ti7it of the eye, which varies between the two extremes of azure blue and slate blue, and the intensity of the orajige-yelloiv pigmentation , which is superficially grouped in the areola around the pupil (see the special chromotj' pographic plate) . It is necessary, then, in order to arrive at a serial notation, to consider each of these two zones separately. It is the orange- 42 INTRODUCTION yellow areola which affords the most clearly distinctive elements, the ones easiest to classify. It will be qualified by the words: pale, yellow, orange, chestnut or -maroon, according to the degree of intensity of the pigmentary hue ( i ) . The first term, pale areola, relates to eyes richly provided with whitish striae radiating from the center towards the periphery but containing no j'ellow matter. This is class i , the first degree in the scale. A dash replaces the indication of the areola when the latter is scarceh' apparent, a peculiarity which implies the absence of pigment and the uniformity of the azure or slate-blue shade. As to the ej^es with a maroon pigmentation, they are subdi- vided into three classes, according to whether the dark brown matter, ist, remains confined around the pupil; or, 2nd, invades the whole iris, while allowing the ground-color to appear in greenish- yellow striae or sectors; or, 3rd, covers the entire eye with a uniform, velvet}^ deep brown. The complete series: (i) Unpigmented eyes (with or witiiout a pale areola); ( 2 ) eyes with a yellow areola; ( 3 ) wnth an orange areola; ( 4 ) with a chestnut areola; (5) with a maroon areata grouped in a disc or circle around the pupil; (6) with a maroon areola covering /'wrow//^/'^/)' the whole iris; (7) vnth. a. maroon areola covering uniformly the whole iris, follows a progression which satisfies the requisite conditions of gra- dation previously indicated, in that it permits of passing insen- sibly, step by step, from the blue e3"e (azure or slate) of the fair races to the deep maroon eye of the Arab. Each class may be confounded either with the preceding or the follow- ing, with the exception of classes 5 and 6, which, differing only in a detail of structure, form in a certain sense onl}^ a single sub- division. So it is almost impossible to skip a class, to confound the unpigmented ej'e (class i) with the orange (class 3), and the latter with the incompletely maroon (classes 5 and 6). Class 7 (pure maroon ) can only give rise to hesitation as between it and class (1) These terms are borrowed for the most part from the paragraph in which Buffon analyzes and describes the aspect of the human iris. Only the classification and serial arrangement of the terras are due to me : and even these have not escaped the obser\-ation of Aristotle, who assigned ' three principal colors to the iris of human eyes: 1st, blue; 2nd, dull orange; and 3rd. black-brown." DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI.MENT 43 6, etc. The doubtful cases are indicated on the cards by the mention, under the proper heading, of one or several class numbers separated by a hyphen. If the observer believes himself to have reached absolute certainty he enters only the number of the class which he has in view ; if he hesitates between two or even three numbers ( viaroon classes) , he adds to the most prob- able number those of the classes with which confusion seems possible. In regard to the ground- tint, it is, as above remarked, either azure or slate blue, or intermediate between these two tones, that is to say, more or less a violet blue. It is this last shade, the iiitenne- diate, that one meets most frequently in the descriptive formulae of the iris; it recalls in some sort by its name and use the neutral color of the water-color boxes. The intensity of the surrounding light has a much greater influence on the ground-tint than upon the orange-yellow pigment. A given eye examined in the proper manner and by the same observer will seem to have an azure ground at noon and an intermediate, or even a slaty one, four hours later. So this second element (the ground-tint) does not enter into the classification; the heading referring to it appears on the forms only by way of a complementary descriptive indication. In fact, it is precisely to the elimination of this ele- ment that our classification, based on the pigmentary intensity, is indebted for its relative simplicity. We would note, however, that the singleness of the point of view in which we were obliged to place ourselves for the classifi- cation has not been without some anomalous results. Thus, for instance, class i, that of the unpigmented, unites in itself both azure blue and slate blue eyes whenever they are devoid of yellow matter, however dissimilar they may be at first sight. Now these two categories, azure and slate (or more gener- ally, the series with light grounds and with dark grounds), persist from one extreme to the other, at the same time approach- ing each other progressively, as one passes from the unpigmented towards the maroon eye, until on the point of being con- fused together. This idea of approximation, of progressive contraction, has been expressed schematically in fig. 6 by means of a number of lines which, at first very divergent, gradually approach one another until on the point of fusion. The lines in the upper third of 44 INTRODUCTION this diagram represent the azure eyes, those in the lower third the slaty eyes, and the middle third the eyes with a periphery intermediate be- tween azure and slaty. Finally, the cone with a hori- zontal axis thus formed is cut verti- cally into as many slices as there are classes in the pig- mentary series, that is to say, seven, and the intervals be- tween the sections are so arranged that Fig. 6. Schema indicating, by the convergence of the lines towards the central horizontal axis, the progressive approximation of the shades of the periphery of the iris in proportion to the increase in the pigmentation. leo the enclosed surface is proportional to the number of irises observed in France for each of these categories. The same phenomenon is equally manifest from an examination of the chromotypographical plate of the iris annexed to the Album. It is there manifest at first sight that the eyes of groups 5 , 6 and 7 pre- sent much more analogy among themselves than those of classes i, 2 and 3; but this plate, which allots an equal number of specimens to each cate- gory, gives no idea of the relative frequency of the different types observed among Europeans. Fur- thermore, it makes no pretense of offering a specimen of all kinds of irises ; their number is almost infinite, and it is impossible to meet with two exactly alike. It is not necessar}' then to attempt to find an exact copy of the eye whose hue we wish to define. A-a Fig. 7. Diagram of the shades of the iris, indicating by the proportional height of the columns the relative frequency of each of the seven cat- egories. DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI.MENT 45 The cliromatic table merely enables one to ascertain under which of the types represented the eye observed would have to be ranged, and by which class number \\. should be noted. Now that is the principal point; the complementary descriptive details are easily deduced from it. They might even be very much simplified. Thus the notation of the various patterns of areola should be regarded in many cases as a superfluous indication. We would be almost tempted to say the same of the indication of the tone (light, medium or deep), the use of which is obligatory only in the signalments intended for the anthropometrical file. Whenever an ordinary descriptive signalment is in question, every eye may be described in a very simple way by the help of two qualifica- tions united in a formula of this kind; slight or strong areola, pale yellow, on a slaty ground, or orange areola on a greenish intermediate ground, or maroon areola on a. greenis/i-jyellow gronnd, or, again, for the two extremes, iris uniformly azure or slaty or m,aroon. We are of the opinion that this method of notation, thus disen- cumbered of accessories which are of little use except in the identification room, will eventually be used in the signalment on passports, hunting-permits, etc. , the descriptive value of which it will increase ten-fold. Morphological Characteristics having Special Headings on the Sig- naletic Card These headings refer to the description of the forehead, of the nose, and of the ear. The reader will possibly be surprised, when he first glances over the card, at the multiplicity of relations under which we have felt bound to analyze the structure of the counte- nance, and especially of the ear. We have already shown above that the difi&culty of the replies is not proportional to the number of questions put, but rather the reverse, so long as each relates only to a single point of view. The complete description of the ear is not, moreover, an obligatory part of the anthropometrical signalment. Only the forms or dimensions distinctly extreme, called anomalies, of which the different parts of this organ are so often the seat, should be made the subject of remark in any and every case. If the instructions and headings on the card for this part of the visage are especially explicit, it is because no organ is superior to it for assuring the recognition of a subject after an interval of many years. 46 INTRODUCTION But where the transcendent merits of the ear for purposes of identification are most clearly apparent is when there is question of solemnly afiirming in a court of justice that some old photo- graph "is well and duly applicable to such and such a subject here present. " One may say indeed, thanks on the one hand to the immutability of the shape of the ear throughout life, and on the other to the great number of varieties of configura- tion which it presents, that it is impossible to discover two ears alike, and that an identity in its pattern is a necessary and sufl&cient condition for the confirmation of the individual identity (i). This is a truth which we have ascertained by ten years of experiment. But to make it penetrate the consciousness of a court or to impregnate with it the practical sense of police officials, a mere affirmation, even the most categorical, is insuf- ficient. It is necessary, in order to produce this mtwiate convic- tion, that a preliminary investigation supported by experimental verification should have demonstrated to each the accuracy of the fact. How, for example, could a functionary be able to appreciate the greater or less degree of certitude of identity which results from the concomitant presence in two photographs of the ear of an antitragus with a horizontal indi^iation and a rectangular profile if he had not satisfied himself long before that that very part was quite as likely to have a projecting outline with a generally oblique direction. If he does not know the series of all the pos- sible forms of the antitragus, a resemblance of this kind will sig- nify nothing to him; he will believe it natural, normal, presented by all with few exceptions. Oftener, indeed, not knowing the signaletic importance of this detail of the structure, his eye will not even perceive it on the subject: because the ear, which, as we have said, is the most important organ for identification, is, at the same time, that which attracts least the notice of the masses. Our eye is as little accustomed to look at it as our language to describe it. Now, that which escapes our language, escapes also our vision; we see only that which we are able to describe, as we have said in the preface with which this volume opens. (1) See on this subject, in the Album, the 96photog:raphs of ears, all different, repro- duced on a scale of one-half frou existing types. An exception should be made in the case of twins (see Album, pi. 60 b). DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI.MENT 47 This important remark, which has inspired the creation of the verbal portrait , is quite as applicable to the morphological study of 'Cao. forehead , of the nose, and of the other parts of the counte- nance which are included under the heading characteristic traits. The review of the descriptive terms that we are about to present here to the reader in a speculative form, without regard to prac- tical application, will enable him to make a preliminary theoretical acquaintance with our vocabulary. But only the text of the instructions will furnish to the practitioner, the writer of signal- ments, ideas arranged with a view to daily application. Exposition of the Various Points of View at which the Morphological Vocabulary Aims The first rule of all, the foundation of every description, is the separation, in the analysis, of the form from the dimension. When, for example, in speaking of the mountain of Puy-de-D6me, one says that it has the shape of a sugar-loaf, it is evident that the image evoked by these words needs to be completed by the indication of the height of its summit above the underlying plain. In the description, the heading dimension \s, uniformly answered by one of the qualifications small, medium or large. On the reg- ulation cards printed by the Penitentiary Administration of France, the headings relating to dimensions are distinguished by their capital initial from the other questions which refer to the form and require a more specialized descriptive vocabulary. In regard to '(h.o.form properly speaking, it will be considered, as far as possible, under various aspects, or profiles, which resolve themselves into lines. These lines, once isolated, should be described either according to the shape of their outlitie, or according to their general direction or inclination, or even under these two points of view successively, according to the kind of morphological variations commonly presented by the organ in question. The various kinds of linear outlines are all included in the series of which the type is ftunished by the forms of the ridge of the nose seen in profile, to wit: ''cave'^ (ior concave) , rectilinear, and convex (fig. 8). 48 INTRODUCTION ,....-;::i- Fig. 8. Nose with ridge {con)cave, 7-ectilinear and convex. For the nose, but for the nose only, it is advisable to establish a series parallel to the preceding to allow the registering of the sinuous variety, to wit: \Q.ou\cave- sinuous , rectilinear- sinuozis and convex- sinuo2cs (fig. 9). Fig. 9. Nose with ridge [con\cave-sinuotis, rectilinear-sinuous and convex-sintious. When there is question of the description of the ear, the pre- ceding series are replaced by others the terms of which are more especially appropriate to each character. Thus the degree of openness of the border which hems the posterior contour of the ear will be expressed by the gradation: opeyi, intermediate, adhering (fig. 10). Fig. 10. Forms, open, intermediate and adhering, of the posterior border of the ear. DESCRIPTrVE SIGNALMENT 49 The exterior cojitour of the lobule will be similarly qualified, according to the case, by one of the four following terms: — descend- ing — square, interniediate a.nd gulfed (fig. ii). V, x^ M Fig. 11. Lobe with contour square, intermediate z.m\A gulfed. The desceyiding form, placed between dashes, is an anomaly which is rather rarely met with; it is important to describe it, but from the point of \'iew of the binomial grouping of the terms it ought to be included with the square form. The profile of the antitragus will be expressed in a similar way: — \Q.Q)rs\cave — (an anomaly outside the series), rectilinear , interme- diate ^.w^ projecting , according to whether the horizontal projection of this cartilage traces a line \vith superior conca\'ity, recti- linear, slightly sinuous, or clearly projecting. This latter word has seemed more appropriate in this case than convex (fig. 12). *•**•••* :. / Fig. 12 Antitragus with profile rectilinear, intermediate AnA projecting. But the standard series: \Q.ovL\cave, i?itermediate and convex, reappears, almost in the same form as for the nose, in the indica- tion of the degree of torsion of the lower portion of the interior fold of the ear — the anihelix of the anatomists (fig. 13). 50 INTRODUCTION /r^N /CN / -■. N Fig. 13. Interior fold with horizontal section {coa)cave. intermediate and convex. Finally some parts of the ear require to be considered also in relation to the model of their surface, whence the series blending^ intermediate, separated (fig. 14), which expresses the manner of adherence of the lobule of the ear to the cheek, considering only the degree of accentuation or prolongation of the furrow which, in two cases out of three, separates it from the cheek (fig. 14), and // / ..... 'O Fig. 14. I' day, under condi- tions of extraordinary cheapness, it is the rule in all cases where the subject is photographed to postpone the morphological descrip- tion, even in what concerns the forehead, the nose and the ear, until the time, which for many never arrives, of a new judicial inquiry. In fact, photographic portraits in two poses, profile and full- face, are taken there under conditions of such accuracy that the physiognomical analysis can always be made by their means with as much precision as if it had been taken on the living subject. Hence in most of the cards with photographs classified in the anthropometrical files of Paris the descriptive headings are left blank, with the exception of course of the chromatic indications, which it would be impossible to reconstruct exactly from an examination of the photograph. The preceding considerations lead us to make some remarks rQ.g2ivdJmg judicial photography . While the help which our method receives from photography in the establishment of identity must not be exaggerated, it cannot be denied that it makes the process easier and surer in the case of verifications to be made by means of the collection of subjects arrested and photographed in Paris at less than twenty years of age. The fundamental principle of judicial photography rests on the necessity of observing a rigorous unif or mit}^ of pose and reduction, under conditions which we have been the first to define. The two poses chosen as being the most easy to reproduce iden- tically are: ist, the perfect profile, and 2nd, the full face. The reduction of the portrait (1/7) is such that 28 centimetres measured on a vertical plane passing through the outer angle of the right eye give an image of four centimetres on the plate. We could not insist too strongly upon the necessity of always taking the likeness of subjects bareheaded, whenever identifica- tion is in question. DESCRIPTIVE SIGNAI.MENT 55 The study of the two hundred collographic portraits which form the second part of the Album and which have been repro- duced exactly, without retouching of any sort, according to the conditions of pose, light and reduction indicated above, will con- stitute, for all persons whose duties require them to make use of judicial photography, an excellent preparatory exercise for the eye. It may be remarked, as to the morphological significance of these likenesses, that the average, viediiwi or intermediate types have been inserted only in the case of those characters that have on the card special headings to which answers have to be given in all cases. Those characteristic features, on the other hand, which should be mentioned onlj' in the extreme cases are represented b}^ the two opposite forms only. Whence this conclusion, that it is preferable, in looking over the first portion of our series of portraits from a picturesque point of view, to compare the two extreme types by skipping the intermediate likeness, the presence of which diminishes the contrast between the other two. III. SIGNAI.MENT BY PECULIAR MARKS The heading, peculiar marks, has from all time appeared on the forms for the old-fashioned signalments, but there was then only one line reserv^ed for it, which was almost always occupied by the word none. The new signaletic cards contain under this head thirty lines, of which 5 or 6 at least should always be filled. Every one, in fact, has some peculiar marks, often unknown to himself; I mean by this moles, scars of cuts on the fingers, scars of boils,eXc. But the noting of these marks, to which but little value was formerly attached, becomes really useful only when the most rigorous precision has been exercised in their description and in the notation of their locality. The ideal to be attained would be for it to be made possible for a person operating in another place, when he reads a statement of this kind, to reproduce on his own body designs imitating exactly, as to general aspect, form, dimension and position, the marks of the individual described. Thus it is less the existence, the acttial observed presence of this or that peculiarity , which characterizes an individual, since the same might be found on any of us, than its exact localization. 56 INTRODUCTION It is eas}^ to demonstrate that the signaletic power of A PECULIAR MARK INCREASES IN GEOMETRICAL PROGRESSION ACCORDING TO THE PRECISION WITH WHICH IT HAS BEEN DE- SCRIBED. If we feel obliged to repeat here the demonstration of this fact, it is because it affords us an opportunit}^ to review in passing the several anatomical terms with which it is indispensable for us to be familiar. Let us suppose an anthropometrical signalment bearing under the title peculiar marks, these words simply : a scar on the chest. Certainly this is a description which has already some value. But it is easy to understand that its descriptive power would have been exactly doubled, if the supplementary^ information had been added: on the left (or right) half of the chest. As there are as many chances that the scar in question will be on the right as on the left, the indication on the left half of the chest has a descrip- tive value equivalent to that of : tzvo scars on the chest (without stating on which side). Let us increase the number of determinatives. If to: a scar on the left half of the chest we add the qualification oblique (or horizontal or vertical ) , the observation is again doubled in value and becomes equivalent, following the same reasoning as before, to one reading merely: four scars on the chest. Similarly if we add oblique internal ( i ) , as there are quite as many chances for the scar in question to be oblique external as oblique internal, the signaletic value is thereby- doubled once more, and the complete mention: scar oblique internal on left chest, has the same importance from the point of view of signalment as an entry in these words only: eight scars on the chest. To these attributes we add: at centimetres from left teat, or better, at centimetres under left teat, or, with even more precision: at centimetres tinder left teat and at — .from the median line. We pursue the enumeration by giving also the length of the scar, \\sform and, if possible, its origin {k7iife thrust , abscess, burn. (l) That is to say, the direction of which (prolonged from above to below, descending) inclines towards the middle of the body. In the interpretation of all our indications of direction and obliquity one should proceed from above lo below. SIGNAt,MENT BY PECUI,IAR MARKS 57 etc.) and we can prove, on the same principles, that the complete description, drawn up according to the rules that we are to indicate in this volume, possesses the same value from the point of view of signalment as a formula of this kind: thirty-two or even sixty- four scars observed on the chest of this individual. Only a lack of experience prevents us from discerning at once the value for purposes of the identification of an indication like this: mole on back, at i8 centimetres under yth vertebra (prominent ver- tebra of the neckj, and at lo ce?itimetres to right of vertebral colum7i, while the equivalent formula: sixty-four scars on the back, would leave us convinced that a very limited number of individ- uals in the entire world would be likely to present such a characteristic. This process of reasoning presupposes that the different attri- butes of a peculiarity to be described are independent of each other and that the presence of such and such a mark or scar indi- cates nothing as to the coexistence of others. In fact this is not rigorousl}^ exact; the exercise of a trade, that of shoemaker, for instance, will occasion among all the members of that fraternity marks corresponding in their direction and location to the strike of the sciving knife. The hands of founders, tinners, etc. , will pre- sent scars of burns approximately similar in their aspect and posi- tion. Whence the necessity, from the point of \'iew of identification, of varying the choice of signs to be noticed in one same subject. There is another species of peculiarities demanding still more caution than the scars and marks of professional origin, we refer to tattooings. It is an error to believe that the mention of one or two tattoo- ings can by any means take the place of the notice of a scar; these indications are as treacherous in practice as they appear con- vincing at the first glance. When a criminal plans to disguise his personality, his first care is to surcharge his old tattooings, and to cover himself if possible with those of the comrade whose civil status he wishes to usurp. This is the A B C of the profession. For some 3'ears past, it has not been rare to meet with scars left by old tattooings more or less perfectly effaced by Dr, Variot's method. The scar may be only slightly apparent, but it always exists. These various manoeuvres should be nullified by mentioning with exactness on the card not only the significance of the design 58 INTRODUCTION but also its dimension and location. Moreover, whatever may be the number and significance of the tattooings noted, they ought never to prevent a careful observation and description of the ordinary marks and scars, which have quite as much descriptive value and which have the advantage over the others of being much less alterable. We will remark here that to indicate the exact position of a peculiar mark, one datum point will not be suflBicient, unless the mark to be described be on that very spot. Thus a mark noted in these terms: scar at 8 centimetres frovi right teat, might be sit- uated at any point whatever in the circumference of an imaginary circle described around the nipple with a radius of 8 centimetres. The formula: at 8 centimetres above right teat, is already more exact, the word above eliminating more than the lower half of the said circumference. But the exact point is rigorously determined only by the aid of a second point of departure: at 8 centimetres above right teat and at y from fuedian line; or again: at 8 centi- metres above right teat and at ij under ster7ial fork. The same observation may be made for the region of the back, . the neck, etc. Nevertheless, for cuts on the hands and limbs, and for certain scars on the face, the indication of a single fixed point is generally sufiicient, especially when the words above, toider, before and behind can be used. That is a question of expediency lef|; to the discernment of the observ'er, who should take as a guide the numerous examples that we shall have occa- sion to give in the course of this work. In fact, three or four marks well described and varying in their origin and location would amply sufiSce to put the future identifi- cation of a subject beyond all question, if the comparison of the peculiarities previously described with those presented at the present time could everywhere and always be made with the sub- ject under one's eyes. That is, unfortunately, only exceptionally the case, every examination of the central collection demanded by courts in other places having, of necessity, to be made at a dis- tance from the subject whose record is sought. A mode of procedure which arbitrarily limited the choice to the three or fotu" principal marks would be liable to lead to many disappointments. The number of marks alwaj's increasing from birth until death, some among them which were rightly considered as important during childhood might in this method be subse- SIGNAI,MENT BY PECTJI,IAR MARKS 59 quently omitted, as a result of the acqmsition during life of .still more remarkable peculiarities. So it is recommended to endeavor as far as possible to note all the scars, even when it considerably exceeds the number which is strictly indispensable. This is the only means which can put beyond all doubt the identification of the signalment w^ith an old one yet to be found which will have to be compared with it at a distance from the subject. And yet in the case of certain individuals too abundantly sup- plied with marks it becomes necessary in practice to limit the choice to the 12 or 15 principal ones. Thus, whatever may be the care taken, a statement of this kind is never absolutely com- plete. Herein lies one of the lines of defense most frequently resorted to in the courts by accused persons who seek to deny some previous conviction incurred under another name. They claim that such and such a scar or birth-7nark would have inevitably Jigtired in the first signalment, if the latter really referred to themselves. Omissions of this kind should generally be attributed, either to the slight outward appearance of the mark, or to its situation almost out of sight or hidden by the trousers (which are not usually to be taken off), or lastly to the date of its origin, manifestly recent and consequently later than that of the taking of the first signalment. We will go so far as to say that the omission of a mark, even when it is quite apparent and of ancient date, ought not to invalidate an identification the legitimacy of which is otherwise abundantly proven by the other peculiar marks and the correspondence of the anthropometrical and des- criptive signalments. The inverse case is more serious and should render us more circumspect: a certain viark accurately described in the old sig7ial- ment is no longer found on the subject under exaniiriation. Although one might, if necessary, suppose one confusion between the words right and left, or one error in the transcription of the note, or the misinterpretation of some temporary accident, such as an eruption, 3. fresh bruise, etc., which has the false appearance of a permanent scar, no more than one could be tolerated; at the second and a fortiori at the third mark which is not found the identity should be declared impossible. Conclusion : all the marks indicated on an old sig- nalment ougfht to be able to be recogni^jed on the subject, if this signalment really applies to him ; but 6o INTRODUCTION it is not necessary, inversely, tliat all the marks on the present subject should appear, without omission, on the old statement. The importance attributed to the comparison of scars in all questions of identification shows the considerable practical interest which there would be, from the point of view of rapidity of obser- vation, in arranging them always in the same order. The serial numbers (roman numerals from I to VI of the signaletic card) provide for this by separating the description of peculiar marks into six distinct classes, each corresponding to one part of the body examined, to wit: I, on the left upper limb; II, on the right upper limb; III, on the face and the front of the neck; IV, on the chest; V, on the back; and VI, on the other parts (lower part of the trunk and the lower limbs). The use of the serial numbers, by establishing a clear separa- tion between the statement for the right upper limb and that for the left, prevents, at the same time, the confusions so detrimental, and yet so easy to make, betw^een the two lateral faces. Never- theless, by way of an extra precaution, it is requisite to conclude every localization of a mark on one of the limbs by the word right or left, which will thus corroborate the indications of the serial numbers I and II. As a general rule the examiner should endeavor to proceed from above to below in the case of the upper limbs, first the arm and forearm and then the hand, and to finish the obser- vation of the anterior face of each of those parts before begin- ning on the posterior. But whatever may be the care taken in the carrying out of these directions the observer will be con- stantly forced to invert the order, either because some mark runs across a dividing line, or because it is not noticed by the observer until too late to be inserted in its proper turn. Any divergence between the terms employed in succeeding examinations for the description or the localization of the same mark may sometimes occasion a little embarrassment. A cer- tain naevus or mole (popularly termed a beautj^-spot), for instance, situated approximately in the middle of the arm, will be localized at one time: at lo ce7itimetres luider cubital articulation, and at another time: at ij centimetres above wrist. A scar noted the first time as having an oblique direction, will be sometimes quali- fied as vertical at a later examination. In short, here, as in the SIGNAI,MeNT BY PECUWAR MARKS 6 1 two Other kinds of signalment, the operator should famiUarize himself with the degree of divergence of which each term is susceptible, A special chapter of the Instructioyis is devoted to the analysis of the abbreviations to be employed in recording the pecu- liar marks. The words used in the sentence on scars being limited in number and always succeeding each other in the same order, it becomes possible to represent them in writing by means of abbreviations reduced for the most part to the initial of the word, or even by means of conventional signs. Thus, for example, the word scar (technically cicatrix) is represented by the letters cic. , and the word oblique by a simple b; c signifies airved, and the letter r, rectilinear; a is read anterior, and p (the Or e.ek. rho) , posterior; e, external, and <., internal; d (for droit), right, and ^ {lor gauche), left; f is roaA phalanx; each finger ■of the hand is indicated by its initial in a capital letter, etc. Let us suppose a mark noted in this manner : cicatrix, recti- linear, of a dimension of 07ie centimetre, oblique external, on middle of second phalanx of middle Ji?iger, left side , posterior face; it will be reduced into the following line: cic. r. of lb t, ml. 2^ f. M. g. p It can be seen that the daily use of these stenographic signs gives to the writing a rapidity equal and even superior to that of speech. The officers who make use of it even go so far as to say that it can be read more quickly and comprehended more easily than ordinary writing. An apprenticeship of some days is sufl&cient for the attainment of the maximum of speed, which is easfly explained by the fact that the reflex movements between the word and the writing, so hard to establish that it takes several years of schooling to acquire them, are preserved here \_perfectly in the case of French-speaking operators, and in large measure in the case of English-speaking ones] , thanks to the initial letters, in place of being destroyed and replaced by others as in the methods of ordinary stenography. We would add that, all the initials employed being, with a few exceptions, common to lyatin and English as well as to French, these signs have an international value in some degree ideo- graphical. 62 INTRODUCTION If we now turn our attention to the order of the words in a type phrase, as for example, cicatrix rectilinear of 6 oblique internal at g above wrist left posterior, we shall notice that our description progresses from the particular to the general. It commences by stating the species of the mark, before defining its aspect and dimensions; then, taking a more extended view, it embraces the direction of its form as regards the body as a whole, and ends by the indication of its, position. The words of the description thus follow, in a way, the opera- tions of our mind, which commences by discovering the existence of the mark before analyzing its signaletic characteristics. The indication of the direction, oblique internal, has been intentionally interpolated between the figure of dimension, 6, and that of the localization, 9, to prevent confusion between the two numer- ical values. This progressive order, very good for dictation, would be advantageously reversed, however, in performing the inverse operation, which consists in finding again upon the subject the various marks indicated by a previous signalment. To stick to our sentence, it is evident that before perceiving the rectilinear scar of 6 centimetres oblique internal and being able to compare the object referred to with the words of the description, we must have been instructed to look on the posterior face of the left forearm at a height of p centimetres above the wrist. Thus, the person who has to verify a signalment of this kind ought as far as possible to invert the order of reading, that is to say, to commence with the localization and finish with the description. There will be found in the Instructions a synoptical table of the terms to be employed for the statement of every kind of mark. We will content ourselves here with reproducing from it the head- ings which constitute, so to speak, \h^ fra^nework of the cicatricial sentence. When our system was first put into practice, we tried to reproduce a table of this kind on the official model of the card in use by the Penitentiary Administration; but experience has shown us that, far from shortening the task of describing the peculiarities, it considerably lengthened it, by the necessity in which the secre- tary found himself of skipping continually from column to column, sometimes passing over one or more of them according to the COMPARISON OF THE THREE SIGNALMENTS 63 needs of the description. The use of abbreviated signs making it possible to keep up with the words of the observer, it would be idle to seek to attain greater speed. We may add that it is recommended to recopj' in ordinary- handwriting such statements of peculiar marks as may be occa- sionally demanded by judicial or administrative authorities unacquainted with our conventional signs. I. Description of the mark a b c d Nature or Shape and Dimensions General direction designation curve or inclination 2. Localization of the mark g e f Locative Enumeration of the parts of the body Sides and faces preposition sennng as fixed points, (when the limbs proceeding from above downward are in question) III FINAL CONSIDERATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS I. THE COMPARATrV'E PLACE OF THE THREE KINDS OF SIGNAI,MENT A comparison of the pecuHar marks, when the first statement of them has been carefull}- made in conformity with the rigorous principles of description and localization which we have indicated in the preceding chapter, brings with it a certainty of identity much superior to that which results from a mere agreement of the anthropometrical observations. The notation of individual signs might even completely replace meastnrement were it not for the inextricable difficulties which a classification based on these peculiarities would present. What serial position can be assigned to each of them, when we consider that their number is continually increasing from birth until death, and that certain subjects are almost completely desti- tute of them, while others have such a multitude that it is almost impossible to notice them all ? 64 INTRODUCTION So a signalment by means of peculiar marks will be a useful supplement to a description by osseous lengths, but it can never replace it. Anthropometry, which is a mechanism for elimina- tion, chiefly demonstrates no7i-identity , while the direct identity is established by the peculiar marks, which alone can produce judicial certitude. A criminal in a state of liberty commits a crime. It is the duty of the police to draw up his descriptive signalment, by means of all the observations which they can produce, that they may be able to recognize him amid the multitude of human beings and arrest him. As soon as a suspected person has been arrested, the anthropometrical sigrnalment intervenes to estabhsh his identity; to reconstitute the series of his old commitments if he is a recidivist; and, on the other hand, to assure him of every pos- sible mitigation of the law if he is B.Jirst offender. Anthropomet- rical signalment makes it possible, and it is the only kind that does so, bei7ig give7i a stibject to find his 7iavie. It goes back into the past and provides against the future. It is, then, an exclusively penitentiary signalment, the virtue of which can be exercised only within prison walls. Outside, in a public square, for example, it is impossible to apply it as such; the most that can be done is to draw from it for the descriptive signalment some complementary indications, such as the total height, the height of the trunk, or the length of the foot or of the fingers when these dimensions are exceptionally small or large. As for the signalment by means of peculiarities, its function is to place beyond all discussion the results obtained by the other two. Cases are not rare where the three signalments thus play their part successively, while concurring towards the same end, the execution of the penal law. the descriptive signalment in the arrest; the anthropometrical signalment in the establishment of the antecedents; and the signalment by peculiarities in the confir- mation of identity, whether this last intervenes immediately after (or even before) the arrest or only after an anthropometrical identification (i). (1) The arrest of the notorious criminal, K , alias R , which was much talked about at the commencement of this year (1893), furnishes a striking example of the special role which falls to each of the three parts of our signalment. The skilfully directed political brigades of the Prefecture of Police having learned that the author of COMPARISON OF THE THREE SIGNAI,MENTS 65 It may be said, to borrow the language of the mathematicians, that the function of anthropometry is the reciprocal of that of description. In fact, here we have a signalment which it is necessary to match with one of the 100,000 free indi\dduals of a city ; there we have an individual arrested whom we must match with one of the 100,000 signalments of our files: description desig- nates the individual being giveji the name (and the corresponding signalment); atithropometry obtains the name, being given the individual. These results are confirmed by the signalment by peculiarities, either in the ofiice of the examining magistrate or before the court; this is \.\ie Judicial signalment, properly speaking. Thus the three portions of. the signalment are seen to correspond to the three great divisions of repressive authority: public safety, prison administration, and judiciary. We have insisted at some length on this point only because it even yet gives rise to misunderstandings. How many times have we not heard prison officials declare that their signalment was the descriptive, and that in performing the explosions of April, 1892, must have been a certain R , who had already had a bone to pick with justice— notably in 1890 at Saint Etienne, where he was detained for eight days on a charge of uttering counterfeit coin, after which he was released on the ground of a lack of evidence of his guilt — the copy of his signaletic card taken at that time was at once called for from the alphabetical files. It was found that it had been very accu- rately compiled by M. Moulin, then warden's registry-clerk of this town, who was on this ground afterwards named chief-warden. This signalment, immediately translated into popular language by orders of the examining magistrate, M. Atthalin, was com- municated to the press. Now, the witnesses of the arrest, and particularly the waiter at the cafe where it took place, were unanimous in declaring at the examination and before the court of assizes that they had not decided to inform the commissary of police of the presence of this criminal in the place until after having read in the Le Petit Journal the published signalment, and after having assured themselves, without their customer's knowledge, that he really had on the front and back of his hand the scars mentioned. It is certain that they would not have gone so far if the statement of peculiarities had not intervened to transform their presumptions into certainty. If, now, we investigate the circumstances which led to the first suspicions, we find that, acccording to the witnesses, it was, in this arrest, the extravagant language used by the anarchist which drew upon him the attention of the persons present. \\.vi^s this con- versation, then, which, in the present instance, played the part that falls theoretically to the descriptive signalment, which embraces the entire individual, both his physical and his moral characteristics, his bearing, his speech, his tastes and his passions. Need we say 3 Fig. 21. Diagram showing the number of recognitions of recidivists under assumed names reported by the Anthropometrical Service at Paris, from 1SS3 to 1S93. (1) Under the prefectorate of Mr. Camescasse, with the co-operation of Messrs. Puibaraud, Chief of his Cabinet, and Vel-Durand, General Secretary. RESULTS OBTAINED 73 In publishing these results we do not forget the considerable importance which attaches to a recognition, whether it be consid- ered from a social, or more particularly from a judicial or penal standpoint. When a criminal determines to give an assumed name, it is because he beheves it to be for his best interests and because he knows he is wanted in other places, or has reason to suppose that he is. So the recognition of a malefactor who conceals himself under an assimied name is, from the point of view of the general welfare, as serv'iceable as his direct arrest on the public highway. Let us put aside the judicial interest and look at the matter from a strictly penal point of view. Do not the concealments of identity necessarily result in a considerable lengthening of the preventive detention? Supposing an average lengthening of loo days for each individual under an assumed name, that makes, at the rate of 500 recognitions annually, an economy of 50 x 100, or fifty thousand days' keeping of the prisoners in question, or abour fifty thousand francs [ten thousand dollars] of annual expense, at least, for the prisons of the Department of the Seine alone. This view, which I expressed at the Prison Congress of Rome in 1885, before all the assembled penitentiary authorities of Europe, was unanimously accepted (3). A still more remarkable consequence is, that the number of arrests of international thieves of the pickpocket class has been diminishing steadil}^ from the creation of the identification ser\dce down to this day. It was the rule, indeed, among individuals of this class, to change their names at each successive arrest, and in this way they generally succeeded in escaping the increased penal- ties which fall upon the recidivist. Having become satisfied among themselves that it was no longer possible for them to conceal their (2) That is an application of anthropometry which is very important and has hitherto scarcely attempted, Certainly we have endeavored to contribute to it, as far as circum- stances permitted, both by personal labors, and by putting, as far as possible, the signal- etic archives at the service of students. But the methodical exploitation of this gigantic mass of documents still remains to be made. We should hasten to make use of them if we do not wish to be distanced in this field by the foreign countries which have adopted judicial anthropometry. (3) In France, where the penitentiary rules deprive the recidivist successively of one- tenth of his wages at each new entry, the sure recognition of all recidivists tends in still another way to diminish the expenses of the state (see the report of Mr. Bioucher before cited). 74 INTRODUCTION antecedents when arrested, and fearing on the other hand the law of deportation, they now prefer, by their own admission, to remain in foreign capitals: from 65 in 1885 their number fell to 52 in 1886, then to 34, to 19, and finally to 14 in 1890! If we reflect on what it costs the inhabitants of a city to main- tain such a population which lives absolutely by theft alone, we must conclude that the saving effected in this single particular surpasses the total cost of the anthropometrical service ( i ) . The lesser recidivation of foreigners compared with that of our countrymen is a result analogous to the preceding but with an economic bearing very much greater still. The monthly tables of municipal statistics relating to the identification service of the Prefecture of Police show that French criminals appear at the anthropometrical bureau in the proportion of one old to one new, while foreigners recidivate only in the proportion of one to five. Certainly it cannot be doubted that this lesser recidivation of foreigners is attributable to the law of expulsion of Dec. 3, 1849. However, these same statistical tables prove that it is necessary to examine on an average fifteen French recidivists to discover one who is concealing his identity under a false name, while the foreigners furnish one case of recognition to ever>" three exam- inations. Thus the expulsive measures from which the country derives so much benefit can produce their full effect only where they are always and everywhere seconded by anthropometry. There is a reflection which occurs spontaneously to the mind in the presence of these figures and of the success that they prove. (1) "The fact has often been insisted upon, in recent times, that the quality of the pun- ishment has much less weight than the certainty that this punishment will have to be undergone in all cases. The idea that a crime committed will infallibly be followed by a penalty is the most efl&cacious of all motives for not committing the crime. Anthropo- metrical measurements form a powerful element in this general prevention of crime by furnishing to the judge the means of identifying as a recidivist every individual who has ever been measured. This preventive, because intimidating, idea is best demonstrated by the fact that the delinquents who have been measured fear the danger of being recog- nized forever after and that they avoid the countries where measuring is resorted to." (Stoss, professor of penal law in the University, in Proceedings of the Meeting held at Berne, Dec. 19th, 1890, for the consideration of the Bertillon System.) The same idea was expressed by Dr. Manouvrier in the meeting of the Anthropological Society held Dec. 11, 1890, that is to say, precisely eight days before the anthropometric conference at Berne: " And if it be true, as it is lawful to believe, that the fear of retri- bution is a motive capable of often counterbalancing criminal desires, public morality will have been more benefited by the system of anthropometrical signalments than by the books of many professional moralists: Initium sapieniicr, timer anthropometri, one might say, by a slight modification of the text of the Psalmist." RESUI.TS OBTAINED 75 " I do not doubt," you say, "that anthropometrical examination may cause the recognition of a certain number of criminals. But how many succeed, just as they did before, in passing through these nets! Here is the number of your successes; but what is there to prove that it is not surpassed by that of your failures f OflScial documents permit a peremptory reply to this question. An error in these matters must present one of two aspects: ist, a false or wrongly-made identification; {2), a failure to identify, of which we have already spoken. A false identification would consist in matching two signal- men ts which did not refer to the same person; in declaring, for example, that Durand, here present, is the same person as Martin, arrested and measured five years ago, while in reality they are two different individuals. I do not hesitate to affirm in the most categorical manner that anthropometrical signalment, combined with the descriptive and the statement of peculiar marks, com- pletely protects us from such mistakes. Thanks to the absolute independence of these three recognitory elements, the identity of an individual may be recognized with absolute certainty after an interval of a great number of years, to such a point that the employees of the anthropometrical ser\'ice, when they discover the true name of a criminal hiding himself under an assumed one, have orders to avoid making known to him the result of their search. They are instructed to directly notify the proper magistrates, who are thus apprised of the true identity of the individual before them, without the latter' s knowl- edge. Out of 5,000 recognitions hitherto transmitted silently, as it were, notoyie hasgive?i rise to any confusion, though if there had been such it would have been immediately made known by the objec- tions of the party interested before the examining rnagistrate. We do not mean to say by this that the recognized recidivists do not often try to repudiate the names shown to be theirs by anthropometry; they protest sometimes for months; but invari- ably, TO THIS DAY, THK ACCURACY OF THE ANTHROPOMETRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS HAS BEEN CONFIRMED BY THE SUBSEQUENT DECISIONS OF THE COURTS. ^he. failures to identify belong to quite another order of facts: Out of the 100 individuals arrested during the preceding twenty- four hours, who each day pass through the anthropometrical rooms, what is the number of those who fail to be discovered 76 INTRODUCTION immediately by their signalment, but who are subsequently recog- nized either by the aid of the old methods or as a result of fortu- itous circumstances ? No point is more interesting to elucidate in judging of the efficacy of the new method. The official statistics of the city of Paris furnish us in this par- ticular also with a reply of indisputable accuracy. In fact, the Prefectoral Administration decided, at the sam'e time that it adopted the anthropometrical signalment, that a premium of ten francs [about $2.00] should be allowed to any police officer or prison keeper in Paris who would report to the authorities a failure to identity, and that the sum in question should be deducted from the salaries of the anthropometrical agents. The latter are then pecuniarily interested in the careful application of the sj'stem, since any negligence on their part is punishable by a relatively heavy fine. Every mistake thus transforming itself into a vi07iey consideratioyi is certain to be recorded. The concealment of a failu7'e becomes administratively impossible. Now, the annual statistics of 1889 show that out of a total of 30,000 subjects examined during the year the number of omissions reached a figure no higher than four ( I ) ! One could not ask for better results. The probability of being recognized after ha\'ing been once measured is equivalent, then, to certainty, so far as it is possible to approach that ideal. The results obtained at Lyons and Marseilles appear quite as satisfactory, although not corroborated by such complete statistics. It can be stated that wherever the trial of our method has been seriously attempted it has been entirely successful. V. ADVICE TO OFFICIALS DESIRING TO HAVE THE ANTHROPOMETRICAL FILES CONSULTED The first of the conditions to be fulfilled in order that an anthropometrical investigation may lead to recognition, is that (1) In 1S90 we again meet with this same figure of four, which rises to six in 1891, and falls to zero in 1S92. When the primary cause of these failures to recognize is looked up, it is found that even here it is never the system which is at fault, but rather the human weakness which has neglected, some Monday morning, for example, to complete the insufficient searches of the day before, or which has made a gross blunder either in dictation or in writing down a figure, etc. Whenever there is a clerical omission, it is evident that it can only spring from one of the four following causes: an error in the taking or the classification of the old sig- nalment, or, on the contrary, an error in the taking or the investigation of the new one. INTERNATIONALIZATION. 77 the signalment sent in should be exact, that is to say, taken in strict conformity with the instructions of the manual, without carelessness either in the reading, or in the copying, etc. Every new anthropometrical agent should have his work veri- fied for a while in this respect. Following are the instructions that the Attorney General of the Court of Paris addressed on this subject to the magistrates of this department in a circular dated June 29, 1887 : The ministerial circular of February 23, 1887, in calling attention to the immoderate use that certain public prosecutors make of photography for arriving at the identification of pris- oners, pointed out a surer and less costly process of identification employed at Paris, which is that of anthropometry. The Keeper of the Seals informs me that this system has been put in operation in all the capitals of arrondissements. I beg you, therefore, to be so kind as to place yourselves in relations with the adminis- trative authority for the study with it of this new method, with a view to economizing as much as possible in the expenses of photography and of examining committees. A circular addressed by the Minister of the Interior to the directors of prisons, March 7, 1887, required the persons in charge of departmental prisons to make use of it, and every arrondissement prison has recently been provided with the necessary instruments foi the taking of the anthropometrical signalment. The central collection established at the Court House in Paris contains the exact description and the indication of the various osseous lengths of adult individuals; it has existed for four years and comprises about 60,000 signalments, most of them taken in Paris itself. It will then be easy, whenever an individual seems to be hiding his identity, to ascertain whether he has not already undergone previous sentences by immediately calling for investigations which, according to experience thus far, should apparently give the most satisfactory results. I recommend to you, the first time you have recourse to anthropometrical signalments, to carefully verify those that are furnished you and to satisfy yourselves that they have been accurately taken by the prison keepers. This verification can be advantage- ously made by taking care to send to the central collection, each time that occasion presents itself, the anthropometrical signalments of prisoners who have been confined in the prisons of the Seine or of Lyons in these last three years and declare that they have already been measured there. The signalments of these individuals existing with every guarantee of accuracy will allow you to see whether the head-warden of your arrondissement has been careful in the taking of the anthropometrical signalment. Moreover, the penitentiary administration will not hesitate to turn to good account this means of verification, by addressing to its officers the instructions necessary to bring about an absolute concordance in this part of the service. The difficulties which will present themselves, and the inaccuracies that you may discover at the beginning, ought not to alienate you from this method, which since its creation has in all questions of identity rendered to Paris incontestable services. This circular rightly insists on the economy which the employ- ment of anthropometry allows to be effected in the expenses of photography. However, we may remark that it will still be necessary to have recourse to the photographic portrait whenever there is room to suppose that the individual to be looked up in the files may have been previously examined at less than twenty 78 INTRODUCTION years of age. We have seen above that anthropometrical signal- ment acquires an absolute degree of certitude only in the case of subjects who have reached an age of from twenty to twenty- two years, and that the Prefecture of Police has a photograph annexed to the signalment of every minor who passes through the station. The conclusion which flows from this is that it is indispensable to send in the photograph of minors or of subjects whom there is reason to suppose, from their apparent age, may have been exam- ined at the station during that period of their life. Carrying back the date of the first definite working of the system to the begin- ning of the year 1888 (the date of the arrests of Bourgeois and Lepine), it is easy to see that every subject appearing to have been born after the year 1868, that is to say, who appears at this present time (1892) to be less than twenty- four years of age, ought to be either photographed, or examined in person by a special agent of the central servdce of Paris, if one wishes to be absolutely sure of the result. From the circular of the Public Prosecutor of the court of Paris there springs another and final conclusion; it is that the perfect working and success of the anthropometrical method depends largely on the use that the district attorneys will know how to make of it. When the measuring officer of a prison has learned by experience that his signalments may at any time be the object of a demand for verification on the part of the district attorney, the pains that he will take in his work will increase in proportion to the interest which the judicial and administrative authorities take in it themselves. VI. INTERNATIONALIZATION AND GENERAL DIFFUSION OF THE ANTHROPOMETRICAL METHOD The countries which at the present time have ofiicially adopted the system of anthropometrical identification are : the United States, Belgium, Switzerland, Russia, most of the Republics of South America, Tunis, British India, Roumania, etc. The following are the terms in which the question of the inter- nationalization of the anthropometrical signalment was presented at Berne by a foreigner. Dr. Guillaume, ex-director of the peniten- tiary at Neuchatel, General Secretary of the International Prison Association, in an assembly of the principal ofl&cials of the judiciary INTERNATlONAI,IZATlON 79 and police of Switzerland, officially called together at the Casino in Berne, December 19, 1890, with a view to preparing for the application of judicial anthropometry in Switzerland (i). It has been established that professional criminals avoid the countries where identifica- tion is made by means of anthropometry. At the time of the introduction of the Bertillon system into France, there was remarked a genuine emigration of recidivists, who betook themselves to Belgium. Now, Belgium having followed the example of France, it is to be expected that the crooks and thieves of these two countries will transfer their field of operations to the neighboring states. Switzerland could not remain behind; it is about to fulfill its international obligation of contributing in its turn to the repression of crime by adopting the Bertillon system. The most essential thing is to obtain the anthropomatrical description of tramps; for it is these who pass through the different cantons and very often change their name on arriving in a new district. It is especially among this class that the habitual delinquents are recruited; a fact which renders it urgent to be able to immediately establish their identity. The gain would be immense. The questionable means now in use to discover the artifices of an individual suspected of giving an assumed name would disappear immediately with the introduction of the Bertillon system. Then it would no longer happen for the Penitentiary Administration to tolerate or even instigate the espionage of prisoners by their companions in misfortune, or for an attendant or a prisoner to simulate friendship for the suspected individual, in order to gain his confidence with the intention of abusing it afterwards. It is only proper that the international associations of criminals should be combatted by international measures. In proportion as the territory is extended in which anthropomet- rical measuring is employed the data at the disposal of the authorities will be augmented, since it will be possible to communicate them from from one to the other. May we not be right in seeing here the germ of the international organization of one branch of the service of public safety? It does not seem to me impossible that an inter- national bureau of anthropometrical mensuration may some day be established, analogous to the international bureaus a certain number of which we already possess. Switzerland, which is the international country by excellence, should not remain behind in this respect. If from Switzerland we pass to Belgium, we find that the same ideas have been as brilliantly developed there by Mr. Ed. de Ryckere, assistant public prosecutor at Bruges, who has lately published a study on the identification of criminals in the Journal (1) Extract from the minutes of the Council of State of the Republic and Canton of Geneva, June 10, 1891— Decree of organization : " The Council of State on the proposition of the Department of Justice and Police Decrees : Article I. There is hereby created a service for the identification of prisoners, by the anthropometric system. Article II. All persons arrested, as soon as the warrant has been issued by the magis- trate, shall, before the expiration of said warrant, be taken to the place designated for measuring (No. 42, Court House). Article III. Every prisoner is obliged to submit to the measuring under pain of being considered gruilty of resistance to authority. Artcle IV. The Department of Justice and Police is ordered to take the necessary measures for the execution of the present decree, which will become in force immediately. Certified a true copy: The Chancellor.''' 8o INTRODUCTION des Tribunaux of Brussels. This very complete paper has since been reproduced in its entirety in the Journal des Parquets of Paris. His conclusions will be ours: The internationalization of the method of anthropometrical signalments, that is the important reform that the interests of all civilized countries demand should be realized without delay. The international exchange of judicial records which forms the order of the day in the Prison Congresses, constitutes, without doubt, a sensible advance on the existing situation. This innovation permits of the verification to a certain extent of the declarations of identity made by foreign criminals or those who claim to be so. Nevertheless, it would be dangerous to delude ourselves regarding the value and efficacy of this method of verification so long as it is not completed by anthropometry. The ordinary description appended to the documents in question scarcely facilitates the recognition of identity: a round chin, an oval face, grey eyes, etc., have never led to the recognition of a criminal outside the domain of romance. At the Prison Congress of Rome, in 1885, the desire was expressed of seeing the system of anthropometrical signalment extended to the other countries. That is an important and indisputable improvement, of which advantage may be taken easily and without great expense. The immense utility of Mr. Bertillon's system could no longer be contested. The period of preliminary efforts and tests has gone byj the results of the experiment made in France are absolutely decisive; it is a complete and unde- niable success. Every progressive and wide-awake man will applaud the introduction into > our country of the scientific method of Mr. Alphonse Bertillon. It must not be forgotten that it has a broader object than the mere recognition of the identity of criminah who conceal their true name. The authentication of the physical personality and of the undeniable identity of individuals arrived at adult age corresponds, in modern society, to the most real needs, to the most varied uses. Whether there be question of giving, for instance, to the inhabitants of a country, to the soldiers of an army, or to travelers going to distant lands, identification cards, per- mitting it to be determined and proven at any time who they are; whether there be question of completing by sure indications the acts of civil life, to prevent all error and all substitution of persons; or whether of recording these distinctive marks of the individual in the documents, deeds and contracts where his personality ought to be established in his own interest, in the interest of third parties, or in the interest of the state: the method of anthropometrical signalment will still have its place. When a certificate of life, a life insurance policy, or occasionally a certificate of death, is to be drawn up, when it is necessary to prove, to certify, the identity ot some person insane, or grievously wounded, or disfigured, whose body has been partly destroyed, or has become unrecognizable or difficult of recognition, in case of sudden or violent death, the result of a crime, of an accident, of a shipwreck, of a combat; how serviceable it will be to be able to trace those characters that are invariable in each individual, infinitely variable from one individual to another, and indelible at least in part even in death! In a word, to fix the human personality, to give to each human being an identity, a positive, lasting and invariable individuality, always recognizable and easily demonstrable, such seems to be the broadest aim of this new method. The range of the problem, like the importance of its solution, passes far beyond the limits of prison work and the interest, great as it is, of the penal action to be exercised in the various nations. There is here a whole prolific source of ingenious reforms and useful improvements to be introduced in different directions. What numerous exam.ples might be cited ! There are in the social life of individuals numerous circumstances in which their identity is at stake. The general application of the system of anthropometrical signalments and its extension into all the domains of social life would render practically impossible such law- suits as that of the claimant Arthur Orton, the pretended viscount Roger Tichborne. The comparison of their respective measurements would have quickly revealed the imposture. The Hoyos-Baron affair, which ended in the execution of Hoyos in the public square of Beauvais, is not yet forgotten. Hoyos insured his life for a very large sum, and, with a view to securing the insurance, killed his servant. Baron, dressed him in his own clothes, INTERNATIONALIZATION 8l containing identifying papers, and threw him on the tracks of a railroad in order to make it appear as an accident. The fraud was very nearly successful; it would have been impos- sible to attempt, if the life insurance policy had contained the anthropometrical signalment of the person insured. The Hoyos-Baron affair is not an isolated case of an attempt at substitution of persons. The life insurance companies could say much on this subject. The system of anthropometrical signalments is calculated to render immense services. It is necessary before everything to popularize it. In this direction lies progress (i)! (l) These views have since been taken up again and presented by Mr. de Ryckere himself before the Third Congress of Criminal Anthropology, held at Brussels last summer. On his motion this assembly expressed a unanimous desire to see all coun- tries adopt the anthropometrical system of identification and extend it to the whole population. Instructions for Signalment PRELIMINARY CHAPTER.— GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR THE PRACTICE OF ANTHROPOMETRICAL SIGNALMENT Summary: I. Ad\'ice on the manner of studjnng the Instructions for Sig- nahnent and learning how to measure ; II. Choice of a place; III. The measuring furniture ; IV. Arrangement and use of the non-metallic instru- ments and accessories of measurement; V. Use, reading and care of the metallic instruments; VI. The duties of a secretary; VII. Manner of announcing the figures of the graduation; VIII. Manner of replying to the sociological headings, and those of place and date, on the signaletic card. I ADVICE ON THE MANNER OF STUDYING THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIGNALMENT AND LEARNING HOW TO MEASURE 1 . The most minute recommendations given in the following pages should be followed in all their details; but it is not neces- sary to learn the text by heart. The pages of the hitrodudmi excepted, this volume should be studied only with the instru- ments and a signaletic card within reach of the hand, constantly illustrating, paragraph by paragraph, the theory b}^ the practice, and never omitting to have recourse to the Album whenever the text refers to the number of a plate. 2. In all that relates to the performance of anthropometrical operations, the apprentice in measuring should commence bj' repro- ducing each position described, placing his own hands above the corresponding figures in the Album. The directions should be read onlj^ after having reproduced the position represented. The function of the text will consist in commenting on each figure as it is produced, drawing attention to the delicate points. (S3) 84 PRELIMINARY CHAPTER After the first attempt of this kind it will be found that a move- ment which requires a description of ten lines may be executed in the most natural and easy manner in half a second. 3. These exercises should be performed by taking as a subject some willing prisoner, when it is not possible to replace him by an obliging colleague. 4. Then the numbers obtained 071 the sa?ne individual at differ- ent sittings should be compared, and these preparatory' exercises should be continued until the differences observed never exceed the degree of approximation indicated in a special paragraph placed at the end of the chapter devoted to each observation. Four or five sittings of an hour each will generally be sufiicient. 5. We cannot repeat too often how important it is for each operator to assure himself, by his own experience, that his errors, or rather his divergences in measuring and description, do not exceed, could not in any particular exceed, the limits allowed. We have explained in the Introduction that upon the observ- ance of this rule depends the utilization of the process, the possibility of recognizing, of identifying , two signalments. We have shown also that this theorj^ of the limitation of the error might be applied to the descriptive characters, and even in some degree to the statement of peculiar marks. 6. A student measurer has really terminated his appren- ticeship only when this conviction has penetrated his mind, and when he has tested it by exchanging a few signalments /br verifi- cation with the central service at Paris. 7. To do this he ought to inquire whether, in the prison to which he is attached, there cannot be found some prisoner who has declared himself to have been measured previously at Paris, Lyons or Marseilles, or, in default of these cities, in any one of the localities known to be provided with good measurers. Sub- jects of this kind are valuable standards for verification, affording an opportunity which ought never to be neglected. The appren- tice should himself take a signalment with as much care as possible and send it directly to the central service of Paris, the seat of which is in the Depot of the Prefecture of Police, accom- panying it with an explanatory memorandum of this sort: *' Kindly inform me, for my personal instruction, of any discrepancies which there may be between the accompanying signalment, just taken by me, and THE MEASURING FURNITURE 85 that which was taken previously on the same sub- ject at [name of place] about [approximate number of months or j^ears] ago." 8. The reply of the central service will never be delayed. The errors and ommisions pointed out will be so much the more instructive that the presence of the prisoner in the establishment permits of verifying an inaccuracy immediately, and consequently of correcting the method of operating with a view to arriving at the result transmitted. It is very seldom that after the fourth or fifth correspondence of this kind i/ie necessary and sufficient degree of concordance is not attained. II. CHOICE OF A PLACE 9. We shall see (p. 87, § 20) that it is indispensable for the measuring room to have a well lighted section of wall at least two metres in length for the measurement of the reach. It is equally necessary for the notation of the color, of the eye that from the corner of the window where the subject should be placed for the observation of this organ there is to be a partial view of the sky. 10. Finally, it is desirable, from a hygienic point of view, that whenever the arrangements and size of the prison will allow it the prisoners to be examined should neither undress in or dress themselves in the measuring room, but in an adjoining antechamber. 11. As the process of anthropometry^ requires, for the avoid- ance of all delay, that the subjects should remain barefooted for ten minutes or so, it is recommended to choose, as far as possible, a room with a good floor, and furnished, if possible, with a cov- ering of linoleum or oilcloth; it should also be capable of being easily warmed in winter. III. THE MEASURING FURNITURE ( PLATE i) 12. This furniture, which, for the most part, the prison directors can have made economically in their own establishment by penal manual labor, is composed of the boards H and B for the measuring of the height and the trunk, the stools E and T, which assist in the measuring of the trimk and the foot, and the trestle-table M, on which the forearm should be rested. 86 PRELIMINARY CHAPTER 12. The employment of the boards H and B is optional. Their aim is less to serve as a support for the graduations on wood, which in many small prisons are placed directly on the wall, than to protect the latter against the injury caused by the repeated contact of subjects and the friction of the special square. 14. The metre and the half -metre are placed vertically on these boards, not in the middle of their width, but against their edge on the right side. In fact, it will be explained further on (measuring of the height and trunk) that the subject should be placed against the wall, with the spinal column about 15 centi- metres to the left of the metre (see also fig. i of the frontispiece). 15. The stool for the trzaik, E, should be fixed to the wall. It is made of very small size, in order to force the subject to seat himself firmly, in a precise manner. The dimensions indicated in plate I are therefore obligator^'. Any change, particularly in the height of the stool, which is fixed at about 0^40, might lead to discrepancies in the result of the measuring, by modifying the relative position of the thigjis and pelvis. 16. The movable stool for the foot (T) has the form of a section of a quadrangular pj-ramid. The spreading of its base thus affords a firm support to the subject, who should mount thereon with one leg only (fig. 7 of the frontispiece). To facilitate the execution of this movement, the square board on top should bear the impression of a left foot outlined in red paint. This stool also ser\'es as a seat for the subject during the meas- uring of the diameters of the head and the ear (figs. 4, 5 and 6 of the frontispiece). 17. The recent introduction of the trestle-shaped table, M, I™ ID in height, has had the important consequence of diminish- ing by more than half the extent of the errors with which the measuring of the forearm was previously affected at the time when a table of ordinar}^ height was used. A handle, P, fastened on the upper cross-piece, offers a means of support to the subject during the measuring of the foot (fig. 7 of the frontispiece). A shelf below sen-es as a place of deposit for the implements between two measurings. Underneath is a drawer in which the}' are placed after the close of the sitting. By analogy with the arrangements indicated for the footstool, the exact placing of the forearm is indicated on the upper surface NON-METAI,I,IC INSTRUMENTS 87 of the table by means of a sketch in red paint along the edge that bears the handle, at an equal distance from the two ends of the table (see plate 29). IV. ARRANGEMENT AND USE OF THE NON-IMETA-LLIC INSTRU- MENTS AND ACCESSORIES OF MEASUREMENT 18. These instruments and accessory tools are six in number. They can be easily purchased, and, if necessary, can be made without having recourse to the special dealers in anthropometrical instruments. They are: — (i) A sheet of paper , ruled in squares ( I ) and graduated in centimetres beginning at i metre and run- ning to 2 metres, for the measuring of the reach. (2) y^ rigid wooden metre of iron wood (hornbeam) about i centimetre thick by 3 centimetres wide, graduated in millimetres, from i metre to 2 metres, for the measuring of the height. (3) ^ half metre of the same kind, graduated from 0"°^ 70 to \^ 20 for the measuring of the height of the trunk. (4) A special square made of wood, to aid in measuring the height and the trunk. (5) A graduated double decimetre of boxwood, with a handle, for the exact location of the peculiar marks and scars. (6) A pair of scissors, of steel, with very strong blades rounded at the ends, for cutting, if neces- sary, the nail of the great toe and of the middle and little fingers 19. ist, A sheet of quadrille paper (plate i, fig. E). There are also to be found on sale, for the measuring of the reach, sheets of oil-cloth, the graduations and numbering of which, already printed, commence only at i™ 30. 20. This sheet, whether it be of cloth or paper, should be fastened over a section of wall at least two metres in length by means of some tacks with large heads. According to the size of the sheet used, the height of the UPPER edge of the horizontal graduation above the ground will vary from i™ 50 to 1°^ 65. It is rare, in fact, for the height of the shoulders, even in a man of great height, to exceed i^^ 50. (1) There may be found at any stationer's (especially at Lepage's publishing house in Paris) sheets of paper one metre long, ruled by millimetres in blue squares. The lines which separate the centimetres are a little heavier, and those representing the deci- metres are still more accentuated. A sheet of this kind numbered by hand, or still better by means of a stencil, answers the purpose perfectly. To make the centimetre rulings more visible, cover them with a fine black line, which should be made twice as heavy at every fifth centimetre. A heavy line bordered by two light ones should separate the tens of centimetres. 88 PREWMINARY CHAPTER 2 1 . The most important point is for the horizontal distance between the extremity of the section of wall (limited by the cor- ner of the room or by a special projection) and the first line of the vertical graduation to be precisely equal to the figure written, that is to say, in our specimen (plate i), to the length of i metre ( I™ 30 in the case of the pattern on oil-cloth). 22. The graduation <7;z /a/^r after being fixed at the desired distance, and exactly vertically, must be protected against injury, and especially from soiling, by a thick pane of glass of the same dimensions, while that on oil-cloth, which can be cleansed with soap and water, may be used bare. 23. 2nd, Entire metre in wood (plate i, fig. H). The metre for the height is placed at the same time i metre (measured verti- cally) above the ground and i metre (measured horizontally) from the starting-point of the graduation for the reach (indicated by the special projection), with its outer edge contiguous to the graduation for the reach. We would say, in passing, that this last direction, which how- ever is not obligatory, presents the advantage, for scientific investigations, of permitting the measuring of the reach even when in children it is less than i metre. It suffices for this pur- pose to take as a starting-point the projection of the edge of the metre contiguous to the graduation for the reach, instead of the original projection. 24. 3rd, Half-metre (plate i, fig. B). The half-metre, speci- ally graduated from 0°^ 70 to V^ 20 for the measuring of the height of the trunk, is placed according to the same principles, the first line of the graduation at 0°^ 70 above the special stool of which we have already spoken. 25. When the arrangement of the room will allow it, the half - metre scale may be used both as a graduation for the trunk and as the original projection for the measuring of the reach. This is the arrangement which has been followed in plate i . 26. Before fastening in a permanent manner the three gradua- tions for the reach, the height and the trunk in the positions just indicated, it should be ascertained that no mistake has been made in placing them, by measuring successively with these different rules one same rigid rod of known length, and comparing the results obtained. NON-METAI.LIC INSTRUMENTS 89 Thus, for example,, a broom-handle of from i™ 20 to 1°^ 50 in length (after the brush has been cut off, of course) may be meas- ured, taking care to write down the figures as fast as they are found: ist, b}' the aid of an ordinary metre; 2nd, by means of the rule for the height; and 3rd, with the rule for the reach, placing, for the latter pinpose, the end of the broom-handle against the original projection which is the starting point of the gradua- tion. If the rod, while measuring more than a metre, was still less than i^ 20, it can be measured a fourth time by means of the rule for the trunk. But generall}^ it will be necessary to use for this last verification a different rod of smaller size, as for instance a cane or umbrella-handle the length of which is about o™ 90. This will then be measured: ist, b}^ the ordinar}- metre; 2nd, by the rule for the trunk; and 3rd, b}' the horizontal graduation for the reach, but this time placing its extremity against the edge of the metre for the height instead of against the original projection. 27. All the lengths, written down as soon as read, should be compared onl}' when the series of measurements indicated above has been completely finished. They ought, for each rod employed, to be identical to within a millimetre. Small discrepancies of from one to two millimetres ascribable to the graduations can be easily corrected without displacing the screws and plugs by striking with a hammer on the end of the rule in the direction opposite the error. 28. But the great advantage of these verifications will be to force upon the attention the grave mistakes in reading which slip in so easily during the labor of installation, particularly as regards the rule for the reach. Thus it has happened in our anthropo- metrical practice to meet with sets of rules which seemed to have been set up with the greatest precision, but where, as the result of the confusion of a figure, the same rigid rod measured i™ 45.8 with the rule for the height and only 1^ 35.8 with the horizontal rule for the reach; the millimetre was correct, the error affected only the figure for the tens of centimetres ! 29. 4th, Special square (plate i, fig. Q). This square has its lower front edge rounded "at the comers in order to render its handling more easy, and to oblige the operator to use it only in the position in which it is represented in plate i, to wit: with the side 20 X25 vertical and that of 22 horizontal. So this last sur- 90 PRELIMINARY CHAPTER face is the only one which can be soiled by contact with the hair, and the only one, in consequence, which requires particular care for cleanliness. 30. 5th, Dedmetre scale, and 6th, Scissors. There is nothing to be said about the double decimetre and the pair of scissors with round ends, except that their use is indispensable, that they must be included in every complete anthropometrical outfit, and that the operator should furnish himself with them at the beginning of each sitting and not wait until he needs them and then have to go and look for them in an adjoining room. V. USE, READING AND CARE OF THE METALLIC INSTRUMENTS These instruments are three in number. 31. {i) A caliper compass (plate 2), of nickel-plated iron, with an arc of a circle generally graduated from the twelfth to the twenty-second centimetre, for the measuring of cranial diametres. We will call it abbreviatively the head caliper. 32. (2) ^ ^;;za//<:«/z)^^r rz//' important directions a failure to observe which might entirely falsify the sought-for result. S0C10I.0GICAI. HEADINGS 97 than half the signalments taken. The minimum differences of two or three years are alwaj's useful to point out any- where around the twentieth year, from the point of view [in France] of military obligations. 65. The headings of filiation are filled out in the usual way, and care should be taken to distinguish legitimate and legitimated from illegitimate and adopted children. A great number of fruitless searches in the birth registers are due to confusions of this kind. The absence of any indication on this point will always be interpreted as a sign of legitimate birth. 66. By profession we understand the ordinary occupation of the subject when he is at liberty, and not his work as a prisoner. Without a prof ession vs. v^TiXX&Vi s. p. (sans profession). [or nop.]. 67. The heading last residence is aimed, so far as possible, at the last fixed domicile, and not the lodging-house where the sub- ject may have only passed the night preceding his arrest. The abbreviation s. d. signifies without fixed domicile. 68. 77^1? papers of identity which an individual carries should be noted only after a personal examination of them; and if, for one cause or another, the subject does not have them with him, indicate the reason, and say particularly w^hether the enumeration of them is made according to the statements of the subject or copied from an authentic document. The reply without papers is abbreviated to s. pp, 69. The relations include the names of reputable persons whose precise addresses the individual knows, and to whom he could appeal if necessary to establish his identity: parents, brothers, uncles or aunts, legitimate wife, children, old emplo^'ers or patrons, school or hospital directors, or officers of any kind in the prison service, ecclesiastics, etc. Whenever it is possible, the information under the two preceding headings should be completed by some such mention as this: ^'well known in this locality, of which he is a native, or where he has lived for 3, 5, 7 or 10 years and where he was married, or better still, well known by keeper X , under whose charge he formerly was at (name of prison) in 18 — (approximate designation of the year), etc. 98 PRELIMINARY CHAPTER 70. It is the military services performed wliicli are intended by the heading relating to that subject, rather than the position in case of mobiHzation, which can always be easily deduced from the preceding data. 7 1 . The number of previous convictions should be indicated, specifying the character of the most important. If this infor- mation is given from a copy of the judicial records, the word records (Fr. easier) should follow, placed in parenthesis. If at the time the card is made out no other means of information is available than the more or less unreliable assertions of the subject, there should be added the letters decl., abbrevation for declaration. If the subject has never undergone a con^-iction before that to which he is now exposed (or which he has just incurred) he should be asked whether he has already undergone arrest or detention, followed by a non-suit or acquittal. The complete absence of judicial antecedents is not expressed on the card by the word none, but by means of the letters n. a. (never arrested, Fr. jamais arrete, j. a.). 72. The line relating to the place of the last previoiis dete?t- tioyi naturally needs to be filled out only in the case of a recid- ivist having already undergone an arrest prior to the present one. 73. It is not sufficient for the specification of the offence lead- ing to the present detention to merelj' mention the unlawful act in the manner in which it is entered in the jail-book, but there should be indicated in a few words the characteristic species to which it belongs. Thus in simple larceny, a distinction should be made between the theft of standing crops, the theft of articles exposed for sale, theft in large stores, theft from an office or till, hold- ups, pocket-pickiyig , etc. This latter crime, for example, being always the work of an old offender, one may be assured, a priori, that there is a concealment of identity, whenever an indi- vidual who has been guilty of it declares himself to be without judicial antecedents. Thus the signalments in which the individ- ual notice mentions the crime of pocket-pickiyig or of buncoing, etc., are looked up very carefully in the central file: while those indicating breach of trust, theft by a salaried employee, etc., are not made the object of any special examination, except on particular advice. SOCIOLOGICAI, HEADINGS 99 As much might be said for the thousand different categories of outrage and offenses against modesty. Nothing can be more different, from the point of view of the signaletic externals of the individuahty, than the old pederastic criminal, the vile debauchee who pursues children of one sex or the other, the drunkard who, in satisfying a call of nature, commits an indecent act more or less involuntary, and the more or less insane exhibitionist, etc. 74. The last line of the recto of the card is devoted to the date and the indication of the place where the sig7ialnie7it has been taken. The months may be noted in figures: ist, 2nd, 3rd, etc., instead of January, February, March, etc. The proper na77ie of the keeper, followed by the initials of his given name, has in view the meas- urer who has REALLY taken the signalment and not the function- ary theoretically responsible. The central bureau of Paris keeps a list, indeed, of all the measurers in France by name, with a view to a surveillance of their ability and zeal. Their names, with the evidences of their anthropometrical knowledge, are registered in it as fast as the occasions for verification present themselves. 75. When the city where the signalments are taken contains several prisons, there should be added to the name of the city the name of the particular establishment in which the operation takes place. (On French cards arr.^rstation, corr.=jail or house of correction, and ceil irai=penitentiary.) FIRST PART ANTHROPOMETRICAL OBSERVATIONS CHAPTER I.— GENERAL MEASUREMENTS TO BE TAKEN BY MEANS OF THE MURAL GRADUATIONS A. Height. B. Reach. C. Trunk. SECTION A. — MEASUREMENT OF THE HEIGHT (plate 5) First Stage 1. The subject being barefooted and having his back against the wall, at about fifteen centimetres from the rule on the side of the graduation, make him take a position similar to that of the soldier without arms, as it is defined in the viilitary tactics; the heels together and touching the wall, the feet at a little less than a right angle, and turned in an equal degree outward, the knees stiff, the body straight, firm and erect, the shoulders back and even in height, the arms hanging naturally along the body, the neck stiff, THE chin SLIGHT- LY DRAWN IN, and the eyes looking straight forward. 2. In the case of crook-backed persons, it often results from the position indicated that the back of the head no longer touches the vertical upright that bears the scale. It would be a mistake to make heads of this kind bend backwards until in contact WITH THE GRADUATED WALL. This might cause a diminution of more than a centimetre from the actual height. 3. As a general rule: place the subject in such a manner as to make him assume his maximum height, making sure that his heels touch the ground. Second and Last Stage 4. When the subject has been correctly placed, press with right hand against his stomach to correct, if necessary, any excessive arching of the back; at the same time take in the left hand the special square with a double plane, place it at some centimetres above the head of the subject, with the side rounded at the corners downward, applying it at the same time against the wall and against the projecting edge of the metre (on the side of the graduation); (100) HEIGHT lOi bring it down quickly till it touches the summit of the head, guiding it by the projection formed by the the thickness of the metre, then, holding it in place by a firm pressure against the wall, read the figure of the graduation opposite the lower plane of the square. 5. The placing of the square against the measuring-board and its descent on the head of the subject are two movements which shotild be executed by the operator quickly and without hesita- tion, in order to surprise the individual measured before the latter has had time to modify the position taken at first. 6. If, in spite of all, some mancEUvre of shrinking is suspected, make the subject take a few steps across the room and then suddenly replace him under the scale and begin the operation over again. 7. The height is the most delicate of all the measurements of the system, and the one in which the subject can most easily cheat. The least negligence in obtaining the position described above may cause a difference of nearly a centimetre. The height of the same individual is often ten millimetres greater in the morning, 07i getting out of bed, than in the evening. Moreover, the body settles every year after twentj'-five years of age, sometimes beginning even sooner. Now supposing all these errors to be accumulated in the same direction, it may be considered estab- lished that a subject of adult age, measured at an interv'al of several years, is likely to show a diminution in height which may amount to 2 and sometimes even to 3 centimetres, or an increase which may reach i centimetre. 8. In the dictation of the height, the indication i metre, which necessarily accompanies each height and is printed on the cards, is always understood, and the centimetres and millimetres are announced separately (see page 93, § 52). 9. Mention the centimetres exactly, and the millimetres approximately within a unit, without seeking an accuracy which this measure does not permit. Be careful, however, not to be led into giving round numbers: if, for example, the square indicates a measure intermediate between i™ 59^™ 8™™ and i" 59^^°^ gmm dQ -fiQi indicate i'^ 60^^™ omm. j^ other words, read and dictate the figrure of the graduation just as it is indi- cated, taking care not to modify it in any way. I02 ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS Remarks on the Measuring of the Height 10. Below the line for the indication of the height there is noted the degree of vaulting or curvature of the back: i, 2, 3 centimetres, or a dash when the position is correct, as is oftenest the case. 1 1 . By this correction the operator seeks to diminish the lack of precision of the height. He marks i centimetre, when the individual is slightly crook-backed; 2, when the curvatiire is more accentuated; 3, when it is very pronounced. The figures 4 and 5 are seldom used; while 6, 7, etc., can be applied only to hump- backs. 12. The operator by practicing before a measuring- board, to observe the diminution in the height that he produces by bend- ing his back more or less, will soon become able to determine with suflScient accuracy the value of these indications. 13. Thus the notation: height, 1^^65.4 — curvature 3, applies to a crook-backed man whose height is given by the rule as i°i 65, but who, under other circumstances, in his youth or in good health, when he held himself erect, or wished to hold himself erect, would have measured 3 centimetres more, or i*^ 68 within a few millimetres. The following example, on the contrary: height, i*^ 68.2 — cur- vature — (the heading curvature being followed by a dash), applies to a man holding himself sufficiently erect who (if the other information agreed) might be the same one to whom the preceding example referred. 14. Thus the observation of the cur\'ature is taken by the eye, without the aid either of the measuring- board or of the decimetre. It is always a centimetrical figure which is forwarded by way of indication to the employee whose duty it is to make the investi- gation in the central collection, to remind him that the usual approximation could not have been attained. 15. When there is room to suspect that the vaulting is produced voluntarily by fraudulent manoeuvres of the subject, the letters tr, abbreviation for trickery, should be placed after the heading on the signaletic formula. The analogous attempts which have their seat in the loins and the small of the back are noted in the same manner. REACH 103 16. Approximation. Taking into account thk correc- tions CARRIED TO THE HEADING CURVATURE, "there is evidence of a mistake on the operator's part when the variation above OR BELOW the true figure reaches 7 milHmetres, and of a grave mistake when the discrepancy exceeds 1 5 milHmetres. SECTION B. — MEASUREMENT OF THE REACH (plate 6) 17. The reach is the greatest length which the arms can attain when extended horizontally in the form of a cross. It is meas- ured immediately after the height, almost without moving the subject. First Stage 18. The subject remaining with his back against the wall is asked to extend the arms in the form of a cross. The operator, facing the graduation on the wall, keeps them in this position, causing the subject to move, if necessary, either to the right or left, far enough for the extremity of his middle finger to come into contact with the projection from which the horizontal scale is reckoned. To do this it will generally be sufficient to say, indicating the projection: "Please touch here," adding, as soon as the contact is obtained: "Spread your legs a little; place yourself in an easy position." This last direction is intended to correct the turning on the hips, which the subjects, wishing to do well, scarcely ever fail to execute in the attempt to touch the projection without spreading or moving their legs from the position previously taken for the measuring of the height. Now the reach can be taken with exactness only when the subject, fixed quite perpendicularly upon his legs, has his shoulders horizontal. Second and Last Stage 19. As soon as these conditions have been realized the oper- ator, by a rapid glance from right to left, makes certain for a last time: First, that the extremity of the right middle finger of his subject has not lost its contact with the projection; and, second, that from this extremity to that on the opposite side the joints of the wrists, arms and shoulders are on one same horizontal line; then, making sure of the immovability of the arms of his subject by a light pressure against the wall (see plate 6), he reads the indication of the graduation. I04 anthropometricai. observations Remarks on the Measuring of the Reach 20. The divergences to which the measuring of the reach is Hable should be compensated for, as far as possible, by the indica- tion of the curvature or vaulting (Fr. voUte) of the reach, interpreted in the same manner as for the height, and noted by the signs V. I, V. 2, V. 3, etc. , which are written on the signaletic card immediately after the results of the measuring. This correction often has to be made in the case of persons who have had the joints of their arms stiffened by rheumatism, the rickets, etc. In subjects of this kind it must be seen to that the wrists are kept as closely as possible against the graduated wall. 21. In accordance with the directions of paragraph 15 regard- ing the ciu-vature of the back, whenever there is reason to suppose that the imperfect extension of the arms is due to some manoeuvre on the part of the subject the sign v. is replaced by the letters tr. (trickery). 22. When a person insists that he is unable to open his arms to their full length, it is not the duty of the measurer to discover whether this inability really exists. He measures the greatest stretch of the arms just as it presents itself, even when, as a result of luxation or of the amputation of one of them, the entire reach is reduced to the length of a single arm added to the breadth of the shoulders. But he takes care to explain under the heading note the true or supposed reason for so great a correction. 23. In general, every correction indicated by means of the letters V. or tr.f followed by a figure greater than two, should be made the subject of an explanatory note. 24. There is a well known correlation between the reach and the height: the reach is on an average about 4 centimetres greater than the total height. Thus these two indications check each other. Whenever the reach dictated is inferior by some centimetres to the height or exceeds it by more than ten centi- metres, it is probable that a mistake has been made in one or the other of these observations and they should both be verified. If the same figures are obtained as at the first reading, a note is made of this verification by adding on the card after the TRUNK 105 figure forthereacli the letters rv. (measurement reviewed, ver- ified, its accuracy guaranteed, however extraordinary it may appear). It is distinctly understood that this note implies the rbme;asuring not only of the reach but also of the height. 25. The letters rv. may appear, on the same grounds, after any other indication, numerical or descriptive, whenever it is extraordinary either by its comparative magnitude or smallness, so that it is found necessary to indicate by a conventional sign that it is not the result of an error in the measuring or re- cording. 26. Approximation. The reach is the only one of the anthropometrical observations that is read in centimetres without the addition of millimetres. The figure set down may therefore be on this account from 3 to 4 millimetres smaller than the length indicated by the horizontal rule, which is itself graduated only in centimetres. Beyond the half centimetre, the next even centimetre is dictated. 27. It would in fact be entirely useless to note the millimetres for a length in which the divergences in measurement (even after allowing for the corrective indications) may reach i centimetre above and i to 2 centimetres below the true figure without neces- sarily implying a mistake on the part of the measurer. Be5'ond these limits the mistake will be all the more inexcusable in pro- portion to its extent and to the lack of corrective indications (let- ters v., tr., or explanatory note) to put the reader on his guard. SECTION C. MEASUREMENT OF THE TRUNK (plate 7) J^trst Stage 28. The subject being in his shirt sleeves, tell him to sit down on the footstool with buttocks against the wall. INIake sure that this order has been strictly complied with by passing the hand down the lower part of the subject's back; ascertain by a glance that the legs are bent at right angles to the hips, the small of the back not too much arched, the shoulders equally sloping, and the head in its normal position. I06 ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS Second and Last Stage 29. Bring down the special square in the same manner and with the same precautions as already prescribed for the measuring of the height; then dic- tate the number indicated. Remarks on the Measuring of the Trunk 30. The observations regarding the degree of contraction of the back and on the possible kinds of deception are identical, whether in the case of the trunk, the height or the reach. They will be recorded in the same way for the trunk by means of similar abbreviations relating to vaulting and trickery. 3 1 . Approximation. This measurement frequently exhibits differences of more than 10 centimetres among different individuals of the same height. Unfortunately it can be taken with any sort of precision only on wilHng subjects. Whatever may be the causes of error, the divergence between the heights of the trunk measured on the same individual should not exceed one centi- metre plus or minus, taking into consideration, of course, both the correctio7is already charged to the va^dting of the body, and those which may need to be especially annexed to the figures for the trunk. CHAPTER II.— MEASUREMENTS TAKEN ON HEAD BY MEANS OF CALIPER COMPASS AND SMAI.Iv CALIPER RULE A. Diameters of the head. B. Diameters of the ear. SECTION A. — DIAMETERS OE THE HEAD Measurement of the Length of Head (antero-posterior diameter) First Stage (plates 8 and 9) 1. Make the subject sit down on the movable footstool, his face turned toward the light but si,ighTi,y inci,ined towards the floor. 2. Stand at the left side of the subject, place the left point of the caliper compass in the depression at the root of the nose(i), holding the rounded extremity of the point between the thumb and fore-finger, which rest on the adjacent parts of the nose and prevent the point from deviating towards one of the two orbital cavities, which would entirely falsify the measurement. 3. At the same time take the other branch of the compass in the right hand and bring it towards the top and center of the head, allowing the ex- treme point to project barely one centimetre beyond the operator's finger- tips, in such wise, however, that it can easily penetrate the hair. 4. The other fingers of the two hands, slightly bent, maintain the com- pass in an ai^most horizonTai, position, so that the light from the window strikes full on the millimetrical graduation. Things being in this situation : 5. Fix the eyes on the index-mark of the graduation; bring the right point of the compass down over the back and middle of the head until it has (1) In anthropology the point most generally adopted for the taking of the antero-posterior diameter of the head is situated on the glabella (the space between the eyebrows) and not on the root of the nose; whence a marked difierence exists between the diameter of the anthropologists and the length of head of our signalments. (107) Io8 ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS reached and passed the most projecting point ; then move the point upward again, watching that it continues to touch the scalp ; pass over the maximum point again, feel around for a moment, keeping the eyes fixed on the gradu- ation to make sure that it really is the maximum point, and then read the indication of the graduation. 6. Care should be taken during these manoeuvres and those that are to follow that the subject does not contract his eyebrows; this is a rather fre- quent instinctive movement which, if not repressed, might unduly increase the sought-for dimension by a millimetre. The maximum point is generally situated on the occipital pro- tuberance, sometimes above it. However, it must not be forgotten that it is not the location of this point that is sought but rather the distance that separates it from the root of the nose. Second Stage (plates lo and ii) 7. The operator having ascertained the length of the head to within a millimetre, withdraws the compass and fixes it at the supposed length by means of the set-screw. 8. To perform this latter operation rapidly and without trembling : Place the fingers as shown in plate 1 1 , to- wit : the thumb of the left hand across the left branch and the graduated scale, while the other fingers ex- tended reach easily the under side of the right branch. With the right thumb and right index finger bring the right branch of the compass to the milli- metrical point previously found, and turn the set-screw situated under the index-mark. In- this pointing the four extended fingers of the left hand serv^e as a support and prevent the oscillations which would take place if the right hand were acting alone. 9. Be careful to set the compass at the point exactly opposite the index-mark, and not on one side at half a millimetre above or below. Third atid Last Stage 10. Having set the compass at the desired distance, replace it on the root of the nose and begin again the up and down motion executed in the first stage (same figures as for the first stage, plates 8 and 9). 11. By these latter movements the operator verifies the accuracy of the measure obtained and ascertains, in oscil- lating hither and thither, whether any little bony bump situated to the right or the left of the median plane and capable of HEAD 109 modifying the length found has not escaped him the first time. If the point encounters any resistance in this manoeuvre the operator should widen the opening of the compass by i or 2 milli- metres, handhng the instrument as described for the second stage, and RECOMMENCE THE THIRD MO\'EMENT. If, on the contrar>^, the point nowhere touches, or if the friction in passing over the maximum point is almost imperceptible, he tries a degree of separation smaller by i or 2 millimetres. It is seldom, after a few days practice, that the exact figure is not found after one or two trials. 12. Whatever may be the skill of the operator, this third stage, called "the control," must never be omitted. For this verification, rely principally on the friction of the point of the compass on the scalp. The left point resting firm, that is to say entering" well into the depression at the root of the nose, the right should touch the skin of the head; but in passing over the maximum point there should not need to be the least pressure on the branches, which are unfortunately always flexible enough to bend a little. If such should be the case it would be a sure sign that the measure was too small by i or 2 millimetres, 13. When the compass is set at the exact length, the FRICTION IS such THAT IT CEAS£S AT A SINGLE MILLIMETRE MORE AND BECOMES HARD AT A SINGLE MILLIMETRE LESS. 14. Furthermore, it happens sometimes, especially in the case of thin subjects, that the pointing seems too tight at a given millimetre and too loose at the miUimetre following. This is because the actual length falls more or less exactly midway between two contiguous millimetres. The use of fractions of a millimetre being forbidden, the operator must dictate, under such circumstances, the figure which seems to him to be nearest the truth. 15. Approximation. From the preceding obser^-ations we must conclude that the measurement of the length of head can be taken to within half a milHmetre, although the mention of the half millimetere is never made in it. Except in the case where the true indication falls almost exactly between two millimetrical graduations, it should be recog- no ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS nized that there is beginning to be a error on the part of the operator when the discrepancy between two lengths of head meas- ured on the same subject reaches i milHmetre, and a grave mistake when this difference reaches 2 milHmetres. The error, in this case, is the more inexcusable because for the head there is no room to allege a possible trickery on the part of the subject. 16. The difference of two millimetres generally results from a double error of i millimetre in opposite directions; the differences are added together, and the truth lies between the two. 17. 'ViX'S: doubling of the error, which may happen in any of the measures of the signalment, shows with what care the operator who wishes to avoid errors of 2 millimetres should attend to the milHmetres in the obtaining of every kind of length. II. Measurement of the Width of Head (tranverse diameter) 18. The maximum width of the head is taken with the same instrument as the length, and by a similar method. First Stage (plates 12 and 13) 19. The subject being seated on the stool in the same position as for the measuring of the length, take a position exactly behind him, the heels to- gether at right angles and the body erect, so as to allow equal freedom to both elbows. Hold the branches of the compass a short distance from the ends, and place the points at first on the upper attachment of each ear; then raise them vertically across the subject's scalp. 20. As has been said in the case of the length, the operator, his eyes fixed on the graduation, at first observes an increase of width, soon followed by an uninterrupted diminution in propor- tion as the points of the compass are raised symmetrically towards the top of the head. Descending again, the operator sees the movement of increase take place once more, followed by a diminu- tion, and he tries, by feeling around, to find the position of the two opposite points, on the same level, at which the diminution commences. 2 1 . These two points are not necessarily those of the maximum width; but they are generally situated very close to it on the same horizontal plane as the diameter sought. So the operator, having found this horizontal plane, has only to : HEAD III 22. Make the arms of the compass oscillate slowly back and forth two or three times, in order to be able to stop at the maximum diameter and read the graduation. 23. Occasionally the two points with maximum interval are situated just at the upper attachment of the ears; but oftener they are found two fingers' width above and behind. Second Stage (plate 14) 24. The second stage in the measuring of the width has the same object as the corresponding stage for the length — to fix the branches of the calipers at the figure found. The method of operating is likewise the same. 25. The left hand, letting go the point of the caliper, is withdrawn from the instnunent for a moment and brought up towards the graduated scale; the thumb is placed across it, while the other four fingers are extended un- derneath to sustain and steady the opposite branch, which may then in its turn be relinquished by the right hand. 26. With this free hand turn the set-screw, after having brought the branches to the distance found in the first stage. Third and Last Stage 27. The object of the third stage, as of the corresponding stage in the measuring of the length, is to make certain that the opening at which the compass has been fixed is neither too wide nor too narrow. 28. To this end, move the points of the compass symmetrically up and down, gradually advancing from i to 2 millimetres at each going and coming, until a point considerably forward of the two maximum protuber- ances has been reached (same general view as for the first stage, plate 12). It is very important that, during the whole of this verification, the subject should be seated squarely and that, on the other hand, the operator should have his body erect, with his elbows free and evenly raised in order that the two points of the compass may advance quite symmetrically with the same movement. 30. The observations on the degree of friction which should be sought, and which it is possible to obtain, are the same as for the length (page 109, §§ 12 to 14). 112 ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS 3 1 . Nevertheless a comparison of the directions for the third stage with those for the first shows that the oscillating move- ments for verifying the probable width are not identical with those for determi7ii7ig it at the first reading. In determining the probable width, the caliper is first raised vertically, and then oscillated backwards and forwards horizontally; in verification, the points, starting from the commencement of the third movement, are advanced forwards and backwards, describing a series of zigzag lines 2 or 3 centimetres long and only a few milUmetres apart (plate 15, fig. i). 32 . The protuberances which determine the maximum width are frequently, indeed, only slight projections with a surface smaller than that of a dime. Hence it results that if, in the oscillations for the control, the zigzag lines were too far apart, there would be danger of passing by the maximum projection without touching it (plate 15, fig. 2), and consequently of being led to diminish the opening of the compass and to dictate a measure from i to 2 millimetres too narrow. The error would still more certainly be made if in the verifi- cation the points of the compass, instead of following a zigzag course, were to describe a series of concentric ovals (plate 15, fig. 3). This i.ast fault is very common in beginners. 33. Approximation. Theoretically the degree of approx- imation should be the same for the width of the head as for the length. In practice, however there is sometimes observ^ed a difference of I milhmetre plus or minus (whence a total divergence which may arise to 2 millimetres) between two widths taken on the same subject at an inter\^al of several years, a difference which ought to be ascribed less to an error in measuring than to a considerable change which has inter\^ened in the fleshiness of the subject. Remarks Applying to the Measuring of Both Diameters The corrections and remarks of which the cranial diameters are susceptible are not numerous. 34. Sometimes a wound in the head will render the measuring either inexact or even, for the time being, impossible. The HEAD 113 operator, to shield himself from responsibility, must not omit to indicate under the heading note these circumstances over which he has no control. 35. Irregular or deformed heads should also be the subject of explanatory references, especially when these irregularities are liable to cause errors in measuring, 36. A lack of symmetry between the cranial protuberances which determine the maximum width should not cause the operator to modify the method of operating. In these cases he should observe with more care than ever the symmetry of his own movements in the controlling stage; but he should also note in the margin the length obtained when the head is measured aslant in the direction of the axis of the irregularity. The peculiarity should be indicated in a note, thus: head {very) irregular; the width, inclining from right side (or left), measures only 14.5. 2,'J. In accordance with paragraph 25, page 105, of the preceding chapter, the operator should indicate by means of the letters rv. (abbreviation of review) the cranial diameters remarkable either for their shortness or their length, after having first verified their scrupulous exactitude by a new measurement and an attentive reading of the graduation. We may add, in order to give more definiteness to our ideas, that the length of the head is seldom less than 1 70 millimetres or greater than 200; while the width varies between 140 and 169 millimetres. SECTION B. — DIAMETERS OF RIGHT EAR I. Measurement of the Length of Ear (plates i6 and 17) 38. The diameters of the right ear ( i ) should be measured immediately after the cranial diameters, while the subject is still seated on the stool, facing the light. (1) For the ear the right side has been chosen in preference to the left (contrary to the rule for the other observations) because of the custom of showing the r;^/;/ profile rather than the left in judicial photography. 114 ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS First Stage 39. The subject ha\-ing his face tvirned towards the window, make him incline his head considerably to the left and backwards, so that the plane of the right cheek and ear is presented in full light at an angle of about 45. 40. With the right hand take hold of the small caliper-rule by the lower end of the stem, the fixed branch upward; apply the non-graduated side against the cheek, parallel to the line of attachment of the ear wnth the head, but at about half a centimetre in front of it, the broad branches, called paddles, resting against the skull and being directed towards the back of the head. 41. In this position, owing to the leftward and backward inclination of the subject's head, the stationarj^ paddle of the caliper rule casts no shadow on the upper edge of the ear, from which it is still separated by a space of i or 2 millimetres. Second Stage 42. With the left hand hold the fixed branch immovable, taking as a point of support the top of the subject's head. The left thumb, slightly ex- tended, should rest firmly on the mortise of this branch with the stem, in such \A-ise that the lower surface of the paddle touches without depress- ing the upper edge of the ear; then gently push the movable branch %\-ith the right thumb until it GR.'^ES the extreme point of the lobe (popularly drop) of the ear. Third and Last Stage 43. After ha\-ing glanced once more at the position of the tn-o paddles to see that they both continue to touch, read and dictate the figure shown by the index mark, before withdra^^-ing the instrument. Remarks on the Measuring of the Length of Ear 44. We cannot insist too strongly upon the care which must be taken in this operation not to depress the skin of either the upper border or the lobule of the ear, which might ver>' easily cause a difference of several millimetres. 45. Operators will find it useful, especially while learning, to divide the adjusting of the caliper-rule upon the ear into two distinct periods : First period. — The instrument is placed and brought into contact above and below as before directed, but lea%-ing a space of about half a millimetre between each paddle and the corresponding extremity of the ear. ^AR 115 Second period. — Everything being in place, the actual contact is made, first above, by keeping^rw the adhesion between the caliper and the skin, and making this slight displacement merely by the slipping of the skin on the skull; then below by gently raising the movable arm until it is in contact with the ear. Then the reading of the graduation should be done immedi- ately, the instrument being still in position against the skull. 46. The blending lobules which are prolonged into a descending point along the cheek present a difl&culty. In the absence of a fold marking an exact boundary between the lower end of the ear and the commencement of the cheek, the operator takes as a lower limit the groove or notch which is invariably found in all ears of this kind a few millimetres from the cheek on the free edge of the lobule. This peculiarity, which may be a cause of error, is indicated by writing after the figure given by the regular measurement, the letters pr. (abbreviation for prolonged) followed by the approx- imate distance in millimetres between the chosen line of demarca- tion and the extreme lower point ( i ) . Thus the ear represented by the oppo- site diagram would have, measured in natural size from its upper edge A B to its lower extremity C D, a length of 5.4 centimetres; the prolongation D Y below it (which our artist has somewhat exag- gerated) would measure approximately 3 millimetres: so the measure of the length of the organ should appear after its proper heading in this form: 5.4 pr. 3, 47. Ears which are cut, torn, in- dented, etc., must be measured as they are, in conformity with the general direc- Fig. 23. measurement of an ear tions. A [B 1 m mm ;* 1 m W^r 1 j^iMr ^^ \ r f -^41 C \s_ 1 D ? ■■ ^ y with a descending lobe. 48. Approximation. Theoretically the length of the ear should be capable of being measured with the same approximation to accuracy as the cranial diameters, that is, to within a half- millimetre plus or minus. But in practice the softness and (1) These directions, the result of experience, differ very considerably from those given in the first edition, vs-here it was recommended to write on the signalment the total sum of the real length and the prolongation together. Il6 ANTHROPOMETRIC A I, OBSERVATIONS flexibility of the parts render this operation much more dehcate. Therefore, a difference of two milhmetres, although faulty, is frequently observed between successive measurements of the same ear, the true length lying between the two. At 3 millimetres the mistake becomes inexcusable. 49. We would add, however, that, as the ear may settle a little, especially in old people, there may occur a discrepancy betw'een signalments of one same subject taken at an interval of many years (ten years, for example) so considerable as to- represent in reality an increase in the dimension. II. Measurement of the Width of Ear (i) 50. The width of the ear is taken immediately after the length, by means of the narrow branches of the same caliper-rule, without changing the position of the subject, who remains seated on the stool. 51. This measurement puzzles beginners a little by the change of hands that it necessitates. The stem of the instrument passes from the right hand to the left, and, contrary to the procedure in all the other measurements (this measure and that of the forearm excepted) , it is the thumb OF THB LEFT hand w^hich pushes the movable branch, while that of the right hand holds the mortise of the fijxed branch immovable against the ear. So while in the measuring of the length of ear it is the left hand which is sup- ported on the summit of the head, in that of the width, it is the right which steadies itself on the top of the forehead. First Stage 52. Take the stem of the instrument in the left hand, place it horizon- tally about half a centimetre above the upper edge of the ear, so that the narrow fixed branch is turned downwards and rests in front of the tragus, against the cartilaginous part of the auditory conduit, parallel wth the line of junction of the ear with the cheek. When the fixed narrow branch has been correctly placed, hold it immov- able by means of a pressure exercised by the tip of the thumb of the right hand, while the other fingers extended find their point of support on the top of the subject's forehead. (1) [This measurement having now been abandoned at Paris, the plates relating to it (Nos. 18 and 19) have been replaced by those representing the measurement of the bizygomatic diameter, which has been substituted for it (see Appendix C).] EAR 117 53. With the left hand withdraw the graduated STEM from the skull in proportion to the spread of the ear, until the movable branch can be brought opposite the posterior border. 54. We have seen that during this movement the fixed branch, serving as a pivot, should be kept fixmly pressed against the ear by means of the thumb of the right hand, while the other fingers find a point of support on the top of the forehead. Second and Last Stage 55. Push the movable branch gently forward by means of the left thumb, until it just touches the posterior edge of the hem. Read and dictate the figures of the graduation before withdrawing the instrument. Remarks on the Measuring of the Width of Ear 56. This measurement is still more difficult than that of the length of ear. To the complications arising from the softness of the organ is added the difficulty of holding the instrument properly in the turning movement that must be effected, taking as a pivot the ideal line of attachment of the ear which passes in front of the auditory conduit. The difficulty of determining exactly the placing of this ideal line, the point of departure of the measure- ment, increases still more the inexactness of the result. 57. Approximation. There is nothing surprising, conse- quently, in the fact that the difference between the results of two measurements taken on the same subject may rise to 2 milli- metres without being qualified as an error. There will be no mistake, properly speaking, save in a discrepancy of at least 3 millimetres. Being given the fact that the width of ear varies from one ear to another scarcely more than 10 millimetres, it can be seen how little assistance this measure affords in anthropometrical com- parisons. Its interest is purely descriptive. As the ear is a very important organ for identification, its width should appear in the anthropometrical signalment. It seemed preferable to avail ourselves of the fact that the operator had the rule in hand to dictate the width in figures, rather than by the always more or less uncertain qualifications of small, medium or large (i). (1) [But see Appendix C, p. 259]. CHAPTER III.— MEASUREMENTS TAKEN BY MEANS OF LARGE CALIPER RULE A. Foot. B. Fingers. C. Forearm. SECTION A. — MEASXJREMENT OF THE LEFT FOOT (plates 20 and 21 ) 1. Place the footstool T (see page 86, § i6, also plate i) opposite the middle of the trestle for the forearm, on the same side as the handle, at a distance of about 60 centimetres from it. For the names of the component parts of the large caliper-rule consult plate 4. First Stage 2. Have the subject take the position represented in plate 20, To do this easily, analyze each movement as you proceed, observing scrupulously the following instructions : 3. The operator gives the order : *'Place your left foot on the tracing," and when this is done, "I^ean your body forward;" then: "Put your right hand on the handle of the table;" and then only does he add : "Stand on the footstool on one foot only." 4. These commands, announced rigorously in the order given above, will in a few seconds make the most stupid individual place himself in the proper position. 5. The object of this position is to force the weight of the body to rest entirely on the left foot, which, being opposite the right hand of the operator, is more easily measured than the right foot would be. By making the subject lean his right hand on a point of support a little in front of him, the operator causes him to displace his centre of gravity in the same direction ; a move- ment which produces an automatic extension of the toes. 6. Before placing the instrument, the operator should assure himself that the toes are well in place and particularly that the (118) FOOT 119 great toe does not rest sideways on the stool, whicli would cause a deviation in its direction, and consequently a small diminu- tion in the length of the foot. It goes without saying that if it were bent, either voluntarily or involuntarily, the operator should correct its position himself, by taking hold of it with his fingers and straightening it out. 7. As a general thing, when the great toe is bent intentionally the operator will perceive it immediately by the position of the other toes, which follow involuntarily the movement of the great one, and THE wrinkled skin of which will strike one at the first glance. It is difiicult, however, for a subject to maintain this false position for more than a minute. To make the toe assume its natural position it would be sufl&cient, in case of suspected trick- er>% to slight!}' bend the knee which supports the weight of the body; this flexion will usually cause the extension of the other toes. 8. After ha\'ing verified the natural position of the body, of the foot, and particularly of the big toe, place the caliper-rule squarely, so that the fixed branch of the instrument may be exactly applied, with a very light pressure, against the back of the subject's heel and that the inner side of the heel and the joint of the big toe may touch the stem (plate 21). 9. In the case of very flat feet it frequently happens that the instep, instead of forming an arch, projects underneath and prevents the stem from touching at the same time the internal face of the heel and of the great toe. It is sufiicient in these cases to apply the instrument against this projection parallel to the position which it would occupy if the projection were absent. Second Stage 10. Bring down the movable branch gradually until it is in contact with the great toe. Exert a pressure with the right thumb on the first and second joints of the great toe, if there is reason to fear that the too brutal pushing of the slide has bent the toe anew or that the subject himself has voluntarily drawn up his toes. I20 ANTHROPOMETRIC AI. OBSERVATIONS 11. To facilitate the recoil movement of the slide, impart to the instru- ment a slight trepidation by gently shaking the extremity of the graduated stem %\nth the right hand ( i ) . Third and Last Stage 12. Before reading, replace and slightly tighten the instrument, which the bending of the knee or the shaking may have disarranged, and finally dictate the figure indicated. 13. Be careful when resting the finger on the great toe, as directed above, not to exert any pressure on the extremity of the nail, which would cause the flesh to project and increase the length unduly, but merel}' seek to flatten the two joints. Remarks on. the Measuring of the Left Foot The observ'ations to which the measuring of the foot give occa- sion relate to the four principal points following: 14. (i) Deviation of the great toe. The letter d written after the figure of the measure indicates that the great toe is deviated inwards, toward the other toes. This initial is followed by the number of millimetres by which it is estimated that this inclination may have diminished the length of the foot. Thus, the foot 24.6 — d. 3, indicates a foot of 24 CENTIMETRES, 6 3IILLIMETRES in length, which at some previous time, before being de\nated, would probably have meas- ured 24 CENTIMETRES, 9 MILLIMETRES. No matter how pronounced the deviation of the great toe may be supposed to be, the graduated stem of the instrument must always be placed parallel to the axis of the foot, taking no account of the direction of the toe, which will be so much the farther away from the stem in proportion as it is more deformed. 15. (2) Retraction of the great toe. The letters pi. (abbre- viation for Fr. plie, i. e. , bent, pliated), followed by the figures 2, 3, 4 (millimetres understood), correct approximately the diminution in length caused by an habitual retraction of the tendons of the great toe. (1) It is essential, in order that this recoil may be easily effected, for the stem of the instrument to be always clean, polished, and when necessary slightly oiled (see page 92, §46). FOOT 121 This infirmity, generally produced by the use of too short shoes, has received, when very pronounced, the characteristic name of hammer- shaped toe; but it is rarely met with in this degree on the great toe. In the latter case it might cause a diminution of the length of the foot by more than half a centimetre. 1 6. We cannot too strongly recommend that, before writing down pi., one should assure one's self, by making the subject bend his knee and by pressing down on the first joint, that the retrac- tion is not simulated or exaggerated. 17- (3) The projection of the second toe beyond the Jirst. The third indication regarding the foot to be noted in the margin relates to the case where the second toe is longer than the first. This peculiarity should be briefly noted by means of the sign > , employed in mathematics to express inequality ; this sign should be followed by the number of millimetres by which the second toe extends beyond the first. Example: jPoot 26.4 > 2 (3 or 4). This peculiarity of the second toe being longer than the first does not alter the mode of procedure in the measuring of the foot, while rendering it more circumstantial. The movable branch, instead of being brought to the tip of the great Toe, is stopped at the extremity of the second, which the Operator should be careful not to push back. 18. The notation >, besides constituting a peculiar mark, draws attention to a source of error which somewhat diminishes the precision of the result of the measuring. 19. (4) Total or partial amputation of the left foot. A dis- tinction must be made between total and partial, amputation. 20. If the amputation is total, the measurement of the left foot appears in its usual place, with the indication 000; and a refer- ence under the heading note gives: ist, the explanation of the peculiarity; and, 2nd, the length of the right foot. Example: Left foot amputated above the ankle; right = 25-4' 122 ANTHROPOMETRICAL OBSERVATIONS 2 1 . The method of procedure is the same in case of partial removal either of the toes or of the whole anterior part of the foot, with this difference, that the length of the left foot is recorded exactly as the instrument gives it. It goes without saying, that in cases of this kind there is no longer any occasion for the rigorous precision of ordinary meas- urements. The bending of the left knee, the pressure of the instrument, etc., are no longer necessary. Frequently the meas- urement will have to be taken with the subject in a sitting position. 22. If the cicatrization is recent, all measuring, even approxi- mative, should be postponed. A note under the observatioyis will explain these exceptional cases and cover the responsibility of the operator. That is a question of tact and common humanity on which it is unnecessary to insist. 23. The approximation allowed in the measuring of the foot is I millimetre MORE, and, in the cases pointed out as abnor- mal, 2 millimetres less than the true number, which, allowing for the doubling of the error, may cause a difference of 3 millimetres between two consecutive measurements of the same foot. Discrepancies such as this latter, while not, properly speaking, mistakes, always indicate a certain carelessness. SECTION B. LENGTH OE THE EINGERS I. Measurement of Left Middle Finger (plates 22 — 25) 24. The measuring of the middle finger or medius is effected by means of the small branches of the caliper-rule. This indica- tion is especially valuable, for the reason that it can be taken EXACTLY, TO WITHIN ONE MILLIMETRE at Icast. Moreover, it varies from one individual to another by nearly 3 centimetres, and it is physically impossible for the slightest deception to be practiced in connection with it. On the other hand, it requires a rather delicate handling, which is devised in such a manner as to leave nothing, so to speak, to ask of the subject. 25. The measurement to be taken is the length of the medius or middle finger of the left hand from its tip to the metacarpal articulation (or first joint), the finger being bent square with the back of the hand. The operation may be divided into three stages: FINGERS 123 First Stage (plate 22) 26. Rest the extremity of the large fixed branch of the caliper-rule obliquely against the stomach; stand face to face with the subject, grasp his left medius with the left hand and place it on the back of the caliper-rule, taking care that the end of the subject's medius rests well against the small fixed branch and that his other fingers, index (first), annular (third), and auricular (little) are not bent, but extend beyond the stem on each side. The precaution of having the other fingers project beyond the graduated stem facilitates greatly the following movements: 27. Confine the subject's medius on the stem by placing his fingers as shown in plate 25, to wit; the left thumb of the operator resting on the third joint of the subject's medius (to keep it in contact with the stem, and prevent it from bending outward) , while his other fingers exert a pressure on the wrist of the subject, in such a waj- as to bend the latter's hand at right angles, and to force the extremity of the medius to press against the heel of the small branch (i). With the right hand grasp the stem a little above the slide, in such a fashion as to push the latter forward i or 2 centimetres. In this situation, the medius presents itself in almost the correct position. Second Stage (plate 23) 28. Turn your body on itself one-quarter way round, retaining and carry- ing along the hand of the subject, who is told at the same time not to move. Compare in this connection the position of the operator in relation to the subject in the two opposite plates 22 and 23. See also plate 24, which is only a repetition, taken from a more elevated point of view, of the position represented in plate 23. 29. It results from this change of relative position that the subject's upper arm is drawn forward and brought into a direct line with his forearm, while his hand is bent at about a right angle in two consecutive places: ist, at the joint of the medius, with which it forms an angle rather less than 90 degrees; and 2nd, at the wrist, where the angle formed may be greater than a right angle. (1) If the nail of the finger should project beyond the flesh, the operator must cut it with a small pair of scissors. In certain special cases the head-warden may authorize the operator to omit the cutting of the nail; deduct then 1 or 2 millimetres, according to the length of the nail preserved, from the measure found and write the figure thus corrected in its ordinary place. A note referring from the finger to the obser\'ations should mention the exemption, andexplam its motive. 124 ANTHROPOMETRICAI, OBSERVATIONS 30. In this position, in which the extensor tendons of the subject's hand are stretched to their utmost, and the flexor ten- dons of the palm are bent, there are few hands, however callous they may be, the middle finger of which cannot be brought into a rectangular position. The operator assists in the straightening movement, continuing to support the third joint with his own thumb and to exert a pressure with his other fingers on the back of the subject's hand (plates 24 and 25). This double pressure, we repeat, has the four-fold result of supporting the end of the middle finger against the heel of the caliper; of preventing the third joint from separating from the stem; of maintaining the position of the medius at right angles to the back of the hand; and of bringing the back of the first phalanx of the medius, and particularly the first joint, into contact with the back of the stem of the caliper. If necessary, to obtain this indispensable contact, the operator displaces, or raises, or lowers, or turns a little, the stem wedged against his chest: "If the finger does not come to the stem, the stem must go to the finger." The operator should be careful, moreover, in order to give ease to his movements, and especially to keep his subject motionless and prevent him following him in his quarter-turn, to elevate the left elbow considerably. Third and Last Stage 31. Push the slide down with a rather quick movement of the right hand, exert a shght pressure, and read the graduation before letting go of the subject's hand. 32. When the slide stops exactly between two millimetres, the operator should decide in favor of the larger or smaller number according to secondary considerations left to his own discretion. Another alternative is to repeat the measurement. It is seldom that a second trial will not come closer to one of the two milli- metres than to the other, which of course brings all hesitation to an end. 33. Approximation. Refer to the corresponding paragraph on the length of the head (page 109, § 15). The degree of pre- cision to be attained in the measuring of the medius is determined by the same figures and is subject to the same remarks as the taking of the cranial diameters (a half millimetre, either plus or minus). FINGERS 125 II. Measurement of Left Little Finger (plates 26 and 27; 34. For the measurement of the left auricular or little finger, proceed in the same manner as for that of the middle finger. 35. The measuring of this finger is, however, a httle more deHcate than that of the medius. Thus it is often rather difficult to separate sufficient!}- the first articulation of the httle finger from the corresponding and more prominent articulation of the annular (third finger), which has a tendency to press against the small branch of the rule, and might thus increase unduly the sought- for length by one millimetre. To avoid this error, be careful to always wedge the subject's auricular upward, as closely as possible to the upper edge of the stem of the caliper, instead of midway between the two edges as in the measuring of the medius. It is principally for facilitating this isolation of the articulation of the auricular that the corners of the small branches of the instrument have been hollowed out. Remarks Applying to the Measurement of Both Fingers 36. I St, Ankylosis. The principal obser^-ation to be made regarding the measurement of the middle and auricular fingers bears on the more or less complete ankylosis (stiffening) of the joints. In the case of complete ankylosis, a distinction must be made between rectilixkar ankylosis, which can in no wa}^ affect the result of the measurement, and right-axgled ankylosis. We will not speak of the intermediate ankylosis, called obtuse- angled, as it is very rarely met with in the complete state. 37. When the complete ankylosis compels the finger to remain entirel}'' bent (right-angled ankylosis) , the figure of the measure- ment is scarcely greater than that which would be obtained by measuring the first phalanx by itself. It must be recorded just as it is given by the instrument, and the following reference made under the heading xoTE: right-angled ankylosis of the joints, specif 3nng by their numbers the articulations affected , and adding the length of the right medius or auricular. 38. But the most frequent cause of error for the fingers arises from incomplete ankylosis, or rather from a slight induration of the joints which, in manual workers, especially blacksmiths 126 ANTHROPOMETRIC AL OBSERVATIONS and common laborers, sometimes prevents a completely rectilinear extension of the fingers of the hand. The method of procedure in such cases is similar to that in the the case of bent toes (see page 120, § 15); the measurement of the left finger is taken as exactly as possible and recorded in its usual place, while the ankylosis is indicated after the dictated figure by means of the letter k (which takes the place of pi. for the toe), followed by the approximate number of millimetres which this peculiarity has taken off from the real length of the finger. These figures vary between 2, 3 and 4 millimetres, rarely more. It would be useless in this latter case to note separately the measure of the corresponding member of the right hand, this kind of induration, when it occurs, generally being common to both hands. 39. 2nd, Par'tial or total amputation. When one or more phalanges of the two fingers to be measured have been amputated, the length of the remainder of the member is indicated in the usual place, and there is added in a note: First, the explanation of the peculiarit}' ; Second, the length of the corresponding finger of the right hand. Example: I^eft medins, two last phalanges am- putated, the right = 12.3. Exceptionally small lengths occasioned by surgical operations are indications too valuable, from the point of view of anthropo- metric classification, to be rejected when they appear. SECTION C MEASUREMENT OF THE LEFT FOREARM (plates 28 to 30 b) 40. The operator, keeping in his hand the caliper with which he has just measured the middle and auricular fingers, and leaving the subject on the side of the trestle-table where the handle and the foot- stool are, goes and takes up his own position on the other side of the table. 41. Before speaking to his subject, he places his caliper, open to the fullest extent, on the trestle-table, \he. fixed branch at his right, the graduated stem turned away from him parallel to the FOREARM 127 Other side of the table. In this way the tracing of the forearm on the upper surface of the table (see pp. 86-87) appears in its entirety loosely enclosed between the branches of the caliper (plate 29). First Stage 42. These arrangements made, he invites his subject to place bis left forearm on the outline. As soon as this direction has been obeyed, the operator adjusts the fore- arm parallel to the edge of the table, places the middle finger in the same direction and, if necessarj^, pushes back the whole forearm until the index finger rests directly on the edge of the table next the subject, and the thumb, disengaged from the other fingers, projects outward (plate 29). In brief, in this position the extremity of the medius, its first joint, the middle of the wrist and the projecting extremity of the elbow should all lie in a right line, parallel to the edge of the table. 43. Then, holding his subject's wrist immovable with the left hand, the operator orders him to advance his shoulder and bend his body for- ward, and guides this movement, if necessary, by means of the right hand, until his subject's upper arm forms with the forearm an acute angle approximately equal to half a right angle (plate 28). 44. But it is seldom that this movement of advancing the shoulder does not disturb the correctness of the position which the subject has assumed; the elbow especially, drawn by the shoulder, is apt to rise slightly from the table. So the operator will almost alwaj'S have to press it down again and, in general, re-establish the positions of paragraph 42, before proceding to the second stage. Second Stage ( plate 30 a ) 45. Gently move the caliper from right to left, parallel with the edge of the table, until the fixed branch comes into contact -with the extremity of the elbow; then bring down the movable branch with the left hand until it presses against the tip of the finger. 46. In this position the instrument indicates nearly the true length. Nevertheless, in order to guard against any possible tricker>% resulting particularly from the cur\'ature of the wrist or the bending of the fingers, the operator should execute the follow- ing movements before reading the indication of the apparatus: 128 ANTHROPOMETRICAL OBSERVATIONS Third mid Last Stage (plate 30 b) 47. Flatten the back of the subject's hand, especially at the wrist, by means of the right hand placed as represented in the dratving, to-wit: the extended thumb pressing on the back of the subject's hand and on the first joint of his middle finger, while the four other fingers pass over the wrist and grasp the edge of the table. Meanwhile the left hand draws the end of the stem from right to left, in order to keep the fixed branch in close contact with the elbow, and at the same time the left thumb, remaining free, exercises a moderate pressure on the thumb-rest. Then the operator, his eyes fixed on the graduation, lets go the slide for a moment so that it may slip backwards if the pressure against the fingers has been too strong. And then only, if the position continues to remain correct and no dis- placement occurs, the operator dictates the indication of the instrument. Remarks on the Measuring of the Forearm 48. The mistake most frequently made in measuring the fore- arm consists in not having the upper arm sufficiently bent in rela- tion to the forearm. The use of the trestle- table, now adopted, has greatly facilitated the correct accomplishment of this movement. 49. Attempts at trickery will generally be repressed by the manoeuvres prescribed for the first, and above all for the third stage. If, nevertheless, by reason of some pretended muscular resistance, the aim of these manoeuvres, which is to obtain a complete adherence of the lower surface of the wrist and fingers to the table, is not attained, the operator will still have the recourse, after a first measurement with doubtful results, of lift- ing the subject's hand and bending it strongly at the wrist, afterwards replacing it quickly on the table by means of a vigorous and SUDDEN pressure, while with his left hand he readjusts and holds the caliper as prescribed in the third stage. These move- ments should be executed rapidly enough to surprise the subject, and should be immediately followed by the reading of the graduation We would add, moreover, that in the case of the forearm even the most adroit attempts at deception are always easily discovered, and can diminish the true length only by a few millimetres. So their most certain result is to draw the attention of the operator to the subjects who are guilty of them, and cause them to be sus- pected of concealment of identity. FOREARM 129 50. Whenever an attempt of this kind is suspected, care should be taken to inscribe after the figures of the measurement the letters tr., followed by the number of millimetres by which the dimension is supposed to have been thus altered. 51. It is unnecessary to repeat the observations already made on occasion of the middle finger, and which apply equally to the forearm (ankylosis, amputation of one or more fingers, etc.). 52. Outside of these cases, the most frequent obstacle to the correct measurement of this length is the more or less complete ankylosis of the elbow. Under such circumstances act as has been indicated previously for the foot, the finger, etc. : measure the member as it actually appears, and give under the heading NOTE the corresponding length for the other side of the body. 53. Finally, the frequent cases of compound or simple frac- ture of the bones of the forearm should be recorded, whenever known, as they sometimes cause a very considerable diminution in the length. They may be detected either by a deviation of the axis of the hand in relation to the line of the wrist- joint, or by the presence of a bony swelling, hidden b}^ the flesh but perceptible to the touch, which results from the overlapping of the bones at the point of .the fracture. Take care in such cases to append the measurement of the right member to the length obtained on the left. 54. The degree of approximation tolerated in the measuring of the forearm is 2 millimetres below the true number and only i above it, allowing for the corrections indicated by the letters k and tr. So the total difference between two lengths of the forearm, measured on the same subject, may amount to 3 millimetres. Nevertheless so great a discrepancy ought incontestibly to be qualified as an error, and even as a grave error, if, in place of a diminution of length, it would seem to reveal an increase, in the case of subjects more than twenty-one years old. SECOND PART DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION CHAPTER I.— CHROMATIC CHARACTERS A. Color of the eye. B. Shades of the beard and hair. C. Complexion. SECTION A.— NOTATION OF THE COLOR OF LEFT EYE I. — General Obsen'ations 1 . No character presents at the same time more immutability in the individual and more variability from one person to another. The rigorous classification of which its description is susceptible gives it a signaletic value equal to that of the best measurements, while the impossibility of the subject's altering it in the least, and the facility with which the experienced observ^er can distinguish the shade, without the aid of an instrument, impro^nphi, on the public street, make it the best of descriptive indications. If the importance of the color of the eye from the signaletic point of view has not hitherto been more generally appreciated, this should be attributed to the absence of a rational notation and to the confusion which thence resulted. 2. The analytical method that we are to set forth here has been tested for ten years. If some, at first sight, have found it difl&cult and complicated, on the other hand numerous agents of the penitentiary administration have succeeded in mastering it perfectly, without any oral teaching, merely by the studj' of the theoretical instructions which had previously been sent to them. The chromotypographical plate which accompanies this new edition will remove every difl&culty, C130) COLOR OF EYE 131 3. The confusiou that is remarked in the popular designation of the color of the eyes arises largely from the great influence which the direction and intensity of the light exercise upon their apparent hue. Thus, for instance, a deep slate-blue eye obser\'ed in a counter-light, and at a distance of some metres, will appear black as a result of the contrast between the dark shade of the iris and' what is called the white of the eye. 4. The grey eye of the public at large is generally only a blue one with a more or less yellowish tinge, which appears grey solely on account of the shadow cast by the eyebrows, etc. There is nothing more inexact, more vague, than the designa- tion ^r/ applied in daily practice to more than three- fourths of the eyes. Strictly speaking, the grey tint is a mixture of white and black, the complete scale of which extends from black to white. As an example of grey we may take the spot left on white paper by a touch with a black crayon spread by means of a stump, or a wash of India ink on a white ground. Never does a human eye, observed under good conditions, present tones of this kind. The center of the eye, or pupil, is a small circle neces- sarily black; in regard to the circular band which encloses it, called the iris, it always has a colored ground and could not, therefore, be qualified as^r^. 5. These so-called grey eyes are generally of a light tone. However, the public sometimes applies the same word to a certain dark blue eye, also called steel-grey, and which we designate by the term slaie-bliie for the deep tones, and violet i?itermediate-bliie for the light tones. The word grey should be used to designate the color of the eye only in certain special cases, of which we shall speak further on (see p. 134, note). 6. The eyes commonly called black also demand some expla- nation. There are no more black irises than there are truly grey ones. The eyes thus designated are generally deep maroon ones, and sometimes deep slate-blue. 7 The epithet brown is frequently applied also to eyes that we term tnedi^un maroon or dark maroon, the same that others sometimes call black. 132 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 8. All the other adjectives in use for the designa- tion of the color of the eye participate in the same confusion and should be forgotten by the reader at the outset of this study. 9. To analj'ze the color of the iris in a uniform manner, the observer's first care will be to place himself opposite his sub- ject at about 30 centimetres from him, and witli his back to the light, in such wise that a strong light ( but not the rays of the sun) may fall full on the eye to be examined; then he will ask the subject to look him straight in the eye, at the same time slightly lifting the middle of the latter 's left eyelid (fig. 24). 10. If the measuring- room were lighted from above, and at the same time the observer should happen to be of small stat- ure, he would have to make the subjects sit down before proceeding to the obser\'a- tion of the color of their eye. It is indispens- able, indeed, in order that the descriptions may be susceptible of accurate comparison, that the observer's glance should plunge into the eye of the subject in the same direc- tion as the light falls on it. ujjo lAjPe^ Fig. 24. Examination of the color of the left iris. 1 1 . The same rule of lighting should be obser\^ed in the study of the large chromotypographical table of the shades of the human iris which is annexed to these instructions (i). COI,OR OF EYE 133 12. Owing to the necessity of examining the iris only under a hght coming from a certain direction, with the subject either seated or standing, the order and time of the making of this observation must vary according to the arrangement of the measuring-room. In one place the examination will be made according to the order of the headings, immediately after the forearm; in another, in a special corner, after all the rest of the signaletic process has been completed. In very w^ell lighted places advantage may be taken of the sitting position of the subject to observe the color of- the eye immediately after the measuring of the diameters of the ear, etc. In certain JDrisons, finally, this operation will have to be postponed till after the sitting, and be performed in the j-ard on all the subjects at one time. The location of the headings for the eye on the anthropome- trical card also necessitates some explanations. In fact, although this feature belongs to the descriptive part of the signalment, it has seemed preferable, from a typographical point of view, as well as from that of the classification, to place it on a line with the anthropometrical observations. 1 3. When closely and scrupulously examined , it sometimes hap- pens that there appear noteworthy differences in color and shade (1) The observer who wishes to make use of this table should, therefore, look at each 'wis '\-a.\\. separately, perpendicularly to its surface, at a distance of about 15 to 25 centi- metres, with his back turned to the light but not casting- a shadow on the plate. The eyes presented, to which we shall revert in the text of these Instructions, will be indi- cated by the letters of the alphabetical series. A, B, C, D, etc., which appear above each vertical column, accompanied in the explanation by the number of the horizontal tier, 1, 2 or 3; number 1 denoting the upper row, which corresponds to the light series, and number 3 the lower or dark series. Thus the eye F- will indicate the eye with a chestnut sector which occurs in the second row of column F; in the same way "K} will refer to the iris which is found in the 4th class (chestnut pigmentation), just beneath the point of the bracket, and which is distinguished from all others by its serial numbers (4-5-6-3), etc. Any unprofessional persons who, without having the time to make themselves masters of our descriptive method, might chance to have occasion to observe the color of an eye, could resort to the same conventional method of notation and say, for example, in speaking of the eye of such and such a subject, that it is identical ■with or similar to No. D-, of the table, or again that it is intermediate between Nos. H- and G^, etc. The plate does not pretend, however, to offer a specimen of all the combinations of shades, infinite in number, that it is possible to observe in the human iris, but only facsimiles, to the number of two or three for each class, of the most frequent ej'es. The others correspond to cases presenting some difficulties of classification. It is, for example, intentionally incomplete as regards the lishi unpigmented eyes. Hence it is not rare to meet with eyes much more azure, transparent or pale (that is to say whiter) than the three first of the 1st horizontal tier (A', B', C) but as irises of this kind offer no difficulty of interpretation, and should evidently be ranged farther to the left in this same class 1, it has seemed preferable not to add them to the 54 types already represented. 134 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION between the right iris and the left. So it is recommended to base the observation on the left e3^e alone, which is opposite the right hand of the operator. The only exception to this rule is when the eye is injured in a permanent manner by a film or an inflamma- tion, or when the orbit is empty, while the right remains normal. 14. The observer should commence to make written state- ments only after having examined under the conditions prescribed in paragraph 9 the eyes of a certain number of individuals, and become thoroughly familiar with the principles of the method of notation hereinafter prescribed. II. Analysis of the Parts of the Eye 15, The round or apple of the eye is composed, as we have said, of a black central circle, called \h& pupil (fig. 25, No. 8), and a circular colored band, called the iris (fig. 25, No, 9). When the color of an e^^e is spoken of, it is necessarily the iris that is meant; the healthy and normal pupil being perfectly black in the lightest e^^es as well as in the darkest. 19. There are dis- tinguished in the iris 3. Left upper eyelid; 4, Left lower eyelid ; 5. Inner point twO principal ZOUeS the of left eye and lachrj-mal caruncle; 6, Outer point of . left eye; 7, Sclerotic, or white of the eye; 8, Pupil; Coloration of wllich is ^' ■^"^- generalh' different : I St, the areola (i), which borders the pupil; 2nd. the periphery or external zone (that is, the part of the iris nearest the white of the ej^e). Fig. 25. Designation of the parts of the eye. (1) Do not confound the areola with the more or less grey pupillary zone less than a millimetre wide that is often observed, principally in light eyes, immediately around the pupil. The areola, in the sense in which we understand it, generally covers nearly a third of the whole iris. See as an example of the pupillaiy zone the eyes A^, (the first in the upper left hand corner of the plate) and C^ (column C, 2nd horizontal tier). COI.OR OF EVE 135 17. The more or less orange-yellow matter which is observed in the majority of eyes when one examines them under the condi- tions of lighting prescribed above, is designated under the name of pigment of the eye. The more abundant this pigment is in the eye, the darker the latter will appear and the nearer to the type that we call maroon. III. Principles of Classification 18. The basis of the notation rests on this point, that there are in the human species only two fundamental types of eyes : the unpigmented eyes and the pure maroon eyes; and that all the other hues should be regarded as intermediate between these two extremes. 19. We understand by zinpigmented eyes the eyes which, when examined close at hand, in conformity with the instructions of paragraph 9, appear to be devoid of orange-yellow matter; their shade is azure, slaty or intermediate between these two tones. This is the blue eye of the populations of northern Europe. They are represented in the first vertical column (A) of the chromatic table of the iris. 20. The hue of the/»z^r^ maroon eyes is uniform and recalls the shell of the fruit of this name (the large French or Italian chestnut) when it is ripe and fresh and its envelope still clean and shining. It is the black or dark brown eye of common par- lance, the eye of the Arab, of the negro, of southerners in general. The tone of eyes of this class is more or less deep, more or less light, but its general aspect is much more uniform than that of the series of unpigmented eyes. (Compare from this point of view the first column of the chromatic table with the three last columns. ) 21. As to the eyes of composite shades, which comprise three- quarters of the eyes of Europeans, most of them approach either the unpigmented eye (azure or slaty), or the maroon eye. It is the variations that are observed in the intensity of their orange- yellow pigmentation which serve as the basis of their denomination and consequent classification. 136 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 22. Scale of pigmentation. — In the very great majority of cases the orange-yellow pigment is grouped in a circle or areola around the pupil, and sometimes in dots, little triangular spots, or circular crescents, in the outer zone. 23. The four varieties of pigmentation which ser^^e for the notation and classification of the intermediary eyes have received the names of yellow, ora7ige, chestnnt and maroon. It is impor- tant to understand the signification of these terms. 24. The yellow pigment is near enough either to pulverized sulphur or to naples-yellow (pale quality), or even to chrome- yellow and straw color. 25. The orange is reproduced exactly, not by the skin of the fruit of that name, but by what is called in painting yellow-ochre. The exact term would ho. yellow-orange. 26. The <:/zi?^/?zz' much nearer to that of the greeiiish-viaroon eyes than to that of the chestnut eyes (see Nos. M^ and N^ ). 57. As for the eyes pigmented with pure chestnut, thej^ are, so to speak, never observed without a mixture of greenish (see the eye K^ already mentioned, also L^ ). COLOR OF EYE 145 58. We repeat, moreover, that in such cases the observer is more than e\^r urged to protect himself by indicating the possible limits, which he expresses by a DOUBLE OR TRIPLE CLASS NUMBER. Moreover, if he believes it necessary to depart from the ordinary numeration of the pigment, he should indicate that this is intentional on his part, and not the result of an error, by underlining the class number which is thus modified in its application. Furthermore, he wall do wisely, so long as his competency as an anthropometrist is not recognized, to make an explanatory note of it under the heading of peculiari- ties or miscellaneous information. It is needless to say how rarely he should have to resort to this. VI. Peculiarities 59. The peculiarities and anomalies presented by the iris should be written on the fourth line, under the corresponding heading, or under No. Ill of the peculiar marks of the face. 60. The expression troilty, which is applied to the blue as well as to the maroon eyes, ser\^es to designate certain reddish spots, also termed Jire spots, which resemble the speckles of the trout. These spots do not modify the classification of an eye, and intervene in its denomination only as a peculiar mark. Thus the eyes slate-blue trouty and azure-blue trouty are to be classified in class I (unpigmented ej'es) if apart from these spots the iris con- tains no yellow (see, for example, H- of the chromatic table, which however is not a very clear case). 61. Certain irises present, either on the right side or the left, clearly cut segments of a different color, generally darker than the rest; this is described by the formula: chestnut sector, left iris (or right). (SeeF^, already mentioned. ) 62. There will also be noted on the fourth line the frequent presence in old men of the pearly [nacreous, Fr. Jiacrel^ circle, also called senile circle, which, partially concealing the periphery, renders the obser\^ation of the eye more difl&cult, especially as regards the distinction of the three maroon classes (see the eye R2). 63. Finally we have seen that the presence of the concentric greyish zone, when very pronounced, ishould also be mentioned on the fomth line (see note, p. 134, and the iris A^ in the table). 146 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 64. When the shade of the left eye differs notably from that of the right, the first is written in its proper place and the second in the remarks. This is the anomal}^ popularly called in France vairons (from the I^atin varius, varied). [The equivalent English expression is odd-eyed.'] The same course will be pursued regard- ing such references as: light (or heavy) £lni on left eye (or right), etc. 65. In the case of one-eyed persons, distinguish between the expression: blind in the right (or left) eye, which impHes only deprivation of sight, and that of : right (or left) eye missing, or, still better, amputated, which signifies that the socket is empty. 66. In case of subjects one of whose eyes has been amputated, note in the miscellayieoics inforviation whether they wear a glass eye. VII. Abbreviations — Final Summary 67. The space left on the cards for the inscription of the color of the eye being very limited, we have been compelled to adopt a certain number of abbreviations, of which the following is a list, and the use of which is obligatory. Form of the areola (optional indi- < cation ) Quality of the pigment Tone of the shade Fundamental shade of the periphery — . areola absent or almost imperceptible. d. dentilated. e. concentric. r. radiating. d.-e. dentilated-concentric, etc. J. yellow (Pr.jaiwe, cota-parejaufidiced). or. orange. cb. chestnut. mar. maroon. cl. hght ( or clear). m. medium. /. deep {'Pr./oJtcS). az. azure. i. intermediate (\4olet). ard. slaty (Fr. ardoisee). V. greenish ( or verd, Fr. verddtre). id. (Latin idem, the same) indicates that the pigmentation of the peri- phery is of the same shade as that of the areola. COI,OR OF EYE 147 68. To SUM UP, the descriptive formulae for the colors of the iris are composed of four lines: (i) Class number. (2) Areola: form, shade, and tone of pigmentation. (3) Periphery: proportion of the surface covered, shade and tone. (4) Pecicliarities and anomalies of the eye. Example: 4-3 c. cb. m. i. V. cl. I St. The CLASS NUMBKRS express by their single, double or sometimes triple figure the degree of certainty of the observ^ation. 2nd. The description of the areola, when its form is noted, begins with one of the letters d., c. or r.; next comes the obligatory indication of the pigmentation: pale, j., or., cb., or mar., itself followed by the letters cl., m., or /. 3rd. The PERIPHERY in the first three classes is az., i., or ard., more or less verd {v), with or without pigment, the whole followed by the letters cl., m. or /. After the fourth class there is almost always occasion to mention the presence in the periphery of pigment, either j. or or. In the 7th class, the shade is tiniformly mar. from the areola to the periphery, and the line for this latter contains only the sign id. We find an analo- gous condition in the unpigmented ej^es of the ist class when, the iris being uniformly blue, the areola unprovided with pale filaments cannot be distinguished from the peripheric zone: the emplacement of the absent areola is then represented by a dash ( — ) and the letters az., i., or ard. appear alone on the third line. (Compare from this point of view the notation of irises in column A with that in column B. ) 4th. The fourth line, that of pecltliarities, remains unoccu- pied in the great majority" of cases. SECTION B. NOTATION OF THE COLOR OF THE HAIR AND BEARD 69. The various shades of the beard and hair are more easily arranged in a series than the colors of the eye. 70. The two opposite terms in the scale are on the one hand the very light blonde, and on the other the pure black, which 148 DESCRIPTn^E INFORMATION might be designated by the expression }-aven black. Between these two extremes all the successive gradations of the chestnut tones are placed. The complete scale is as follows, the red hair left aside: albino blonde and very light blonde, light blonde, sometimes light tow- Blonde < color or ffaxen. medium blonde, deep blonde. {light chestnut, medium chestnut, deep chestnut, chestnut-black, pure black. 71. It is important to distinguish the pure black, or raven black, from chestnut-black, which corresponds, in France, to most heads of hair popularly called simply black or dark brown. Pure black is not common in France, but, on the contrary, it is the classic color of Spanish hair. Deep chestnut preser\-es its usual meaning. Hair of this shade, without being chestnut-black, is near enough to this hue to some- times be confused with it, especially by artificial light. Medium chestnut and light chestnut are each one step lighter. The distinction between light chestnut and deep blo7ide is delicate. Thus one is often led to describe the same shade as deep blonde in a woman, which in a man he would have termed light chestnut. Medium blonde and light blonde nead no definition. The expression very light blonde will be employed occasionally for the designation of the exceptionally fair hair met with among the populations of northern Europe. We would mention also the albino blonde, which is a pathological case. 72. 7?(f^ beards and hair, which could have no place in the above series, are described according to their shade by the expres- sions: mahogany red (or bright red): light, medium or deep, blonde red: light, medium or deep, chestnut-red: light, medium or deep. 74. The expression fire-red should be avoided, as it might be interpreted to mean deep red. COI,OR OF HAIR AND BEARD 149 74. In the combinations of red, either with blonde or chestnut, the observer has the resource of underhning or putting in paren- thesis one of the two component terms, according to the predomi- nance of one or the other shade, by analogy with the "directions regarding the color of the eyes (see p, 139, §42). 75. Finalh', to each of the preceding categories the qualifica- tion turning grey may be added, which also may be underlined or placed in parenthesis, to express the mixture, in various pro- portions, of the white and colored hair. 76. It will be seen that we have excluded from this vocabu- lary the word brown (Fr. , brim, dark) the significance of which is always vague. The hair spoken of as brown generally corre- sponds to deep chestnut or chestnut-black, but the same expression applied to the beard often denotes a mixture of black hair with deep chestniit-red hair. Finally, in painting, the word brown is applied to the color of the deep chestnut verging on black, and in general to every color very much toned down with black. 77. The meaning of dark (Fr. , briin, compare brunette') in the description of persons is never very definite except where it is employed as the opposite of blonde. It is then a synthetic term, which signifies the union in a single individual of deep chestnut or chestnut- black hair, dark eyes, and a more or less pale or swarthy complexion. 78. The exact indication of the shade of the beard would often necessitate a special notation for the various parts; inustache, side- whiskers (Fr. , favoris) and chin-whiskers (Fr. , barbiche). So the rule is to give preference to the mustache. Even in proceed- ing thus, many beards will be met whose uncertain shade, result- ing from the mixture of hair of various hues, can only be expressed by formulae of this kind: mediiim Monde beard strongly mixed with red, blonde mustache with chestnut whis- kers mixed with red, etc. 79. JVote. As regards the nature, the abundance and the different kinds of implantation of the hairy system, see, in the chapter on characteristic features, pages 187 for the hair and 189 for the beard. List 0/ Special Terms, with Their Abbreviations blonde hi. turning grey {'Pr. grisonnant) grs. chestnut cb. bright {or vivid) vif. black noir light (or clear) cl. 150 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION SECTION C COLORATION OF SKIN, AND ETHNIC INDICATIONS 80. In the notation of the shade of the cojnplexion, a distinction will be made between the pigmentary coloration and the sanguineous coloration. The first term refers only to the variation of the brownish-yel- low matter which colors more or less abundantly the skin of all human beings, even of those of the white race; and the second to the greater or less amount of blood which the transparency of the skin allows to be perceived. 8 1 . Each of these headings will be answered by one of the qualifications little, medium or great, w^hich are represented by means of the abbreviations p., m. or g. (i) Thus the sxvarthy complexion often remarked in the Arab should be described as: ( PIGMENTARY ^TCat , . Coloration \ ,.>>7 (or even none). / SANGUINEOUS little ■U'hile the sanguine ox fiorid complexion is described by: PIGMENTARY little Coloration ^ ^ u. I SANGUINEOUS great 82, There should be indicated in more detail in the paragraph on characteristic features the abnormal colorations which might seem to be oi pathological origin, such as the bilious complex- ion, ihe jaundiced and bloodless or anaemic complexion, sanguinary eruptions of the face, acne, pimples, or even a mere sunburn or freckles, etc. The question of complexion plays the principal role in what are called good or bad looks. (1) We shall have occasion to see in the following- pages how numerous are the headings which permit of the ts'pical answer] \s'mall\ \ '■"^'^'""' ; ^arse] /(I'O^tof a total of 31). To facilitate the task of the obser\-er the signaletic cards printed [in the French Gov- ernment Printing Ofl5ce at] at Melun (form of 1S93) distinguish by a capital initial the headings which should be answered by one of the preceding adjectives of dimension, ■while the initials of the other headings are printed in letters of the same kind as the rest of the work, that is, in small letters. Compare, for example, in this respect, the typographical reproduction of the headings: {^|F^:::::: coWion jPi^-entary. Sanguineous The following mnemonic phrase sums up the practical application of this arrange- ment: "to ever>' descriptive heading beginning with a letter of dimension (that is to say a capital) answer by one of the qualifications of dimension: little, medium, ot g}-eat." COLORATION OF SKIN I5I 83. When the peculiarity of coloration is connected with the ethnic or race origin, this latter indication then becomes the pri- mary element of the whole descriptive signalment, and should be placed by itself on the dotted line which precedes the heading of the descriptive information(i). Examples: pure negro, negro greatly (or slightly) crossed, Chinese, Japanese, cross of Kanaka and European, etc. (I) This space has been recently added at the request of the English officials charged with the application of the anthropometrical signalment in India. CHAPTER II. MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS HAVING SPECIAL HEADINGS ON THE SIGNALETIC CARD A. Forehead. B. Nose. C. Ear. D. Build (breadth and girth). SECTION A.— Di;SCRIPTlON OF THE SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF FOREHEAD (plates 31 and 32) 1. The forehead is examined from the point of view: ist, of the degree of pro^ninence of the superciliary arches ( i ) ; 2nd, of the degree of inclination of the line of its profile in relation to an imag- inary horizontal plane passing through the root of the nose; 3rd, of the height of the upper extremity of this same line above the same plane; 4th, of its width measured transversely from temple to temple. 2. As in the case of all the characters susceptible of being measured that we are to examine in the course of the two following chapters, the heading arches is answered by one of the adjectives, small [or little'], medium or large [or great] . 3. The inclination of the frontal line, compared among differ- ent individuals, varies between two extremes and might be simi- larly qualified as little^ medium or great. Nevertheless, to avoid any misinterpretation, the customary equivalent terms are used: receding (Fr. fuyant), intermediate and vertical (plate 31, ist row), to which there may be added, in extreme cases, at the beginning, very receding and, at the end, prominent. The latter will itself be replaced by the synthetic toxm. bulging (Fr. (1) Superciliary arches (or arcades) is the name grfven to the bony ridge which ser\'es as a support to the eyebrows. From an anatomical point of view the superciliary arches form a constituent part of the frontal bone, and their description could not be separated from that of the forehead, while the eyebrows belong to the hairy system (hair of the body, head, beard, etc.), which has been mentioned in the chapter on chromatic charac- ters, and to the value of which we will return more especially when analyzing the complementary characteristic features of the face. (152) FOREHEAD 1 53 bombe) in cases where the verticalness of the forehead is combined with a certain rounding outward of the frontal bosses (plate 32, No. 2). The complete series presents itself under this form: very receding-receding-intermediate-vertical- \ Prominent or I bulging. 4. The two headings of dimension, height and ividth, like all the similar descriptive headings, without exception, are answered by the typical seriation already mentioned: very little — little — medium — great — very great (plate 31, Nos. 4 to 9^ 5. Of course the receding foreheads are nearh^ always accom- panied, or, more exactl}^, produced, by a great prominence of the superciliary arches, and the upright foreheads by a smallness of the same parts. So it is not so much the intrinsic, anatomical, volume of the superciliary arches which the heading in question has in view as the projection, the very characteristic protuber- ance, which great numbers of foreheads present when the ej-e of the observer passes downwards along the frontal profile (see for a type of very laj-ge arches, plate 32, No. i. Other specimens in plate 31 are: Nos. 2 and 5, .y»za// arches; Nos. i and 6, viedittvi arches; No. 4, large arches. See also plate 33: Nos. i, 2 and 3, small arches; Nos. 4 and 5, viediiim arches; Nos. 6, 7 and 8, large arches, and No. 9, medium arch). 6. In certain cases it will be advantageous to distinguish be- tween the promi7ience of the arches, which, as we have said, are directly above the eyebrows, and that of 'Cas^ frontal sinuses, which, when they are much developed, appear as a kind of osseous swell- ing on the median line above the head of the superciliary arches. (Compare from this point of \new Nos. i and 3 in plate 32.) The simplest way of noting this peculiarity is to cancel the heading arc. on the card, and to replace it by the word siuiis followed by the letter g., the abbreviation for large [or great, Vr.graJid'l . 7. Among the peculiarities there should be noted the rather infrequent cases where the profile of the forehead, without being bulging, properly speaking (as this qualification implies vertical- ness), nevertheless describes a pronounced cur\-e. This charac- ter generally results, as maj' easil}' be seen, from the effacement of the superciliary arches combined, in a receding forehead, with a certain prominence of the frontal bosses (plate 32, No. 4). 154 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION SECTION B. DESCRIPTION OF THE SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE NOSE 8. The nose is the organ which, in man, contributes most to give to each face its individual character. 9. Its varieties, ist, in shape, and 2nd, in dimejision, present a great number of combinations, which current language has reduced into three or four t3'pes easy to recognize when their characters are well defined. Unfortunately the intermediate forms, much more frequent than the typical ones, enter with difl&culty into these divisions. The method of description hereafter presented permits, on the contrary, a rigorous definition of all imaginable cases. I. Shape of the Nose TO. Let us in the first place say a few words on the parts of which the nose is composed. The root of the nose is that transverse con- cavity, A, more or less accentuated, which always exists at the top of the nose, between the eyes and beneath the base of the forehead, The upper part of the nose is hard and bony; it has a true skeleton formed by the nasal bones. The wings of the nose are its two lateral portions, which are limited below by the two openings of the nostrils and separated from the cheek by a groove more or less Pis- 26. rounded and more or less pronounced. The tip of the fiose, B, is the point where the lobule begins to turn back upon itself. The ridge of the nose is the line of its profile, A B, from the root to the point. The lower edge or base of the nose extends from the tip, B, to the point of attachment, C, of the nostril to the cheek. 11. In the profile of the nose there are distinguished: (i) the concavity of the root; (2) the general form of the ridge of the nose; (3) Xhe iyiclinatiofi of thebase. 12. I St. Concavity of the root of the nose. This heading is answered by means of the words: very small — small — Wiedium. — large — very large, according to the size, that is, the DEPTH, of the depression formed by the profile of the root of the nose between the two neighboring parts, the forehead and the ridge of the nose (plate 32, Nos. 5 and 6). NOSE 155 13. 2nd, General shape of the ridge of the nose. Every form of ridge of the nose when seen in profile attaches itself to one of r convexy the three types: cave (i); rectilinear ; X or ( humped. In the [conjcave form, the upper part, which corresponds to the nasal bone, descends more or less obliquely in almost a straight line; then the lower part, which corresponds to the tip of the nose, projects outward in such a way that the line as a whole presents on the profile a \con]cave shape (plate 33, Nos. I, 2, and 3). In the rectilinear form, the ridge of the nose descends in a straight line from the root to the point (plate 33, Nos. 4, 5 and 6). In the convex form, the ridge of the nose describes a convex curve almost uniform from the root to the point (plate 33, Nos. 7, 8 and 9). 14. The humped (or busked, Fr. bnsqtie) nose is a variety of the convex nose. The upper portion of the bony part exhibits a strong and abrupt convexity, below which the rest of this bony portion becomes almost straight and continuous with the tip of the nose (plate 34, No. 3). 15. When the upper bony part presents a more or less marked projection, but the profile of the lower cartilaginous part, instead of continuing this curve as in the aquiline nose, or of taking a rectilinear direction as in the humped nose, bends inward, the shape of the ridge of the nose is called sinuous (plate 34, No. 9). It thence results that the direction of the line is convex above, and becomes concave below the bony portion, necessarily becoming convex again towards the point of the nose. 16. The sinuous nose should be considered as a variety of one of the three preceding type-forms, according as the line of the nose taken as a whole presents a hollow, a generally rectilinear direction, or an elbow. Thus the qualificative sinuotis should always be preceded by one of the three terms cave, rectilinear, convex or humped. Example : cave sinuous ; rectilinear- sinuous ; humped-sinuous. All the specimens in plate 34 are varieties, either sinuous or attenuated, of the corresponding types of plate 33. (1) We call this shape cave, and not concave, to avoid all confusion with the third, called convex (abbreviatively vex). ■ 156 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 17. 3rd, Inclination of the base of the nose (plate 33). It may be either elevated (Nos. i, 4, 7), horizontal (Nos. 2, 5, 8), or depressed (Nos. 3, 6, 9). These words relate to the incli- nation of the free edge of the nostrils, from C to B (Fig. 26), and not to that of the line of the silhouette extending from the top of the upper lip to the tip of the nose. iS. Our description of the line of the nose seen in profile stopped at the point ; the indication of the inclination of the base completes its contour. Example: JVose [conjcave with base elevated (plate 33, No. i); or for greater speed, nose cave elevated. Or again: 7iose convex depressed {;^\2iX^ 33, No. 9); 7iose rectilinear horizontal (plate 33, No. 5). 19. Although the use of two epithets together is indispens- able, it must not be thence concluded that each of them is com- bined with equal frequency with every other. Certain combina- tions are much more commonly met with than others, The \Q.Qri\cave nose usually has an elevated base (commonly called pug nose), while the convex nose is either horizontal (aquiline nose) or depressed (parrot nose), etc. On the other hand, a concave depressed nose is exceptional (plate 33, No. 3). 20. Recourse may be had, for the transitional forms between one type of nose and another, to the method of pa7'e7ithesis and underlinemejit already indicated for the designation of the color of the eyes. The underlining will always represent the accentuated form and the parenthesis the form little via7-kcd, approaching to the average or median, that is, to the rectilinear in the line of the ridge of the nose, and to the horizontal in the inclination of the base (i). 21. The use of the parenthesis permits the restriction to strictly exact cases of the use of the median qualifications: rectili- near and horizoiital. (1) In copies of a sig:nalment intended either for the public, or for administrative authorities not conversant with these technicalities, translate the parenthesis by the word slightly (Fr. ie^' for Uslrement) and the underlinement by strongly (Fr. fori- for fortemeni). NOSE 157 Thus No. I in plate 34 will be described as cave elevated; No. 2 -as {co7ivex) elevated; No. 3, hiiviped horizontal; No. 4 {cave)—si7i2c- .ous elevated; No. 5, rectilmear-siniious horizontal; No. 6, {humped^— simians horizontal, etc. II. Dimensions of the Nose After having spoken of the shape, we have still to treat of that other element of every solid: the dimensions. It is important, for the clearness of the notation, that these two points of view should be distinctly separated. 22. The three dimensions of the nose are: its height, its pro- jectio7i and its width. The meaning of these expressions should be well understood. 23. The height is not reckoned along the ridge of the nose, as one might be tempted to do. It is the line included between the root of the nose and the point C in figure 26; one escapes thus the illusions of appreciation occasioned by drooping noses (with depressed base), which always seem longer than they really are, and by noses with elevated bases, which always seem short. 24. The projection (Fr. saillie) of the nose is the distance comprised between the point B, the most prominent in the ridge of the nose, and the middle point C of the transverse line uniting the points of attachment of the two wings of the nose (fig. 26). 25. The width is the greatest transverse distance comprised between these two wings. 26. The direct measurement, by means of a caliper, of the three dimensions of the nose would present certain manual diffi- culties; so the operator should content himself with indicating, on the third line, under the proper headings, the dimensions as they appear to the e.ye, without the aid of an instrument, using the words little, medhiin or great, to which in extreme cases there may be added the expressions very little or very great. 27. It would be an error to suppose that in the case of the nose the designation of the dimensions necessarily has less sig- naletic value than that of the shape. ( Compare from this point of view, in plate 35 of the Album, a selection of noses matched in pairs and absolutely unlike in aspect although correctly noted as having the same kind of ridge and base). 158 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 28. The next plate (36) reproduces in tabular form the com- binations, 9 in number, of the three degrees of height with th'e three degrees of projection, in a uniform nose, intentionally- selected with an intermediary profile (rectilinear horizontal and of medium width). A final plate, the 37th, presents an analogous table for the ascending series of nasal heights combined with widths (i). III. Peculiarities of the Nose (plate 38) 29. ^\i^ peculiarities of the nose relate more especially to the ridge line, the tip, the 7iostrils, and the root. 30. The nose often exhibits, on a level with the upper third of the ridge, about two centimetres below the root of the nose, an olive-shaped swelling which, without making a projection on the silouhette of the nose seen in profile, may, when it is very pro- nounced, give to the nose a special characteristic. This should be noted under the head of peculiarities of the nose, by means of the abbreviated formula ridge of nose flat (plate 38, No. i). 31. The expression nose crushed should be reser\'ed for noses flattened as the result of an accident (No. 2). 32. We make mention also: nose twisted to right (No. 3) or to left; nose tapering or pointed (No. 4), nose thick (No. 5), qualifications which are applicable more particularly to to the point or tip of the nose; nose blotched or pimply; (Fr. couperose^ , etc. 33. Another flat place of triangular form is also observed sometimes on the tip of the nose. The two nasal cartilages on arriving at the point seem to divide into two branches; which (1) The education of the eye on this point is a matter of such importance that we feel that we ought to give here some indications regarding the system of proportion used in the arts under the name of canon. A rule generally admitted is to give to the nose a height equal to the distance which separates the nostrils from the point of the chin, while an imaginary line passing through the two tear-channels (larmiers) should divide the face into two parts of equal height; hence the conclusion that the forehead, az<^- tnented by the part of the skull seen from in front, should be very nearly equal to twice the height of the nose. Every manifest exception to this rule reveals either a relative ex- cess or a relative insufficiency in one of the three parts to be compared: forehead, nose or jaws. other relations of a still less precise kind have been established, taking the length of the eye as the common measure. Thus it has been said that the mean width of nose measures one eye-length, and that this same interval is found between one tear-channel and the other. NOSE 159 is expressed by the words tip of nose Sat; or again, when each cartilage makes a distinct projection under the skin of the nose: tip of nose bilobed (No. 9). 34. "^^ie. partition of the nose is the name given to the cartilage which separates one nostril from another. When this cartilage descends much below the lower edge of each nostril, the nose is called: with partition exposed (No. 7). This peculiarity is often met with in convex noses. It should be noted among the peculiar marks only when it is very pronounced. There will rather seldom be occasion to mention the cases of puffy nostrils (No. 8), the opposite of which would be nos- trils very delicate or very mobile, etc. 35. One will also be sometimes led to note among the peculiarities of the nose the cases of a root of the nose particu- larly i2arro"H^ or broad (plate 32, Nos. 7 and 8), as well as those in which, owing to an abrupt and vertical descent of the nasal bones, the concavity of the root, ceasing to have any inferior limit, descends very low (No. 9). 36. This deformity of the nasal bones is sometimes accenu- ated to such a degree as to completely puzzle the observ^er as to the proper qualification to apply to the ridge line. No. i in plate 34 reproduces a case of this kind: the nose, at first evidently [con] cave along the nasal bones, describes a short convexity in its lower half, so that it might just as well be qualified as cave or as convex, according to the part considered. 37. In such cases, the observer should neglect details and consider only the general aspect, mentioning his doubts in a note under the head of sundry information. This profile, which however is very rare, might be designated by the expression nose with S- shaped dorsal line. Approximation, and I^imits of Possible Deviation 38. The series of terms describing the direction of the ridge- Hne of the nose present themselves in the following order, already mentioned : {con vex) — cott vex — con vex Ca ve — ca ve — {ca ve ) — rectilinear — [humped) — hu mped — h u rnped l6o DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 39. Each term in this progression may possibly be confounded, according to circumstances, either with the term that precedes it or with the one that follows it, without any fault on the part of the observer. 40. An error exists only when from one category one skips entirely over another. Thus (cave) — in parenthesis — otherwise speaking ^/z^/z//)/ [conjcave, may be confounded with rectilinear, but not with slightly humped or slightly convex (with the exception noted in § 37). In the same way the confusion of cave — under- lined — with (cave) — in parenthesis — would constitute a mistake. 41. As to the class with sinuous ridges, their seriation is superposed on the preceding. Thus a nose (cave)-sinuous might be described, in a later observation, as rectilinear- sinuous , but not as humped-sinuons. Furthermore, every term of the slightly sinuous — (sinuous) — series is liable to be confused with the corresponding group of the non-simcous series. 42. The series for the inclination of the base, presenting neither bifurcation nor superposition, is still more simple. It commences at the most elevated form and ends at the most depressed: Elevated — elevated — {elevated ) — horizontal — {depressed) — depressed — depressed Thanks to the intermediate terms, created by the underlining and the parenthesis, it is difl&cult to confound strongly elevated with slightly elevated, or this latter with slightly depressed. 43. Similarly, as regards the dimensions, the confusion of two extreme qualifications is not possible; what has been termed nar- row, for instance, in a first observation, may be qualified in a second as medium, but not as broad. 44. Thus, whatever may be the heading considered, the diver- gences of different examiners (we do not say the errors, ) are lim- ited within very narrow bounds, which may be precisely defined, on general principles, for each case taken separately. It is sufficient for satisfactory work to know by heart, in the ascending and descending order, the series of qualifications to be used for each heading. EAR l6l Abbreviations 45. The employment of the following abbreviations gives more rapidity to the writing; moreover, the narrowness of the columns on the anthropometric card renders their use indispensable. rectilinear r. sinuous s. [con']cave cav. elevated {Vr. releve) . . . rel. convex {diicXaXtdi vex) vex, horizontal h. humped {^r. busque) . husq. depressed [Vr . abaisse) . . . ab. SECTION C. — DESCRIPTION OF THE EAR 46. The ear, owing to the many hollows and ridges which fur- row it, is the most important means of identification in the human visage. 47. It is, in fact, almost impossible to meet with two ears which are identical in all their parts, and some of the variations of form which this organ presents appear to remain unmodified from birth until death. And yet, principally on account of its motionlessness, which prevents it from participating in the play of the features, no part of the face attracts less notice; our eye is as little accustomed to observe it as is our language to describe it. The descriptive formulary for the ear which we are about to give has been followed for several years at the Depot of the Pre- fecture of Police at Paris; but it must be admitted that the opera- tion requires in practice a certain time (about five minutes for each subject). 48. So it is recommended in its entirety only in the signal- ments of those subjects, and particularly of you7ig persons under twe7ity-one years of age, who, being suspected of concealing their true identity, are made the object of a request for special verifi- cation, without the aid of a photograph, in the central collection of Paris, which is the only city where the complete description of the ear of prisoners is always taken. Apart from these cases, the local operators are authorized to describe only those clearly extreme forms which by reason of theii exceptional aspect are termed ayiomalies. l62 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 49. Hence there are two parts to this chapter: in the yirsi the component elements of the external ear will be analj'zed in all their details, and their corresponding descriptive vocabularj^ will be indicated; then, in the second (p. 174), the principal characters will be taken up again, with reference only to those forms which should be signalized in any and every case. 50. These two parts need to be studied one after the other, be- ginning with the first; but the second, that of the anomalies, is the onl}^ one which the operator needs to know by heart, on the spur of the vioment, while he will do wisely, at the beginning, in those rarer cases where he has to describe the ear completely, to do so only with the book in his hand, re-reading the instructions, paragraph hy paragraph, just as he is about to appl}' them, or later on, when he has become more expert, with the aid of the recapitulator>^ table on page 177. I. Detailed Analysis of the Parts of the Ear 51. It is sufl&cient to describe the elevations by which the DEPRESSIONS are bounded, to obtain, at the same time, an idea of the latter; the description will thus be shortened \yy half. The elevations are five in number: 52. I. — The BORD:^Rof the ear, or helix, is the semi-circular eminence which, starting at A (fig. 27), in the middle of the central depression of the ear, called the [shell or] concha, above the auditor^' conduit, reaches the peripherj' and borders as with a gutter the two upper thirds of the ear. 53. II. — Where it ends commences the I^OB]©, a soft rounded protuberance w4iich terminates the circumference of the pavilion. 54. We cite here, for convenience in memorizing, the tra- gus, which is not mentioned on the signaletic card. It is a little cartilaginous projection, flat and triangular, placed outside and in front of the auditory conduit, the form of which presents few individual variations; the tragus is more or less thrown for- ward, pointed, and sometimes even bifurcated. 55. III. — Opposite, and separated by the auditor^^ conduit, is the ANTITRAGUS, a round eminence smaller than the tragus but much superior to it in signaletic value. EAR 163 56. IV. Above, finally, are the windings of the anthelix, that we call abbreviately the FOI/D, which, after ascending for about a centimetre, divides into two branches, the superior and the median, the latter coming to rejoin the helix above the ridge q in which it originates. 57. The ascending, called the superior, branch of the anthelix limits at the rear the depres- sion called by anatomists the navicular (that is, in the shape of a wherry or pirogue) fossa and in front the depression that we call the digital fossa (the in- tercrural of the anatomists). These two hollows are indicated in figure 27 by dotted lines: the navicular fossa opposite the let- ters D and C, and the digital fossa above the letter M. 58. Notice that the order of enumeration which we have fol- lowed, and which is that obser\'ed in the signaletic cards, to- wit: border, lobe, antitragus and fold, would allow the numerous out- lines of the ear to be drawn with- out having, so to speak, to lift the pen, starting at the point A (fig. 27) and finishing at the point M (supposing the tragus to be omitted and a backward movement to be made for the superior branch of the anthelix). This course is indicated in our figure by the alphabetical order of the capital letters separating each of the subdivisions, which we will now enumerate, describing at the same time the most characteristic variations of form (i). Fig. 27. Plan of the ear. Border, A B C D E, divided into the Original, A B, Superior, B C, "Posterior, C D, and inferior, D E, portions. Lobule, E F G H, examined from the point of view of its contour, E F, its adherence to the cheek, F H, its model G and its Dimension. Antitragus, H I, examined from the point of view of its inclination, its pro- file, its degree of reversion forwards and its Dimension. Internal folds, separated into inferior, I K, superior, K L, and middle, K M, branches. (1) We will obser\-e here, once for all, that in this enumeration the names of the parts analyzed will be printed in italics, with the exception of their initial letter repro- duced on the anthropometrical card to indicate the place for the entry, which initial will l64 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 59. I. — The B0RD:ER may be analyzed into three portions: (1) the original ridge, A B, (2) the afifero-Superior -portion B and ( 3 ) the posterior C D E. Each of these divisions may vary independently in dimension, that is to say, be small, medium or large (see plate 52, Nos. i, 2 and 3). It even happens sometines that the Original portion, A B, is completely lacking. This peculiarity is expressed by the word Dj7, while the entire absence of the Superior porWon, B C, and of the Posterior, C D E, should be described by the more figurative term Rat. At other times, the Posterior portion is more developed than the Superior (plate 52, No. 9), or inversely (plate 55, No, 6). Finally we shall see under the I^OBE portion that the final part, D E, of the posterior border is sometimes so exaggerated that it continues across the lobe to the cheek (plate 58, No. 9). 60. Nothing is more characteristic than the irregularities of contour, enlargements or diminutions, which the species of gutter that we term the border of the ear presents in different parts. They are expressed on our cards by the alternation of the adjec- tives of dimension added to the heading. Thus the BORDER of No. 6 on plate 52 would be represented thus: Original medium, Superior large. Posterior small; that of No 12, which is equal and regular, would be described: Original small, Superior large. Posterior large; while the very exceptional contour of No. 9 would be expressed by the alternative adjec- tives; Original medium, Superior nil, posterior very large. 61. To the qualifications of dimension there is added ("*), but for the posterior portion of the border onh', the indication of the degree of its openness. Three degrees are distinguished: the be distinguished from the rest of the word by being printed in a bolder faced character. Conformably to the general rule laid down in the note on p. 150, these initial letters are themselves either in capital or small letters according to whether the answer requires a special series of qualifications or should be formulated by means of one of the terms of dimension, small, medium or large. The very small figures ( ' ) ( * ) ( ' ), etc., placed in parenthesis, indicate the order in which each initial heading comes on the card. The very words to be written in response to the headings are printed in bold-faced italics, according to the rule followed throughout this volume. They are chosen in such wise that they can be entered by means of their initial letter alone, opposite each corre- sponding heading, which, as we have said, is itself represented by a simple initial. In case of doubt as to the proper term to be used, answer, as in the case of the num- ber for the eyes, by uniting with a hyphen the two possible initials, the most probable first. EAR 165 open form, the intermediate form and the form at once dosed and adhering. The first, represented by No. 10 in plate 52, needs no definition. The adhering form is characterized by the fact that the skin of the border, instead of covering deHcately the hollow of the cartilage, forms a fleshy pad there which, seen from a distance, might appear hollow, but which a more attentive examination shows to be solid and formed by two skins which seem to be glued one against the other when it is touched with the hand. The border of the ear No. 12 belongs to this form. 62. II. — The I/OBB or lobule (plate 53) should be considered under three relations: (i) The contour of its free border E F, which may terminate in a point descending and attached along the cheek, or in a square f or finally in a rounded ellipsoid; this last form is subdi- vided in its turn into two, according as the ellipsoid is still partially adherent (contour intermediate), or is completely separated by an open space (contour ^ui/erf). (2) The degree of didherence to the cheek, F H, which may be so complete that the skin of the lobe is united to that of the cheek without forming the least furrow, the least wrinkle, at their point of junction, which is expressed by the word blend- ing {Vx.fondii); ox partially separated, which is expressed by the word intermediate; or, lastly, completely separated by a rounded furrow formed by the skin of the lobe itself. The adherence of a lobe wit/i grdfed contour is, of course, always separated. (3) The -aiodel oi its antero-external surface G, which may be traversed by the prolongation of the helix, smooth or with a gently rounded eminence. (4) Its Tiimension in height, which may be small, medium or large. 63. III. — The ANTITRAGUS (plate 54) presents a general line of direction of which: (1) The xnclination may vary from horizontalness (the head being supposed in its normal position) to an obliquity oi 45°, passing through an intermediate inclination. (2) In relation to this line, indicated in the cut on page 163 by the dotted line H I, the -profile of the antitragus may form a line with an upward (con) cavity, a very rare form (plate 56, No. l66 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION lo), or rectilinear, or sliglitl}' sinuous, which is expressed by intermediate, or distinctly projecting. (3; Finally the antitragus, and particularly its free extremit}^ should be considered with reference to its degree of reversion (or turnijig over) forwards: whence the three serial qualifications: turned (Fr. verse) , intermediate, and erect (Fr. droit). The intermediate cases are naturally very much the more numerous. In the absence of an antitragus, respond to the heading for the reversion by a dash ( — ). (4). Aside from all questions of shape, the antitragus may vary also in its absolute TMmensio7i, small, medium or large. 64. IV. — The POI/D, or winding of the anthelix (plate 55), is divided into three parts, which we shall analyze in the order in which they present themselves to the observ^er as his glance passes upwards from the antitragus, to- wit: 65. The inferior, I K. It is considered only wdth reference to the degree of inclination, or of torsion, presented b)^ the totality of the portion that may be termed the postero-inferior band of the ear, D E K I, included between the corresponding parts of the fold and the border. In practice, the method of description is based on the degree of projection of the fold, I K, in relation to an horizontal ijnagi- 7ia?y line which, starting from the anterior face of the tragus, would pass from before to behind, grazing the postero-anterior part of the ear. 66. The windings should be noted as [con] cave inferior folds , w^hen they are so effaced that the tangent in question, starting from the tragus and being directed in a horizontal direction toward the back of the head, is thrown in front of the anthelix on account of the very considerable projection of the posterior border (plate 55, No. i). In an intermediate inferior fold, the tangent starting from the tragus grazes at the same time the two ridges, anthelix and border (plate 55, No. 2). In the fold called [con] vex the horizontal tangent touches the lower ridge of the anthelix only, leaving the corresponding part of the border one or more millimetres behind, towards the side of the occiput (plate 55, No. 3). EAR 167 So then, it is less the inferior branch of the antheUx which is examined under this heading than thk generai. form which would be presented by a horizontai, section of the ear on THE I^EVEIv OF THE TRAGUS. 67. The anthropometrical employees of the identification ser- vice of the Parisian Prefecture of Police employ, for distinguish- ing the three terms of this series, a small instrument which i Fig. 28 it is easy to make oneself or which can be replaced if neces- sary by a pen-holder or any sort of a rigid rod. The instru- ment consists, in fact, merely of a thick brass wire 2 millimetres in diameter and 10 centimetres in length, having at 4 millimetres from the end a small projection 4 millimetres high made of wire only half as thick, soldered at right angles to the first. 68. The measurer, holding the instrument horizontally with his left hand, rests the extremity against the subject's tragus, the projection turned away from the auditory conduit, and with it draws the rod along until it just touches the cartilaginous band D E K I, -svithout depressing it in any way. It isexident that with this instrament, as with the imaginary line spoken of before, the contact is and can be made in three ways only: (i) with the border alone (then the fold is termed [con] cave); (2) with the border and the anthelixat once (the fold is called intermediate); or (3) with the anthelix only (which constitutes the form called convex). See fig. 29, next page. 69. The second part of the FOI/D is the Superior branch, K L, which is situated above the first. It is qualified as nil, effaced, intermediate or accentuated, according to the thickness and the more or less rounded projection which this elevation presents ( i ) . 70. The branch K M, called the mediaji or original branch of the anthelix,is seldom characteristic. For the cases which should be noted, see under the Peculiarities, page 173, § 96. (1) The operator should note, in a reference to the Peculiarities, the infrequent cases where the superior fold itself divides into two or three branches. i68 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 71. G^N:ERAI/ form. The following series of terms suffi- ciently answers the requirements of the description: triangular ) . . 1 \ — oval — round rectangular ) 72, In this enumeration the triajigular and rectangular forms are placed one above the other to indicate that they may be easily confounded either with each other or with the adjacent form, the oval, which is the one most frequently met with. 73. It is evident that the indication of the general form of the ear can only be a more or less direct consequence of the morpho- logical variations already described. Thus the triangular form Fig. 29. The form of the inferior fold is revealed in these figures by the direc tion of the band of shadow thrown by \.\i^ guiding-rod : No. 1. — The ROD is contiguous with the shadow on the edge of the ear, and is sep- arated from it by a millimetre of white on the internal fold (shadowand fold of \covi\cave form). No. 2.— The shadow is thrown in a straight line on the two parts parallelly and close against the guiding rod (shadow and fold of intermediate form). No. 3. — The rod touches the shadow on the internal fold and is separated from it sharply on the external border (shadow and fold of convex form). generally results from the presence of a descending lobe combined either with 2i flattened border or with the square siipero-posterior contour of which we shall speak further on. However, the con- comitant presence of these qualifications (descending lobe and square contour) ought not to be regarded as necessarily implying the very characteristic triangular form, so that the mention of this latter will always be a useful complementary indication. In the same way the rectangular form is not seen except when there is an abnormal development of the lobe in a horizontal direction. EAR 169 As for the round form, it often results from the separation of the upper part of the paviUon combined with a lobe small in dimen- sions and drawn for^vards. 74. The SEPARATION (Fr. ecartement ) OF THE PAVII/^ (or distance around the stomach). III. Each of these points is covered by one of the terms of the typical series: small, medium and large. The width of the shoulders is written after the heading shoul- der-breadth (Fr. carrure), immediately following the word ze^zaTZ/i (Fr. largeur, abbreviated L^'). As regards the inclination of the shoulders (letters z'" on the card), see page 203, §§ 116 and 117. CO o M M > pq PQ O CO o o o o o o a Sntnsdo JO asisap s}i 53 ^ a, g O O d O CO a o •1-1 o ;:3 '* noisnaraip s;i aopa^sod C. ^ .B V jouadns 3 ''* Sf 5 a S f =" ntSuo a. a. a ■«« :^ a : a > Cfi S J > noisnamia a. g ^ o ppoK « ^3 M a - 3 u •-! !^ K# 5 a >.-<•« a i a w nOISJ3A3-a i:! aj ^ S 3igoj ^ I CHAPTER III.— MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS WHICH HAVE NO SPECIAL HEADINGS ON THE SIGNALETIC CARD (Complementary characteristic traits) A. — Complementarj- features of the profile. B. — Complementary features of the face. C. — General characters and sundry information. GENERAI, PRINCIPLES 1. The paragraph for characteristic features is intended to complete the descriptive part of the signalment. We range under this chapter: the description of the lips and chin, the general con- tour of the head (profile and face) , the various modes of implanta- tion of the hair, the beard and the eyebrows, the shape of the eye- lids, the form and size of the eyeball and the orbit, the mouth, the wrinkles, furrows and rictus of the face, the expressio7i of the physiognomy , and also various information relative to the general aspect of the subject: dimension of the neck, slope of the shoulders, general attitude and viien, quality of the voice , foreign or provincial accent, etc. , characteristics which are all more or less liable to be modified under the influence of the will or of education, of age, fashion, the cutting of the beard and hair, the loss of the teeth, increasing or decreasing fleshiness, or even the transient expres- sion of the feelings, etc. 2. It is evident that it would have been practically impossible, without overloading the cards beyond measure, to provide for all the more or less signaletic features j ust mentioned special head- ings analogous to those that the rules of a systematic analysis had indicated to us for the forehead, the nose and the ear. 3. Moreover, the smallness of the space reser^^ed on our cards for the recording of these numerous characters shows the neces- sity of a rigorous selection. It is useless to remark, for instance, that a certain face is oval, or a certain mouth ordinary; while a (17S) GENERAI, PRINCIPLES 1 79 rotmd or lo7ig face, a mouth with drooping corners, etc. . when these quahties are very pronounced, should be specially men- tioned, unless some still more unusual exaggeration of other parts, eyeball, eyebrows, chin, etc., should relegate them to the second rank. 4. It is these distinguishing features, to the number of two or three at most, that should be written by them- selves in the paragraph of characteristic traits, elim- inating, of course, those among them which have been already placed under the permanent headings: forehead, nose, or ear. 5. The method of observ^ation and description previously employed will still be followed, at least in its general outlines. It will be necessary, as before, for us to establish the sEriation of the qualifications to be employed, and, with this aim, to analyze separately the form and the dimensions. When once this dis- tinction has been clearly defined specify if possible the emplace- ment of the organ under consideration, that is to say, its degree of straightness, or obliquity, or separation, or projection in rela- tion to surrounding points. 6. But while in the preceding chapter the attributes of each part were divided into as many paragraphs as was necessary to make the answer easy, and the presence of a heading printed on the card, which demanded a response, was a protection against for- getfulness, the taking of the complementary characteristic features, and the selection of those which are to be noted, must be made zV«- promptu, and without any formulated guide before the eyes, after the period of apprenticeship has once been passed. 7. In the vocabulary of the complementary features which we are about to give, we shall generally omit to mention the medium term (or that intermediate between the two extremes), which, ac- cording to the rules just indicated, should not be noted. But it is evident that anj^ examiner who might need it for a more com- plete description, such as that in use for the verbal portrait , for exam- ple, will always be able to ascertain its place in the series and to supply it b}^ the word agreed upon. 8. The suppression of the headings has as a further consequence the optional use of synthetic terms. We thus designate the quali- fications which embrace several attributes at once, such, for in- l8o DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION Stance, as the expression parrot-nose, employed to designate a greatly projecting nose with a convex depressed profile. If it is difficult to always use these terms in a strictly appropriate way, they have the advantage of being at once short and figu- rative. So their use, though incompatible with the analytical method of the printed headings, becomes advisable to a certain extent in the paragraph devoted to the complementary character- istic traits. A list of them will be given at the end of each chap- ter, under the title of S3-nthetical expressions. 9. The preceding generalities have shown the beginner what significance should be attached to the heading of characteristic traits; they should sufl&ce provisional!}' to enable him to respond to it in an almost satisfactory manner. The much more detailed explanations upon which we are about to enter in analyzing the human face and the general appearance, part by part, should be read and studied only at the third or even at the fourth reading of the book, after having acquired a profound theoretical and practical knowl- edge of all the other chapters. It would be an error of judgment on an offi- cer's part to postpone the actual practice of anthropometrical signalment until after chapter III has been completely mastered. He would run the risk of losing both his interest and his time. But this same study, taken up at some later period, a little at a time, with a mind in repose, will soon enable him to make interesting observations on the countenance of his subjects, and ^vill develop in him all the qualities of a physiognomist. SECTION A. — COMPLEMENTARY FEATURES OF THE PROFILE I. Lips. II. Chin. III. General Contour. I. The Lips ( plate 39) ID. The lips, viewed in profile, should belexamined in relation to: ( 1 ) The absolute height of the upper lip from the base of the nose C naso-labial height little, to the mouth, expressed by: ^ ^^3^.;^^,.^^ ^.^y^^^ g.^^t. (2) The prominence of 07ie of the two lips in relation to the , . ( upper lip prominent, other, expressed by: < , ,. . > ^ ( lower lip prominent. (3) The width of the smooth, rosy border which they show on , , ( lips without border, the outside, expressed by: < ,. .., • 7 r, t / , ^ -^ i lips with wide border (see also plate 42 , No. 5 ) . (4) Their absolicte thichiess, eK.-pTessed by: < .. ^r • L PROFILE l8l 1 1 . These two latter qualifications sometimes apply separately to one of the lips only. Example : upper lip very thin; lower lip with wide border. 12. When a large border is combined with a lack of adherence against the teeth, the tipper lip is termed protruding (Fr. retroussSe) and the lower lip pendant (plate 39, Nos. 8 and 9). 13. Seen from in front the upper lip is always more or less depressed in its median portion by a slight furrow (Fr. si/lofi) descending vertically from the partition of the nose ; when this is very accentuated it is expressed by: upper lip with median furrow (plate 39, No. 7). The lower lip sometimes presents an analogous depression, but less pronounced. 14. Permanent traces of old chaps (Vr. ger^ures) badh' healed may often be obser\-ed on one lip or the other, w^hence the pecu- liarities noted as: scar of chap on upper or lower lip. Finally, the median portion of the upper lip may show a cica- trix of the operation for hare-lip (Fr. bee de lievre), which may be recognized by the presence of two deep curved and vertical scars combined with a great narrowness of the lip in these places. 15. Synthetie expressions. The expressions blubber- lipped (Fr. lippii) and blubber- mouthed are applied to mouths with thick lips the lower of which is pendant. 16. The act of advancing the lips and at the same time bring- ing them together is described by the word pouting (Fr. /aire la moiie), which may always be employed in the paragraph of characteristic features to denote either a permanent form or merely an habitual expression of the face. The inverse is expressed by compressing the lips (Fr. pi?ieer les levres). (Refer to the section mouth, page 197, for the characteristic features of the lips seen from in front. ) II. The Chin (plate 40) 17. Seen in profile the chin varies in regard to: ( I ) The general inclijiation of this part of the silhouette, whence , , . ( chin receding, the two extreme formula (i): J ^^.^ projecting. (1) We understand by receding chin one the line of whose profile is oblique from front to back and from above downward, and by projecting chin one that is oblique from back to front. l82 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION (2) The form of the ball [or fleshy protuberance of the chin without ball (or flat), chin with large ball. (3) The height, taken verticall}' from the Une of the mouth to chin] : < the point of the chin : < chin high, chin low. 18. Seen from in front, the chin may present three pecuHarities worthy of remark: ( 1 ) The exaggeration of the horizontal sicpramental furrow: thus we call the curved horizontal line, convex above, from 2 to 3 centimetres in length, which in some subjects separates in a very distinct manner the chin proper from the base of the lower lip. This peculiarity should be noted in these terms : supra- mental furrow very deep; when, however, the accentua- tion of this furrow is caused principally by the exaggeration of the ball it is sufl&cient to note this latter character, which almost necessarily involves the other. (2) '^\iQ. centr-al dimple {or viediaii fossette) which characterizes a certain number of chins with prominent balls. Sometimes the dimple, instead of forming a symmetrical circular hollow in the middle of the ball, is lengthened upwards and downwards, whence the expression dimple elongated. This latter when much exaggerated may divide the extrem- ity of the chin into two lobes, whence the abridged expression chin bilobed. (3) "Thefeshj/ cushion which is observ^ed in obese persons and which has received the characteristic name of double chin. The supramental furrow described above must not be confounded with the submental furrow which bounds the chin underneath, and is alwaj's very apparent in subjects with a double chin. Ill, General Contour of Head seen in Profile (plate 41) 19. I St. Prognathism and orthognathism. The promi- nence of the lower part of the face, and more particularly of the ?<://>w- gnathic should be employed on our signalments only for the desig- nation of the prominence of the whole upper jaw; while it will be necessary to resort to the term naso-prognathicX.o express a projec- tion limited to the bony parts above, which support the base of the nose. In the great majority of subjects, when the two jaws are tightly closed and the large molars above and below are fitted together, the upper incisors are in advance of the lower and par- tially conceal them. This arrangement is evidently so much the more apparent as the upper jaw is more advanced, that is to saj^, as the naso-prognathism becomes more pronounced. In subjects, l84 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION on the contrary, in whom, when the teeth are set, the lower in- cisors entirely conceal the upper ones, the latter are so much the more pressed backward as the first are advanced. 24, This formation should be indicated by the expression, lower jaw prominent (popularly, jimmy-jawed), which will then imply, without any necessity of a separate mention, a greater or less accompan3ang prominence of the corresponding lip ( i ) . This peculiarity assumes a great signaletic value in cases where it is combined with orthognathism (see plate 60 a, Nos. 3 and 4). 25. 2nd. We would say a word also in regard to the Greek or classic profile. It is characterized by the combination of a recti- linear horizontal nasal profile (with the three mean dimensions) with a root of the nose having a concavity but slightly marked, that is, of very little depth, and a forehead whose line of inclina- tion is a prolongation of the ridge of the nose. This peculiarity may be briefly expressed by the formula: fronto-nasal proAle rectilinear (plate 41, No. 6). 26, The inverse form consists in the combination of a vertical forehead with a nose whose ridge projects strongly from the root to its extremity (the consequence either of a pronounced prognathism or of a greatly projecting nose with an elevated base). This conformation, the description of which is partly included in that of the forehead and the nose, should receive special mention only in the preparation of the verbal portrait; the synthetic expression fronto- nasal pro£le angular might be reserved for it (see plate 35, Nos. 2 and 6). The normal form (midway between the rectilinear profile and the angular) , which, of course, will never need to be mentioned, is characterized by a direction nearly parallel (but not constituting a prolongation of one into the other) of the nasal and frontal profiles. 27. We have still to note the semi-lunar proGle, which results from the coincidence of a cur\'ed and rather receding fore- head with a convex nose and an equally receding chin, in such (1) It -will be noticed that the />>-07i?c/?'«;r chin is distingruished fTOtn the prom in en i jaw, in that the first qualification implies only an obiiQue-aniertor direciion of the pro- file while the second denotes the general advancement of the whole jaw without regard to the direction of the obliquity of the line of the chin (see note on p. ISl). PROFILE 185 wise that the entire profile, taken as a whole, would be tangent to an arc of a circle described by taking the tragus as a centre (see among others plate 41, No. 3; plate 40, No. 1; and plate 33, No. 9). 28. 3rd. The profile of the skull, properly speaking. To complete the description of the profile, we should say a word of the cases where the height of the skull above the auditory orifice departs from the mean either in one direction or the other, , ., , , ( skull low, hence the two phrases: < , »* , . , ^ ( skull high. 29. The degree of backward projection of the occiput may also give rise to some remarks of more value, it is true, in the verbal portrait than on the anthropometrical card where they would be to some extent a repetition of the measurement of the length of head. In fact, individuals with a small cranial length almost neces- sarily possess Q. Jiat ocdpiit, while subjects with a great length of head present, other things being equal, a bulging occiput. 30. 4th. Special malformations. Finally we would men- tion some cranial anomalies, either natural or artificial, which are likewise signaletic only when well marked. A very small length of the head combined with an abnormal elevation of the cranial arch (the acrocephaly of anthropologists) may be designated synthetically hy the expression: head shako- shaped (Fr. e?t bonnet a polls, i. e., "like a bear-skin cap"), with reference to the celebrated head dress of the grenadiers of Napoleon I (plate 41, No. 7). 31. The term, keel -shaped head (Fr. tete en carefie, scien- tific term scaphocephalic") may be applied to the form, almost the inverse of the foregoing, which results from an excessive antero- posterior elongation of the skull combined with a great narrow- ness, especially at the summit; which gives the cranium, seen from above, a form somewhat suggesting that of a ship turned upside down, with the keel in the air (plate 41, No. 8). Finally there will be designated as the pouch-shaped head [Fr. /. e7i besace, called by anthropologists cyvibocephalic\ a cranial form resulting from an artificial deformation still practiced in our day on the heads of new-born infants in certain parts of France l86 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION (especially around Limoges and Toulouse) and other countries. The heads which have been so treated are easily recognized in profile view by their receding forehead, disproportionately pro- longed, and by the projection of their occiput (same plate, No. 9). SECTION B. — COMPLEMENTARY FEATURES OF THE FACE I. General Contour of Head seen from in Front (plate 42) 33. The general form of the visage results from the apparent relation between its height and its width. The intrinsic height suf- ficiently appears from the sum of the dimensions indicated in the headings for th.Q. forehead and the wc'^^, completed, when necessary, by the indication of the height of the chin. The factors on which the width depends are, besides the forehead, the prominence (or the effacement) of the cheek-bones and zygomata (i) and the openness (or the narrowness) of the angles of the lower jaw, appreciated beneath the ears. 34. A narrow forehead combined with a broad face and espe- cially a very broad jaw produces the sugar-loaf or pyra- midal visage (plate 42, No. i); while the inverse type, which is termed top-shaped visage, results from the combination of a wide forehead with a narrow face (same plate, No. 9). Finally the association of widely separated cheek-bones with a forehead and lower jaw equally narrow produces the lozenge- shaped and round forms (same, Nos. 2 and 3). 35. Thus the ex^pressions pyramzda/, lozenge-shaped ^ face round, square, oval (or normal tj^pe) and top- shaped constitute a series applicable to the cases where there is occasion to note the general form of the visage seen from in front, including the forehead. 36. Instead of considering the general form of the countenance it is often simpler and more characteristic to confine one's atten- tion to the determining cause and to note: lower jaw (or zygoniata)nnich separated (plate 42, Nos. 7 and 8); or better still: skull (or cranium) very large, cheek-hones receding, jaws narrow (plate 42, No. 9), etc. (1) Zygoma is the name applied to the osseous band or area which extends from the cheek-bone to just above the auditory arifice. FACE 187 When these two latter characteristics appear together, it is sufl&cient to note abbreviativel}', according to the case : fa.ce wide or face narrow below. 37. Sometimes, again, the predominating characters to be indi- cated will be those of face full or thick, face bony or tbin, 38. The form of the visage is, however, a feature which is very changeable. Children, who generally have full cheeks and abundant hair, nearly always have round faces. But the drop- ping out of the hair, which often precedes adolescence, lengthens the countenance by appearing to elevate the forehead. The arrival of the beard soon produces a new modification in the same direction, which may be still further exaggerated by a change in the fleshiness of the subject or by the loss of the large upper molars, etc. (plate 59^ and ^gd). II. Nature, Abundance and Mode of Insertion of the Hair (plate 43) 39. Besides its shade, the hair may be the subject of remarks relating: (i), to its nature or degree of luididation; (2), to the manner of its hisertion on the forehead; (3), to the abtinda^ice of its implantation. 40. I St. The DEGREE OF UNDULATION is indicated by the words: hair straight, wavy, curly, frizzly, crinkly and woolly (plate 43, Nos. i, 2 and 3). "The straight (Fr. droits^ hair (a character of no signaletic value) needs no definition; \t is, coarse ox f7ie , stiff or stipple . The hair is ivazy (Fr. ondes) when it describes long, undulating curves; curly {Vr. boucles), when beyond a certain length it curv^es back on itself and forms flexible rings, in general rather large and incomplete; it is frizzly when it forms, throughout its whole length, rings smaller and less supple than the pre- ceding." (Broca.) 41. Cri7ikly hair (Fr. crepus') differs from merely frizzlj^ hair in that its rings are still smaller and twisted together. 42. Woolly hair (Fr. laijieiix), of w^hich the negro race offers the most pronounced type, is in general rather short; it is so interlaced as to form little globular tufts pressed tightly together, the appearance of which reminds one of the fleece of a sheep. l88 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 43. 2nd. The insertion of the hair around the fore- head usually follows an angular contour. It gives the forehead the form of a rectangle, the base of which corresponds to the Hne of the eyebrows. It is then said that the insertion of the hair is rectangular (plate 43, No. 5). This is the intermediate and most common form. 44. There is also obser\'ed a circular, or rather semi-circu- lar, mode of insertion in which the two extremities of the line terminate in front of the ears (plate 43, No. 4). The opposite form is the insertion in ascending points (vulgarly " slipper- shaped," Fr. efi pantoufle) : the forehead is destitute of hair above the frontal bosses, and is prolonged into two retreating angles with points more or less acute, and the line of implantation describes above and in the middle of the forehead a curve wnth an upward concavity (plate 43, No. 6). The three lines: circular, rectangular and in points, mark the three stages of insertion characteristic of successive ages. The circular form is that found in many children, whose forehead, covered by the hair, seems to be elliptical. The recta?igular form is that of adult age, while the form m points precedes the frontal baldness described further on. 46. 3rd. The abundance of implantation of the hair, a ver>' secondar^^ character, is expressed by the phrases hair thin; hair very thick or very abundant. 47. With the question of the abundance of the hair is con- nected the rather important notation of the various kinds of bald- ness (plate 43, Nos. 7,8, and 9). The fall of the hair follows two courses: frontal baldness^ which throws back the line of insertion of the hair mentioned above and heightens the forehead; tonsural baldness gen- erally appears after the first, wdth which it soon combines to pro- duce fr onto- parietal baldness (from the names of the principal bones of the skull which form this part of the head). It is well known that the hair covering the temples and the occi- put is the last to fall. 48. Finally some special pathological cause occasionally' results in the complete loss of the hair and beard, and produces the state called by physicians total alopecy. FACE 189 III. The Beard (plate 44) 49. The characters of the beard are analyzed and noted by means of terms analogous to those just indicated for the hair. 50. ist. The hair of the beard is either straight or stiff, supple, slightly curly, frizzly, or very frizzly. 51. 2nd. While it may be that (save in cases of baldness) the hair is planted with equal thickness all over the scalp, the abun- dance of the beard varies greatly in the same individual and from one individual to another, according to the part of the face consid- ered: upper lip, cheeks, chin, or neck. 52. Every one knows that the hair on the upper lip is called the mustache, and that on the cheek the side whiskers (Fr. favoris^. That on the chin is called chin whiskers (Fr. mentonniere^ when it extends over the whole chin, and goatee (Fr. barbe de boric) when it is limited to the median and lower portion of the ball of the chin. The beard which covers the under part of the lower jaw is termed a collar, and the little hairy tuft that adorns the middle of the lower lip a moiiche or royale. When the distribution of the beard is naturally unequal, this should be specified in the description; for example: smooth cheeks and thick mustache; large whiskers, mustache thin with hairs coarse and straight; downy mustache, small imperial; wears his beard in a collar, in a goatee, etc. 53. 3rd. The localization of the implantation of the beard, whenever it constitutes a distinguishing character, necessarily in- cludes the description of the lifies of insertion. So we will give no special vocabulary for the latter. 54. It is unnecessary to insist on the ease with which the razor can instantl}' modify or hide the nature and distribution of the beard. From this point of view, it might almost be better to attach these features to the description of the dress than to include them in the anatomical signalment of the individual. Contrast Nos. i . 2 and 3 of plate 44 with the six numbers fol- lowing, for the comparison of the natural implantation with the various modes of cutting the beard. igo DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION IV. The Eyebrows (plates 45 and 46) 55. No part of the face plays a more important part in the gen- eral expression of the physiognomy-, seen from in front, than the eyebrow. But for the ver}* reason of the variety of arrangements which it presents, its complete and methodical description would be long and complicated. 56. The inner extremity of the eyebrow is often designated by the name of the head of the eyebrow, and the outer by that of tail of the eyebrow. It should be remembered that we have already seen above (page 152, note) in connection with the heading for the forehead that it is important to distinguish the hairy spindle ^sMxcHq. constitutes the true eyebrow from the bony arch which serves as its support (i). 57. The following table gives a summary of the principal re- marks to which the eyebrow maj' give rise when it is analyzed suc- cessively from the point of view: ist, of its relations to its sur- roundings, 2nd, of itsforni, 3rd, oi its volume, 4th, oiiXs pecidiari- ties, and 5th, of its shade. Relation to surroundings (1) 5<'>ar(2//o«of the heads of the two eyebrows eyebrows near eyebrows distant (2) Elevation (or distance from (eyebrows low the middle of the brows to the s eyebrows bi^h center of the eyeball) t^ Direction and form (3) General direction (or inclina- tion) of the eyebrows as a ■whole (note the direction of the obliquity, proceeding from above to below) J eyebrows oblique-internal J eyebrows oblique-external (4) Form of the general outline of Uyebrows arched the preceding line \ eyebrows rectilinear and I 1 sometimes sinuous (1) Moreover the implantation of the eyebrow does not correspond exactly to the re- lief of the arch. While the head of the eyebrow is generally drawn in front of the orbit lower down than its bony edge, the tail passes well above the arch of the orbit, which is perceived at the outer angle of the eye in the form of a projecting and broadly rounded edge. The inclination of the bony arch being clearly oblique below, while the direction of the eyebrows approaches the horizontal, these two lines cross each other in the middle. FACE 191 Volume Peculiarities (5) Total length of the eyebrows (6) Width of the eyebrows J eyeliTows short (^ey^ebrows long \ eyebrows narrow ) eyebrows wide (7) Abundance of implantation j eyebrows scanty of the hairs (eyeftroH'S abundant (or thick) '(S) Position of the maximum of j eyebrows united hairs [maarfmnm (of eyebrow) af tail (9) Direction of the hairs eyebrows penciled eyebrows busby (10) Shade, when it differs from j eyebrows blonde that of the hair and beard ( eyebrows black 58. The characters of relation react on those of form, and inversely; for example: the more the eyebrow is raised above the eyeball the more likely it is to be arched; the more it is depressed upon the cavit}- of the orbit the more rectilinear it is and the greater the tendency of the two heads to approach each other, etc. 59. Thus it would be not only impracticable, but even com- pletely useless, to reply separately, in each particular case, to each of the ten preceding headings. In accordance with the gen- eral instructions relating to the complementary traits, it will be sufficient to note, if there is occasion to do so, one or two very decided characters, using as far as possible the terms indicated in our table. Examples: Syebrows rectilinear, slightly oblique- internal; eyebrows united {by a whorl of hair) and elevated {above the eyes). The words in parenthesis have been introduced by wa}^ of suggestion, and should, in practice, be omitted on the card. 60. The shade of the hair, which it is easj^ to alter, was for- merly the only characteristic habitually noted in ordinary signal- ments in response to the general heading eyebrows. Now this indication possesses a recognitory value worthy of being noted only when it clearly and actually differs from the shade of the hair and beard, a peculiarity not very often met with. 61. We would insist upon the point that the qualifications of position and form : high or low, near or distant, arched or rectili- 192 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION near, relate only to the implantation of the eyebrow observed in a state of repose. If the remarkable form (or position) is due to more or less habitual muscular contraction, the adjectives given above should be replaced by the corresponding substantives, accompanied by the word 7iervo7is. Example: nervous eleva- tion (or drawing together) of the eyebrows. 62. The elevation of the eyebrow by a muscular contraction is distinguished from the naturally elevated implantation in that the first gives the eyebrows a more arched outline and, more espe- cially, ACCENTUATES THE HORIZONTAL WRINKLES OF THE FORE- HEAD (see plate 51, No. 8). Inversely, the nervous drawing together and depression of the head of the eyebrows tend to make the outline less arched or even sinuous, and to accentuate the vertical wrinkles between the eyebrows (see plate 50, Nos. 6, 7, 8 and 9). We will return to this important point in speaking of the wrinkles and of the physiognomical expression. V. The Eyelids (plate 47) 63. A theoretical description of the ej'elids should analyze separately; ist, the dimension and degree of their opening; 2nd, the general direction (or obliquity) of this opening considered particularly in its outer angle; 3rd, the model of the upper ej^elid; 4th, the -model of the lower eyelid. 64. I St. THE OPENING OF THE EYELIDS is considered (a) in relation to the horizontal dimension of the palpebral cleft; , ,, , ^ ^ ( eyelids little slit, hence the two extreme terms: , ,., , ,.' i eyelids much slit. (b) in relation to the degree of their opening, observed ver- tically, hence: \ ^^^^'1^ ^^'"^^ ^^'^«' ( eyelids very open. 65. It happens sometimes that the smallness of the opening of the eye should be attributed more particularly to an habitual low- ering of the upper eyelid. This peculiarity is frequently obser\'ed in one eye alone. It is indicated by: {right or left) Upper eyelid drooping (plate 47, Xo. 10). FACE 195 66. 2nd. The obliquity of the palpebral cleft is more seeming than real. It should be mentioned only when it is very- pronounced, as in the Chinese type, whose e3'es with external angle elevated are familiar to ever}- one. The opposite type is with external angle depressed (plate 47, Nos. 5 and 6). 67. 3rd. The upper eyelid extends vertically from its edge fringed with lashes to the arch of the eyebrow, and may be con- sidered as composed of two superimposed bands, one in the form of a hood, movable, furnished with lashes, which everyone knows, and above it the fixed part, under which the first folds itself up more or less when the eye is open. 68. The characteristic model of the upper eyelid is determined by the form of this fold when the subject is looking straight AHEAD. 69. The expression eyelid covered is used to designate the cases where the fixed part entirely hides the movable portion of the eyelid. This is what is popularly called f/ie veiled eye. The inverse type ie the uncovered eyelid (plate 47, Nos. 7 and 8). 70. This character must not be confounded with the cases where the upper eyehd is brought into the depths of the socket by an exaggerated depression of the eyeball, the shape of which then ceases to be visible (see further § 87, what we say of sunken eyes). 71. The expression rj/^r/z^^ covered (or uncovered) should be re- placed by eyelids overhanging (or re-entering), in those extreme cases where the ej^elid forms either a swelling, hanging over in front, or a hollow (crease) partially isolating the body of the ocular globe. 72. Indicate, if necessary, whether the ^^'^ marked, be of great use in aiding to direct individual recollections towards a determined point. So they will need to be the subject of remark only in the case of subjects who are likeh' to give rise to a special judicial search among the public at large. Besides it would be impossible, for want of space, to give a description of them, even an approxi- mate one, in the paragraph on characteristic traits with the aid of abridged formulae reduced to two or three words; it will be neces- sary, then, whenever supplementary observations of this kind need to be made, to have recourse to the column of sundry infor- mation, on the back of the card. I. The Neck (^Dimensions and Peculiarities) 115. This should be considered in relation to its vertical and horizontal dimensions. To the first point of view correspond the expressions, neck short and neck long, and to the second those of: neck slender (Fr. mince) or tliin^ in opposition to fleshy (Fr. gras) or thick neck. Cases of 3. projecting larynx (in popular language a prominent Adam's apple) , goitre, etc. , should also be noted in examination of the neck. II. Inclination of the Line of the Shoulders (Seen from in Front) 11 6. This character, called also fall of the shoulders, presents two extremes, horizontal shoulders and oblique {ox sloping) shoulders. It is frequently in relation with the length of the neck; a long neck usually accompanies sloping shoulders and a short neck horizontal ones. Its signaletic importance results from the fact that it is, together with the height, the breadth of the shoulders, and to some extent the length of the neck, one of the few elements which may concur in making possible the recognition of a person seen from behind on the public streets. 117. In order to economize the space reserved for the entry of the characteristic traits, this indication should be noted on the line for the shoulder-breadth after the letters z« (abbreviation for the 204 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION word inclinatio7i) by means of one of the letters h, i or h, initials of the adjectives horizontal, intermediate and oblique (see page 176 above, §§ no and iii). III. The Attitude 118. In this study of the ge?ieral appearance of an individual we oppose the attitude, or manner of holding oneself while in repose, to the general demeanor, or manner of conducting one- self (o-a//, ^^5/z«^/a//^;z and facial movement or ''mimicry^. The attitude, when analyzed in its essential parts, is found to consist in: 119. ISt, The CARRIAGE OF THE HEAD AND THE INFLEXION OF THE NECK, characters which nearlj- alwaj'S go together and which we join, for greater speed, under the same bracket. The}' are described by means of the formulae; head thrown back- ward or thrown forward; head bent to left or bent to right. 120. The combination in certain subjects of a neck inclined forward and a head thrown backward is \-er}' characteristic, and should on occasion be made the subject of a special remark. 121. 2nd, The degree of roundness of the back which should be considered according to its two axes: vertically, from the point of view of the vertebral column; horizontally, in relation to the projection of the shoulders, which should not be confounded with their inclination seen from the front. 122. It will be remembered that the arching of the back, when this is permanent (which is recognized by the fact that it cannot be straightened up against the board at the time of the measuring of the height) should always be indicated by a numerical entry under the heading vaulting (see page 102, § 10), which will take the place of anj- other remark. As to the degree of projection of the shoulders, it should be indicated b}' means of the terms: shoulders effaced, shoulders projecting. 123. 3rd. We note finally, but for memory onh', the posture of the arms and particularly of the hands, which may be habitually placed on the thighs, in the pockets of the troiisers; in the a}mholes of the ivaistcoat, ox folded across the breast. The GENE.RAI. CHARACTERS 205 correct attitude of the military man is known to everyone, and the bearing of the habitual criminal is not less so to prison officials. 124. Synthetic terms. The expression attitude rigid is applied to subjects who constantly hold their back neck and head in an erect and constrained position. The opposite is the stoop- ing or careless attitude, round -shoulders, etc. IV. General Demeanor 125. The general demeanor (Fr. allure), meaning manners, habits, etc., may be analyzed from the point of view: ist, of the gait(Fr. demarche); 2nd, of 'Oclq. gestures; 3rd, of the "mimicry" [see § 130] of the glance; and 4th, the mimicry of the other organs of the face. 126. ist. Thk gait. An accurate and complete study of the gait would demand developments altogether out of proportion to the plan of this manual. There .should simply be noted, on occasion: gait very slow or very rapid, with short steps or with long steps, light or heavy, tripping (Fr. sautillante) or sedate iVx.posce); or again: gait stiff and measured, the inverse of which are dandiHed, gawky (Fr. degingandee): swinging (Fr. dehanchee), or unsteady (Fr. C7i chalojipe), according as the eccentricity to be reported is connected with the legs, the haunches or the shoulders. The only characteristic which is to be indicated in all cases is gait limping, which in reality constitutes a peculiar mark. 127. 2nd. GESTICUI.AT10N is the voluntary or instinctive movement which we give to our body, and especially to our hands, arms and head, to emphasize the expression of our thoughts. The two extremes of this characteristic are, on the one hand: gesticulation abundant, and, on the other, complete absence of gesticulation. Every nationality, every social class, every profession, so to speak, has a gesticulation, as well as an attitude and gait, more or less characteristic, which an attentive observer may often recognize. 128. 3rd. The glance (Fr. regard) is analyzed in this par- agraph exclusively with regard to the direction and movement of the eyeball. 2o6 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION Its direction will be straight or oWiQire, according as the person examined looks habitually straight ahead or sideways. Considered in relation to its movement, the glance is steady or unsteady, slow or quick. With the unsteady glance is connected the flying glance, the opposite of which is the glance which looks one fixedly in Iheface, or frank glance. 129. Synthetic term. The expression glance sliding (Vr. en coulisse) designates an eyeball at once mobile and oblique with an eyelid having only a small opening. 130. 4th. Physiogxomical mimicry. We designate thus the movements of the face and muscular contractions which give the glance its expression and which always accompany, more or less, the speech and gesture. This heading is inserted here only for memory, for it will almost always be a repetition of the notation of the wrinkles or of the habitual expression of the physiognomy. 131. Note should always be made, however, of the convulsive and intermittent grimace called tic, indicating as far as possible the side of the face and the organ which is its seat. Examples: tic of left angle of mouth; tic of entire right side of face, etc. 132. Personal habits. Has the subject examined a taste or passion for tobacco, and in what form: cigarettes, cigars, pipe or quid? Does he take snuff f Does he bite his nails ? V. The Voice and Language 133. I St. The quality or timbre of the voice is one of the most distinctive characteristics of the individuality. Every one knows that we recognize our relatives, our friends, all persons with whom we are in daily contact, at a distance,] from one room to another, by the mere sound of their voice. Unfortunately, save by means of the phonograph, no characteristic is more difficult to note. 134. Account should be taken of voices particular!}' deep or shrill (Vr. grave or aigii) , the falsetto voice, a feminine voice in a man or a masculine voice in a woman. MISCELLANEOUS CHARACTERISTICS 207 Note that one is often tempted to attribute to a peculiarity in the timbre of the voice what in reahty is only the remains of a provin- cial or foreign accent transmitted in the family. 135. 2nd. The principal organic vices of articulation are : (i) The ,pronounciation of every hard .y like a z (Fr. ZG- Zaietnent) . Example: "Summer is here" = "Zummer is here." [Akin to this is the lisping which is much more frequently noticed among English-speaking people.] (2) The pronunciation of j and 5 in the same manner as ^A (Fr. chuintenient) . Example: " Shummer ish here." (3) Stammering (Fr. bcgaiemcnf), which results from a nervous hesitation at the beginning of certain words and from the doubling of certain syllables, etc. It varies in degree and may often be cured. (4) The pronounciation of the r sound in the throat, by means of the uvula, instead of emitting it by means of the vibration of the tongue against the palate (Fr. grasseyement) . This is one of the characteristics of W\^fauburg accent of the Parisian gamin. 1 36. 3rd. An accurate knowledge of the different accents which characterize various portions of the country would be of great value in the identification of tcnknown persons who conceal their identity, if in so delicate a matter theory could supply the place of practice. Information of this kind when reliable need be recorded only in case of subjects who are evidently concealing their name. 137. This remark applies equally to the observation of the foreign accent. It is evident, for example, that it would be idle to describe as having an English accent a subject who gave indis- putable evidence of British origin; while the mention J^nglish accentor absence ofMnglish accent, or again, simulation of English accent, might be important indications, in lack of others, if they applied to a prisoner who claimed to be of this na- tio7iality, and who was the object of a judicial inquiry. 138. The distinction between the principal foreign accents, when one's ear has been accustomed to them, is certainlj^ easier and more marked than that between provincial accents. The fol- lowing remarks will serve at least to direct the observation and as- sist the memory. They are based on the general fact that each 2o8 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION nationality carries into its manner of speaking a for- eign language the pronunciation, the grammatical rules and the idiums of its own language (i). The French, Spaniards, Italians, Germans, and almost all other nations give a different value to the vowels; the English e is pro- nounced like long a, long a as ah, and i as c; the ti is often pro- nounced 00 or (especially in French) coy , * The French frequently give a peculiar nasal sound to certain combinations, and especially the combinations I'/ig-, ang, ong and ung, which are more or less peculiar to the English tongue. They are apt also to roll the ?' in syllables such as bcr, ter, por, and to pronounce ch like sh when it should be pronounced tsh. The English w, which is absent in French and many other lan- guages, is very commonly pronounced v. The English th is frequently mispronounced by foreigners, few other languages (with the notable exception of Spanish, in which it is very common) having an exact equivalent for it. Frenchmen usually substitute for it the sound of z; while persons of Teutonic stock pronounced it d. 139. The Germans, who in their language give almost the same value to b and/, to d and /, to hard g (spelled and always pronounced ^aj' in German) and k, and especially to v and/", find considerable difficulty in modifying this custom when speaking English or French. Good, for instance, would be pronounced by them almost like coot. Similarly, the French and English J, which are very unlike, but for neither of which is an exact equiv- alent afforded by most other languages, will often be pronounced sk or ch; the French word y^zV (pronounced zhw'a), for example, would be pronounced by them choix {shwd), and the English word joke singularly recalls in their mouth the sound of the word choke. 140. The Italians ma}^ give to words commencing with a ch (pronounced k in Italian) the sound of the latter letter, and to either a ch or sh that of i- or z. Example: shoicldeT-^^soulder; shall^zall; charity^karity . In a word, the Italian finds some (1) [As this and the following paragraphs in the original approach the subject from the French standpoint, they would be manifestly inapplicable to the use of the English- speaking observ-ers without alterations. Much liberty has, therefore, been taken in this instance with the author's text, which elsewhere is followed with scrupulous accuracy.] MISCELI,ANEOUS CHARACTERISTICS 209 means of softening even the soft consonant sounds; while he is apt to dwell on the vowel elements of his words. 141. The Spaniard, on the contrary, succeeds in hardening even the hard consonants; he will pronounce z as ts and give j a guttural sound which might be described as an aspirated j)/. The Spaniards, with the exception of the Castilians, generally make no distinction between b and v, and have a tendency to pro- nounce b in place of v. They say that one of the French words which presents the greatest difficulty to a Spaniard is that of voyageur {vwa-ya-zher'') , which he wall pronounce approximately as bwa-ya-yhair. To sum up, the noun jet, for example, would be pronounced zhet by a Frenchman, diet by a German, sayt by an Italian z.u6.y'het by a Spaniard. 142. The Russians have no very strongly characterized defect in articulation as regards any one special letter; they may be recognized hy their sing-song intonation. Scandinavians, Swedes, Norwegians and Danes have a some- what sing-song pronunciation like the Russians, while making the same changes in the consonants, though in a less degree, which characterize the Teutonic accent. 143. The sing-song mode of speaking leads us to speak of the part played in the language of foreigners by what grammarians call the tonic accent. The Frenchmen of the north of France pronounce words of several syllables uniformly, but with a perceptible tendency to dwell on the final syllable; while in English, as in most other European languages, one or more syllables in the viiddle of the word are strongly accented at the expense of the rest, which sometimes become almost imperceptible to the unpracticed ear. The choice of the syllable accented varies greatly in different nations, and no very fixed rules on this point can be laid down. 144. The presence in the speech of grammatical inaccuracies of foreign origin, such as mistakes of gender and agreement, the er- roneous use of prepositions, the use of uncouth phrases, etc. , often denote the foreign origin of an individual more surely than the pe- culiar accent, which may sometimes be diminished to the point of being comparable to, or even less pronounced than, that of many natives from out-of-the-way parts of the country. 2IO DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION 145. Inversely, grammatical correctness, even when joined to a strong accent, should always lead to the supposition that at least the learning of the language commenced in infancy. Thus, for instance, many Alsatians, while understanding the French language in all its most delicate details and speaking it in their families since childhood, have preserved a much stronger accent than some Bavarians or Prussians who, having gained a knowledge of the language only by means of long-continued efforts, have succeeded, as a natural result of their studies method- ically pursued, in preserving themselves from many faults of pro- nunciation. VI. The Habiliments 146. Is the person carefully attended to or neglected, clean, dirty or even repulsive ? Are the garments old or new ? Do they they look as if they were made to measure, bought ready-made or picked up at a second-hand store ? Do they seem to be of native make? Are there any tailor's marks or other similar indications on the flaps, the lining, the buttons, the buckles, etc.? Does the subject wear socks and drawers, does he use a handkerchief? Has he a starched shirt, a standing or turned down collar? Is his linen marked, and with what letters? What is the shape and quality of his hat and his shoes? Does he carry various utensils, and par- ticularly those found on nearly all professional tramps, to-wit : a pocket mirror, a cake of soap, comb, etc.? 147. All these obser\^ations and many more of the same kind, which stand in evident relation to the signalment, are of great im- portance for the establishment of the conclusions which it remains for us to formulate in the following paragraph. VII. General Impressions and Presumptions Regarding the Social Status 148. We mean by these terms the more or less vague general idea which we receive from seeing an individual and exchanging a few words with him. His physical description, the height excepted, has little to do with this. This instinctive impression results from the combination of such fugitive characters as those which we have analyzed in the preceding pages : the wrinkles, MISCELI/ANEOU. CHARACTERISTICS 211 complexion, facial expressions, bearing, rapidity of speech, accent, tone, faults or extravagant pretensions of the language, the man- ner of saluting, of wiping the nose, of spitting, of smoking, of eat- ing, and finally the care, the elegance and quality of clothing, etc. 149. In other words, Xhe general ivipression is the direct result of the race, nationality and social antecedents; of the bringing up, the education and the profession. Hence its great signaletic in- terest, and hence also the greater facility of defining it when we go back to its causes. 150. Thus one can distinguish, without exactly knowing how, the resident of a city, the countryman, the mechanic, the ordinary day-laborer, the salesman, the old warehouse bookkeeper, the sailor, the soldier, the horse-dealer, the declassed, and the various kinds of professional offenders : the tramp, the beggar, the thief, the dive-keeper, the pederist, the procurer, the fomenter of rebel- lion, etc. 151. As all these indications are only suppositions, they should always be formulated in the column of sundry information in a hypothetical form : has the appearance of a farm- hand, of a declassed; seems accustomed to prison life, etc. 152. When there is question more particularly of a city work- man the examination of the callosities and professional marks by a medical lawyer will often verify, and sometimes even reveal, the kind of trade exercised by the subject. THIRD PART STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS PRELIMINARY NOTIONS, AND DEFINITION OF THE ANATOMICAL FACES 1 . The obligation of describing and localizing the pecuharities in a manner at once brief and accurate necessitates the use of some anatomical terms. The reader will learn them gradually as they are needed. But it is necessary at this point for us to at once make it clear what is meant by the words plane or face, which are the basis of every description and which we have to make use of immediately. 2. Whatever part of the human bod}^ ma}^ be under considera- tion, there may always be distinguished in it ioMX faces (or sides): one anterior, one posterior and tzco lateral. In the trunk, for example, the anterior face is represented by the front of the chest; the posterior face by the whole region of the back; and the lateral faces by the right and left sides (plate 6i). 3. In the limbs the lateral faces are distinguished as internal face and external face, according as they are turned to or from the individual. 4. The subject to be examined is supposed to be in a position similar to that of the ' ' soldier without arms, ' ' the arms hanging along the body, the little finger on the seam of the trousers, and the palm of the hand turned completely fonvard (i); that is to say, in a plane parallel to that of the face and the chest (plate 62). (i) The anatomical position differs from that of \.\i^ soldier without arms \xi\.\i.A\.V!\& palm of the hand is here turned completely to the front instead of slightly, as in the more natural position prescribed by the military regulations. Other ends other means. We would remark also that the military tactics uses the words turned outward where, from the anatomical point of view, one should say turned forward. (212) DEFIXITIOX OF AXATOMICAI, FACES 21$ 5. Ill this position the fold of the elbow (in French popularly called la saignee, " the trench "), the palm of the hand and the side of the fingers opposite the nails are included in the anterior face (plate 63), while the elbow, the back of the hand and of the fingers, as well as the nails, belong to the posterior face (plate 64). 6. The internal face extends from the arm-pit to the little finger, and the external face from the shoulder to the thumb. The faces of each finger are designated on the same principle, according as they are or are not turned towards the individual (plates 65 and 67 ). 7. Thus in the forefinger or index, for example, the face which in the position of the soldier udthout arms described above is turned to the front is called the anterior face of the index; that opposed to it the posterior face; while the edge which touches the thumb is called the external face of the i?idex, and that which touches the viediiis (middle finger), the internal face of the index. Similarly, the side of the thumb or pollex which touches the index is the internal face of the pollex, and the reverse the external face of the pollex. 8. When a cicatrix [scar] or mark is situated exactly between two faces, this intermediary position is expressed by joining the two terms by a hyphen: antero- internal, external ante- rior , postero- external, etc. (see from this point of view, plate 67, the spaces inclosed in the dotted lines a, b, c, d). 9. In practice, the word face is omitted for the sake of greater speed. Example: index left external, instead of left ifidex, external face. 10. It should be observed that, thanks to the use of the words external and internal, the terms of the description will be identi- cally the same, whether in case of the right hand or the left hand. These expressions have the additional advantage of avoiding the clumsy repetition and juxtaposition of the words 7-ight and left in formulae such as: left face of right mediiis, right face of right auricular [little finger] , etc. 11. By analogy, and with the same object, the words before and behind are often used. Example: cicatricial point at 8 centimetres behind (or before) left teat. 214 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS 12. In the case of the hand and forearm the distinction between the faces is rendered considerably more difficult by the ease with which these parts turn on themselves in the direction of their greater axis. 13. When the subject to be examined brings his hands for- ward, as it is indispensable for him to do in order to facilitate the investigations of the obser\^er, it is nearl}' always the back of the hand which is presented anteriorly while the external faces (which are those looking towards the thumb) will be turned inwardly. 14. The obsen^er, in order to disentangle himself in the desig- nation of the faces of the superior member, should have recourse to the following mnemonic formula: "For the back of the hand THE FACES ARE REVERSED." These words, repeated to himself whenever he has occasion to localize a mark situated on the back of the hand or of the forearm, will remind him that in such a case whatever appears to be hiternal should be dictated external, whatever appears to be anterior should be dictated posterior, and vice versa (plates 63 and 64). 15. Every mark or peculiar sign should be anah'zed in rela- tion (i): Chapter I (description) Chapter II (localization) a) to its natiiTC (or designation ) ; b) to its form (and in certain cases to the direc- tion towards which it opens ) ; c ) to its dimensions; d) to its general direction (or inclination); e) locative prepositions; /) one or two points or parts to its situation, of the body (called da- expressedby J /"«;« points'j; means of 1 S) the indication of the face f when there is question of one of the two upper limbs). (1) The letters from a to s, which govern here the sequence of the paragraphs, refer to the columns of the large synoptical table, outside of the test, relating to the peculiar marks (77a). CHAPTER I.— DESCRIPTION OF THE MARK TO BE NOTED a) Nature. d) Form and Opening. c) Dimensions. d ) Direction. a) NATURE OR DESIGNATION 1. A cicatrix [scar] may come from a blow with a knife, from an abscess, from a gunshot wound, etc., or more simply from a cut, from a boil, etc. 2. When the origin of the cicatrix, as explained by the sub- ject himself, seems probable, it should be noted in the signaletic statement. But, for greater speed, the word cicatrix is then suppressed. Example: abscess under (the) middle (of the) ri^ht J3.W, instead of cicatrix of abscess under the middle of ; furuncle [that is, boil^ on (the) chest, etc., instead of cicatrix of furuncle 3. The consideration which should take precedence of all others in the choice of the scars and marks to be noted is that of their duration, of their permanence. The worst mistake that an observer could make would be to note as an indelible mark some identifying sign which is liable to disappear. 4. In case of doubt as to the permanence of a sign which in other respects would have some signaletic interest, the word transient (Fr. passager), followed by an interrogation mark in parenthesis, is added; when there is question of a cicatrix not yet closed the word fresh is used, and if, while being closed, it does not seem to have yet assumed its final aspect, the word recent. 5. The indications of birth-marks (Fr. envies) are accompanied by the qualification that their possessor gives them and w^hich generally defines sufficiently their aspect; as coffee mark, wine mark, buff mark (Fr. de couenne), ffies (Fr. mouches), straw- berries (Vr.f raises), etc. The beauty spots (small brown moles) which anatomists term pigmeyitary punctiform naevi, and which in signaletic style we designate briefly nsevus, should be carefully (215) 2l6 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS described and localized. Ou some individuals they are too numer- ous to be separately noted. In such cases the principal ones should be selected and the words, and many others, added. When there is occasion, their aspect and diameter, etc., are noted. For instance, naevus, hairy, of i c. on 6. Tattooing. So long ago as October 23, 1849, a French ministerial circular recommended to record the objects represented by the tattooing and not to describe them merely by the general expression of tattooed. 7. We may mention among the objects mostly frequently rep- resented : an anchor, a corded anchor, a heart {pierced, flaming or bleeding, that is to say, with red tears) ; a dagger, a biistofa woman in right {ox left) profile or full face; a naked woma^i, standing or lying down, in tights, in such or such an obscene positioji; historic personages, in head, bust, three-quarters or full-length view; a mus- keteer, etc. , or, again, an incomplete anchor, heart, or profile, a shape- less tattooing , an unfinished miLsketeer, etc. 8. In case of doubt as to the meaning of a scene or a personage or an inscription interrogate the prisoner and record his explana- tion. The text of inscriptions should be given exactly, imitat- ingf on the card the form of the letters and the mistakes in spellings, if there are any. Thus the words of the tattooing in plate 63 would be set down : Pour la, drawn in italic charac- ters, and VIE, in capitals of slender body; and there should be added : underneath, a shaded heart surcharging the word MARIE. 9. From the point of view of identification tattooings have the disadvantage of being easily altered by covering them with other designs (a process which we call surcharging") , or even completely obliterated. So, whatever may be their number and importance, they should never cause the neglect of the other peculiar marks, nczvuses, cicatrices, etc. , previously enumerated. 10. It may be recognized that a tattooing is a surcharge hy its deeper shades and its broadened and too numerous lines. Often the old inscription remains and may still be read under the new; in such cases both should be mentioned, as in the preceding exam- ple. When the darkness of the design indicates a hidden imder DESCRIPTION OF THE MARK 217 one, which, however, there is no chance of deciphering, one should never neglect to add the remark : a2)j)areutly a surcharge. Example : shaded tattooing, apparently a surcharge, representing Jean Bart at full length (standing) his right hand on a cask of powder. 1 1 . The effacing of tattoo marks, which can be seemed onlj^ by the superficial destruction of a portion of the skin, alwaj's leaves a cicatricial tissue, the appearance of which recalls that of an old burn, and whose form reproduces more or less exactly the original design. Very often some points or spots of unobHterated tattooing will remain as evidence in the middle of the cicatrix. Marks of this kind should be observed with the greatest care, in strict conformity, as regards the shape, direction, dimensions and location, with the instructions of the following sections. In such a case one should take care to mention the probable origin of the scar; for example : cicatrix of a hum apparently hiding a tattoo, adding, whenever possible, the nature or shape of the tat- tooing which is supposed to have been effaced in whole or in part. b) FORM AXD OPENING OF THE SIGN 12. The peculiar marks, and especially linear cicatrices, that is, scars resembling a line, a mark without thickness, have a shape which should be qualified either as rectilinear or as curved in the more simple cases, which are at the same time the ones most frequently met with. 13. The terms sinuous, in a broken line, zigzag (Fr. en dents descie — saw-toothed), arrow-headed (Fr. en fer defieche') hooked fFr. en crochet) in a liorse-slioc (Vr.fer a cheval) in the form of a^, of a Z, of an X, of a + {cross-shaped) are less often employed. 14. As for the words oval, oblong, circular, triangular, they are applied especially to the non-linear marks, that is, to those which show a certain width as well as length. 15. In the case of curved scars, and in general all those which present any hollow or concavity whatever, the indication of the direction of the eavitj' should be added immediately after the description of the shape. We understand by this the indication 2l8 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS of the face toward which the cavity is turned when the subject is supposed to be brought into the anatomical position similar to that of the soldier without arms (§2 and following). Thus a scar in the form of a V will be called with cavity superior when it appears in the normal position of that letter, and with cavity inferior when it is reversed : A . 16. I,et us examine from this point of view the various scars on the subject in plate 61. The cicatrix on the neck, No. i, will be called rectilinear, although, closely observed, it perhaps shows a slight concavity; that on the shoulder, No. 2, the gen- eral direction of w^hich is rigorously vertical, will be qualified as curved with cavity posterior, while the two situated on the forearms, Nos. 3 and 4, will be called with cavity superior. In plate 62, fig. i, under No. 8, above the left thumb, we find a cicatrix curved with cavity inferior. 17. To sum up, a curved line whose general direction is hori- zontal can only have a [con] cavity turned .fz^/>^r/^r/^' (upwards) or inferiorly (downwards). It may be considered, for the sake of greater simplicity, that the same is true for all the scars whose general direction is oblique, that is, neither exactly horizontal nor exactly vertical. But it is necessary for these latter (the distinctly vertical, which are, however, but seldom met with,) to resort to the terms anterior or posterior, hiternal or external, according to the position of the mark to be described. C) DIMENSION OF THE SIGN 18. The unit of measurement for the individual signs, as for the osseous lengths of the signalment, is the centimetre. Thus 07ie, two, //;;r^ centimetres will be written 1,2, 3, etc., while one, two, three millimetres will be recorded under the form: o. i — 0.2 — 0.3 — etc. 19. The dimensions, whether in centimetres or millimetres, are indicated only approximately, without seeking an absolute exactitude, for which in the case of the peculiar marks there is no longer any reason. Beyond the third centimetre, therefore, the millimetres are rarely counted. A scar may measure i or DESCRIPTION OF THE MARK 219 1.8; 2 or 2.5; 3 or 4 centimetres; but a scar measuring exactly 5 centimetres 7 millimetres would be described as being 6 cen- timetres. 20. When the scar is circular the diameter only is noted, while both diameters are indicated in the case of oblong or oval scars. For instance, a rectilinear scar 4 centimetres long by about 3 mil- limetres wide would be recorded in the following form: cicatrix rectilinear of 4/0.3, the two figures of dimension being placed one above the other and separated by an oblique line. 2 1 . Every cicatrix marked with a single figure of dimension is from that fact understood to be linear, that is resembling a line having no width, without any other mention of this needing to be made in the description. d ) GENERAL, DIRECTION OR INCI,INATlON 22. The general direction of a mark is vertical, oblique or horizontal. 23. To determine the direction of scars situated on the arms and hands, the subject must be imagined to be standing in the position of l/ie soldier withoid arms. It goes without saj-ing that there could be no question of indicating the direction of cicatricial points, circular scars, moles, etc. 24. In the description of scars only a relative precision should be attributed to the qualificatives of inclination. Strictly speak- ing, no scar is as horizontal as a spirit-level nor as vertical as a plumb-line. If such a precise signification were given, all scars would be termed oblique and that Vv'ord would lose its value. In doubtful cases one may relieve one's self of embarrassment by the use of the formulae nearly vertical, for the directions which approach the vertical, and slightly oblique, for those which are not far from the horizontal. 25. In the description of oblong scars, distinguish between cicatrices which are oblique internal or oblique external and those which are oblique anterior or oblique posterior, according as an imaginary- prolongation of the line of the cica- trix from above to below would extend inwardly or outwardly, fon\'ard or backward, in relation to the subject when supposed to be standing in the anatomical position. 220 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS 26. We would recall here the mnemonic formula that we have given in the preparatory remarks (p. 214, § 14;: For the back OF THE HAND OR FOREARM THE OBLIQUITY OF THE SCARS IS REVERSED. Tlius the cicatrices Nos. 2 and 3 (plate 64, fig, 2) will be noted as oblique external, although at first sight, prolonged from above to below (that is to say downward), the}- are directed inzvard in the drawing; while the mark No. 3 of figure I will be qualified as oblique internal, although it appears to have an onizcard inclination. 27. It is easy, in fact, to see that, if the arms represented were supposed to be turned around so as to be brought into the position of the soldier without arms, all the scars indicated would by this movement be brought into a direction diametrically opposite to that of the figure; while the oblique internal mark which is situ- ated on the upper arm (fig. i, No. i) would remain almost unchanged whatever might be the position of the forearm. CHAPTER II.— LOCALIZATION OF THE MARK TO BE NOTED e) REMARKS ON THE USE OF THE LOCATIVE PREPOSITIONS 1 . The localization of the signs in relation to the various datum points and parts of the body is expressed by means of the follow- ing prepositions, which should be used in preference to all others : on, above, under, middle, across. 2. 071 denotes the direct superposition of the mark on the designated spot. For example : furuncle [boil] on yth vertebra would signify that the scar is situated directly on the prominent vertebra of the neck. 3. To express that the sign is above or beneath a certain part designated the words above and under should be emploj^ed, and should always be preceded by the preposition at, itself accom- panied by the number of centimetres intervening. Example : furuncle at 6 above ^th vertebra and at 4 to left column. 4. The word under (Fr. sous) is used instead of beneath (Fr. dessous) in dictation as it is shorter and less likely to be confused wnth its opposite, above (dessus). 5. The words middle and across replace the preposition ^;z, when the observer wishes to express that the mark to be described is equally distant from the two extremities of the datum point. Example: naevus middle left eyebrow; mole at 3 under middle left half of mouth . 6. We would remark, finally, that, while the preposition 0/ precedes a figure of dimension, the preposition at announces a value of relation, an interv^al, a position : at so many centijnetres under or above. 7. The numerous examples given in this chapter will show that, amid all the elliptical formulse to which the cicatricial vocab- (221) 222 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS ulary has recourse, these two prepositions when followed by a number are never suppressed and could not be without making the phrase lose all its clearness. 8. The word of, on the contrary, when it does not precede a figure of dimension, as well as the articles a, an, the, and even the preposition 07i, when the latter is itself followed by a comple- mentary preposition (c;z the rtiiddle, on the cross line, etc.,) should be omitted whenever possible. Thus the complete phrase : a ncevus situated on the middle of the left half of the lower lip will be briefly announced : nsevus middle left half lower lip. f) SPECIAI. DESIGNATION OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE BODY; TERMS AND ANOMALIES PECULIAR TO EACH 9. The description of the peculiar signs should begin with : I. Left upper arm and forearm, then left hand; II. Right upper arm and forearm, then right hand; III. Face and front of the neck; IV. Chest, front of shoulders, and part of stomach situated above the waist-band of the trousers; V. The back of the neck and the region of the back; VI. The other parts of the body where there are any anomalies to be noted. ID. By making it a rule to always begin the examinatioii with the left upper member before passing to the right, and, in general, with the left half before the right, the chances are diminished of a confusion between the words right and left, which is always very detrimental. II. Each of the six divisions enumerated in the preceding paragraph should, moreover, appear in the statement of scars in its proper order, with its roman numeral in the margin. In order to take every additional precaution against confusion between the right and left sides, it is the rule, in spite of the presence of the roman numerals I and II which separate the peculiarities of the left member from those of the right, to repeat the words right and left at the end of each localization of a mark observed on these parts. LOCALIZATION OF THE MARK 223 12. The object of the reman numerals reproduced on all the signaletic cards is to as far as possible arrange the scars and peculiarities in distinct groups according to the parts of the body, and thus to facilitate the comparisoJi of the peculiar marks in two signalments suspected to refer to the same individual. 13. This is an important means op order the non- observance OF which would render comparisons op this kind infinitely longer (i). 14. The absence of peculiarities in any division is indicated by a dash. I and II. Right and Left Upper Arm, Forearm, and Hand (plates 63 to 68) 15. a) The UPPER arm commences at the shoulder and ends at the elbow, which we call the humero-cubital articulation, and by abbreviation cubital simply. The elbow, when its four faces are considered, is divided into: cubital posterior (or elbow proper), cubital internal, cubital external, and \hQ fold of the elboiu, which, by analogy and abbreviation, we call cubital anterior (plates 63 and 64). 16. It is these two extremities, shoulder and cubital (2), which serve as datum points in designating the location of a scar on the arm. Examples: Cicatrix curved with cavity posterior of 7 vertical on shoulder left external (plate 61, No. 2). Cicatrix sinuous of g/05 vertical at 4 above cubital left posterior (plate 62, fig. 2, No. 3). Naevus at 11 above cubital left external (plate 63, fig. I, No. i). Cicatrix rectilinear of 2 oblique internal at 4 above cubital left antero- external (plate 64, fig. i. No. i). (1) It is useless over and above the roman numerals to number separately each of the marks already grouped under the same chapter. On the ordinary signaletic cards the peculiarities noticed on the same part of the body are separated from each other only by h&ias put on different lines. It is, then, only for facilitating the demonstrations, and especially references to remarks on the figures, that most of the examples givea in this volume have been provided vrith a special serial number. (2) In signaletic extracts intended to be published or read in court, etc., be careful to replace the abridged expression of cubital anterior, cubital posterior, etc., by the com- plete and more correct formula of anterior face, posterior face, etc., of the articu- lation of the elbow. 224 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS 17. b) The FOREARM is limited above by the elbow (or cubital) and below by the wrist (plate 63), datum points which are to the forearm what the shoulder and cubital articula- tion are to the upper arm. Examples: Cicatrix curved with cavity superior of 5/03, oblique external, at 3 above wrist left anterior (plate 64, fig. i, No. 4). An anchor of 6/3 at 6 under cubital right anterior (plate 64, fig. 2, No. 3). 18. c) There are distinguished on the hand (plates 65 and 67): ist, on the anterior face, the palm; 2nd, on the posterior face, the back of the band, not including the fingers; then come, 3rd, the five finger's or digits, which we have already enumer- ated while distinguishing the faces, to- wit : the pollex (or thumb), the index (first finger), the meditts (middle finger), the annular (third finger) and the auricular (Httle finger). 19. Each finger, the thumb excepted, is composed of three phalanges v;h.\ch. are joined to each other by articulations called joints. Conformably to custom, we begin the enumeration of the phalanges and the joints at the upper extremities: first joint and first phalanx ; secojid joint and second phalanx ; third joint and third phalanx. Thus the first joint is contiguous with the palm in front and with the back of the hand behind. ( i ) 20. The thumb has only two joints and two phalanges. The part of the hand which joins it to the wrist has received, in sig- naletic practice, the name of base of the thumb. (l) Anatomists will remark that the articular datum points, elbow, wrist and espe- cially the finger-joints are determined, in signaletic practice, not by the theoretical line of articulation, the precise localization of which would be somewhat difficult, but by the folds and furrows of the skin which reveal it outwardly. As a result the datum points for the anterior faces are never situated precisely on the same horizontal plane as the corresponding ones for the posterior faces. Thus, considered in the soldier without arms, the datum line of the anterior wrist is situated two centimetres lower down than that of the posterior wrist. But the difference is especially noticeable in the case of the first joints of the fingers, the thumb excepted. While, in the posterior face, our datum points correspond to the anatomical line of articulation which passes through the numbers 2, 3 and 4 (plate 67), in the anterior we take as a base line the folds on the edge of the palm (see j', plate 65) ; that is to say, a position more than two centimetres and a half lower down than that of the posterior face. Hence, there may occasionally be some hesitation in the precise localization of signs situated on the lateral faces, which thus find themselves astride between two datum points. But the accurate determination of the anatomical line of the joint would have presented to our officers mauy more difficulties and afforded still less rapidity. LOCALIZATION OF THE MARK 225 21. The Space between each finger is defined thus: between poUex and index, between index and niedius, between medius and annular, between annular and auricular (plate 67). Peculiarities Special to Regions I a7id II 22. In the posterior space betwee^i the thumb and index there are often found small tattooings, anchors, hearts, initials, etc., of very great signaletic value. 23. The fingers may be amputated by the last phalanx, by the two last phalanges or by all three phalanges. 24. Very often, especially as a result of a felon or whitlow (^panaris), the last phalanx is merely injured without being posi- tively removed; the finger is then said to be shortened (Fr. raccourci ) . 25. The cases where a remaining stump of a nail is more or less curved or deviated should also be noted. Fingers which have been crushed anteriorly often have the nail thickened. An injury at the root of the nail may cause what we call a striated nail, a common peculiarity, of great permanence and easy to describe, which is noted abbreviatively thus : nail niedius left striated (plate 68, No. 4). 26. The scars and cuts on the fingers should be carefully described whenever it is evident that their imprints will remain for life. 27. However, when their number exceeds four or five on each hand, only the principal ones need be noted. Faint marks, which might be overlooked at a subsequent examination, are preceded by the adjective slight. 28. The joints of the fingers, and in general any of the articu- lations, are likely to be ankylosed, either slightly, partially or completely. In the first case the movement is merely impeded, while in the last all movement is impossible. In complete ankylosis it must be specified whether the two members are united in a straight line or at a right or obtuse angle (see the remarks on the measuring of the fingers, First Part, page 125, § 36 and following). 226 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS III. Face, Ears, and Anterior Face of Neck (plates 69 to 72) 29. It is sufl&cient to recall, without defining them, the different parts of the face which may be the seat of peculiar marks, or serve as datum points for the indication of their position. They are well known to every one, and have already been analyzed in the descriptive part of these Instructions. 30. They are, commencing above, the scalp and the line of implantation of the hair; the frontal bosses, right and left; and, below, the root of the nose; then the eye- brows, which are divided into internal point or head of the eyebrow (right or left) ; external point or tail of the eyebrow (right or left); and middle of the eyebrow (right or left). 31. Then come : the left eye and the right eye, with their upper and lower eyelids which are noticed to have an internal and an external angle; the ridge and the base of the nose, which together form what is called the profile of the nose; the wing {right or left) of the nose; the tip of the nose; the under part of the nose and the opening of the nostrils; the chin, divided into the point of the chin and the under part of the chin. 32. If from the chin we ascend obliquely toward the ear, we meet the lower part of the cheek, and, immediately below it, the jawbone or maxillary (right or left), 33. There are often obser\'ed in scrofulous persons abscesses worthy of remark under the maxillaries, at about 5 or 6 centi- metres under the lobe of the ear. 34. Above we find the cheek proper, then the cheek-bone (Fr. pommette) , and above and behind it the temple. In regard to the ear, alread}' described in the Second Part, we may mention especialh^ the little cartilage of the tragus and the lobe, both very convenient points of reference for the location of scars on the cheek and neck. Examples of Peculiar Marks to be Noted ujider N^o. Ill Cicatrix rectilinear of 2, horizontal, at 3 above eye- brow, left, half external (plate 72, No. i). Cicatrix rectilinear of 1/02, oblique to left, at i above root of nose (plate 72, No. i). LOCALIZATION OF THE MARK 227 Nsevus at a under external angle of left eye (plate 72, No. 5) . Scrofula with cavity superior, of 4, oblique ante- rior, at 6 above and to left larynx under maxillary (plate 62, No. 6). Furuncle at 1.5 above external point right eyebrow (plate 70, No. i). Cicatrix triangular of 0.7 at 3 before tragus right (plate 70, No. 2). 36. On the anterior face of the neck there is remarked the projection of the larynx (commonly known as Adam's apple), and lower down, at the top of the chest, is the fork of the ster- num, abbreviated to fork simply; both valuable datum points for designating the position of the moles, birth-marks and scars of which this region is often the seat. Example: Nsevus hairy at 1.5 under larynx (plate 72, No. 7), IV. Chest, etc. (plates 73 and 74) 37. The datum points for the chest, or more generally for the whole ajiterior face of the trunk, are: the fork, already men- tioned, the right or left nipple or teat, the umbilicus (or navel) and the median. 38. By median we understand an imaginary line which would divide the body into two equal and symmetrical parts, passing down the anterior face: through the middle of the forehead, the profile of the nose and chin, the fork, the navel and the crotch (plate 62, figs. I and 2, line X Y). Although it is rarely util- ized as regards the face, it is in constant use for the chest. 39. In the formulae of localization it should appear only in the second place, after a first more definite indication with relation to the fork, to the nipple, or to the navel. Examples of Peculiar Marks to be Noted under No. IV Nsevus at 6 under larynx and at 3 to left median (plate 74, No. i). Cicatrix of operation for croup of 2.5, vertical, at 3 under larynx (plate 74, No. 2). 228 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS Cicatrix rectilinear of 3.5, oblique external, at 7 under fork and at 3 to left median (plate 74, No. 5). Nsevus at 2 above and behind right teat (plate 74, No. 6). Very deep cicatrix curved with superior cavity of 8/02 at 15 under fork and at z to right median (plate 74, No. 7). Cicatrix round of burn of 3 at xo above umbilicus on median three-quarters to left of latter (plate 74, No. 10) . V. Back of the Neck and Region of the Back (plates 75 and 76) 40. On the posterior plane, the median is represented by the vertebral column, abbreviatively the column. The other datum point for the whole surface of the back is the seventh vertebra or prominent vertebra, which for this region plays the part which devolves on the fork in the case of the chest. So this datum point should always be announced first, before the column. The seventh vertebra, abbreviated to 7th merely, is situated on the vertebral column a little above the line of the shoulders. In thin subjects it projects in the normal position; when it does not do so, its place is determined either by feeling with the fingers or by making the subject's head incline forward a moment. 41. It is somewhat difficult to distinguish the seventh vertebra from the sixth or fifth, which may be equally prominent. The errors which result from confusions of this kind are too slight for us to insist upon them. Examples of Peculiar Marks to be Noted under No. V Deep cicatrix slightly curved with cavity superior of 5 oblique external, at la under 7th and at 9 to right column (plate 75, No. 5). Deep nsevus at 18 under 7th and at 10 to left col- umn (plate 76, No. 6). Cicatrix rectilinear of 3/02, oblique external, at 24 under 7th and at 6 to left column (plate 76, No. 7). LOCALIZATION OF THE MARK 229 VI. Anomalies and Peculiarities to be Noted on Other Parts of the Body 42. The method of description whose apphcation to the upper members and the trunk we have just described is equally applica- ble to the lower members. Its use, however, is much more lim- ited, as the metric signalment should generally be taken, in the stations, without the subject having to remove his trousers. So we shall enter into no details. 43. The observer who has familiarized himself with the pre- ceding examples will readily settle each case separately. He need never hesitate to go ahead and make use in his descriptions of the words of current speech, whenever the technical vocabulary does not furnish him with more precise ones. 44. The minimum number of peculiar marks which should be described in each subject is, as we have said, from five to six. But in some cases it may be necessary to more than double this number. In fact, when a subject presents a great number of scars, it is impossible to limit one's choice to identically the same ones that have been or may be selected by another observer. Now the agreement of some of the peculiar marks being an indispensa- ble element of identification, it becomes necessary, in such cases, to describe about all the important marks. 45. In the VERY EXCEPTIONAL cases where the minimum of six peculiar marks cannot be obtained, it is indicated that this insufficiency is not the result of negligence on the part of the operator by adding the formula: no others. CHAPTER III.— MANNER OF ANNOUNCING AND RECORDING THE MARKS OBSERVED 1 . The taking of the pecuHar marks demands a certain rapid- ity: I St, in the enunciation of the descriptive phrase; and 2nd, in the very act of writing it. We will indicate the means by which this double end can be obtained. I. Rapidity in the Announcing 2. This is easily acquired if one takes care, from the very first exercises, never to deviate from the prescribed order of description and localization. 3. The phrases, always running in the same mold, take on a certain rhythm which soon imposes itself upon the anthropo- metrical apprentice and guards him against any omission. 4. Let us take as an illustration the mark No. 3 (plate 64, fig. i), which is thus specified: Cicatrix rectilinear of 6 oblique internal at g above wrist left posterior. 5. We would remark in the first place, from the point of view of the rhythm of the phrase, the opposition of sound which is generally observed between the obliquity of a scar situated on a member and the designation of the face on which it is placed. It is easy to see that when the obliquity is internal or external the mark can only be situated on the anterior or posterior faces, and inversely, that when the obliquity is anterior ox posterior the mark must be on one of the external or internal faces. The opposition of sound resulting from this balancing, as it were, of the words is expressed by the following mnemonic for- mula, which is not without some use at the beginning of an apprenticeship: When the obliquity is in or (that is to say, when the term which indicates it ends in a/) , the face is in al ; ayid, inversely, when the obliquity is in al the face is in or. (230) MANNER OF ANNOUNCING THE MARK 23I 6. There is no exception to this rule except for the marks situated on the borders midway between two faces; one can imag- ine an oblique anterior sign situated on a face qualified as external-anterior. 7. We would remark in conclusion that our expression, at Q above wrist left indicates only by way of deduction that the mark is on the forearm. Similarly, in speaking of a nczvus (mole), when we say that it is at j above head of left eyebrow, we imply that this sign is on the forehead. To mention the position in exact terms would uselessly make the phrase a word longer. 8. Conclusion : Avoid announcing the name of the part of the body which is the seat of the peculiarity, whenever its precise position can easily be deduced from the indications furnished by the datum points. II. Rapidity in the Act of "Writing the Statement of Peculiar Marks 9. This is obtained by the use of abbreviations reduced to such a point that some of them resemble in form the signs used in stenography, 10. The first edition of the Signaletic Instructions had already given a list of them, very limited as to number and boldness of abbreviation, but left their use optional, 1 1 . The needs of practice have since then largely extended their application, at the same time giving them a shorter and shorter and more and more conventional form. 12. This cursive writing has attained to-day, in the central services of Paris, I^yons and Marseilles, a degree of perfection which could not be excelled and which demonstrates that it has reached its final shape. Thanks to it, a clerk after five or six days of practice easily succeeds in writing down the statement of scars as fast as it can be dictated. Finally, the legibility of the phrases thus produced is such that their interpretation is mani- festly easier and more rapid than if they had been written out in full, 13. The proof of this is that the employees of the central service in Paris whose duty it is to make the investigations in the anthropometrical files prefer to recopy with abbreviations the 232 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS various signalments of recidivists under assumed names wtiich are sent to them daily from other parts of France for identifica- tion, rather than to use them as they are. 14. So we cannot too strongly recommend that anthropometri- cal officers should familiarize themselves with these signs; the economy of time in the task of writing which will thence result will compensate them liberally, after the first week, for the very short apprenticeship which they require. 15. Nevertheless, the copies of signalments destined for the judicial or administrative authorities should always be written out in ordinary characters whenever there is room to suppose that the persons who will have to make use of them may not be familiar with the practice of such professional processes. 16. We give further on four lists of our abbreviations : the one hereafter, in the Instructions , with an explanatory commentary for teaching; the other grouped in a table, following the order of the chapters, for the first attempts of a secretary; a third, in the alphabetical order of tervis; and the fourth, in the alphabetical order of abbreviations. This last is especially addressed to the unin- itiated reader, to a counsel for the defense, for example, who might have occasion to decipher an abridged statement of scars or to verify its translation, 17. The extension of abbreviations to other terms than those of these lists would inevitably lead to confusion and should be absolutely prohibited. The special advantage that might be drawn from them would moreover be insignificant, the list of abbreviations recommended including the whole number of terms in most frequent use. 18. The signs, and particularly those which are reduced to simple initials or to conventional lines, ought to be drawn very cor- rectly, if one wishes to avoid seeing them degenerate into an illeg- ible scrawl. With the exception of the several cases that we are about to point out, it is particularly necessary to guard oneself against uniting by supplementary strokes the words which ought to be separated, or inversely from omitting the connecting strokes between the different letters of the same abbreviation. MANNER OF ANNOUNCING THE MARK 233 19. Example: sma/l (or little or -petty) , medm?fi and lar£'e (or great) are entered here, as for the descriptive characteristics, by- means of the initials p. m. g., while the datum-point wrtsi (or poigne, Fr. poignet) is represented by the group of consonants pg. The hand and the eye habituate themselves readily to fixing and reading under this form the word wrist. But let a negligent or inexperienced clerk happen to separate the p from the g, and the unguarded reader will be tempted to read "small-large" {petit grand) until the contradiction between the terms thus connected makes him divine his mistake or rather that of his correspondent. 20. The signs and letters employed are chosen in such wise as to form a sj^mbol as much shorter than the term to be repre- sented as its use is more frequent. 2 1 . An effort has been made to preser\-e only the initial letter of the principal terms or, in case of repetition, the first consonant or the group of consonants of the first syllable. The consonants, in fact, which are the skeletons of words, characterize the latter infi- nitely better than the vowels do., 22. Several of the most frequent terms, beginning with the same initial letter, have been distinguished by means of the exclusive adoption for each one of them of a special kind of letter (capital, small letter, Latin or Greek characters, etc). Two signs, borrowed from stenography, are in no wise connected with the alphabet, and are absolutely conventional. It is with the description of these forms, to some extent over-abridged, which (as we must admit) give to this writing as a whole a somewhat strange aspect, that we shall begin the review of the cicatricial vocabulary. 23. ist. Abbreviations with a stenographic and super-abridged form. See on the large synoptic table of signaletic tertnsijy a ) , last column on the right, the Special list of signs with conven- tional forms. The words above and under, which return so often in our formulae for scars, are represented, the first by a horizontal mark about three millimetres long, traced from left to right along the dotted line printed on the card, surmounted by a semicircle with a large vertical diameter and with its concavity turned towards the right. The semicircle should be added to the horizontal line by returning a little backwards and upwards, that 234 STATEMENT OF PECUI.IAR MARKS is to say, without losing contact with the paper, without Hfting the pen. 24. The word under, the meaning of which is the opposite of the preceding, is represented by a Httle horizontal mark of the same kind as the preceding and terminated by a hook descending below the line. Thus the symbols for the words above and under are distinguished only by the place of the hook, which is situated above to represent the first, and below to represent the second. 25. By analogy, the adjectives superior [upper] and inferior [lower] are figured by the same signs as the prepositions above and tinder, the sense and the position of these designs in the sen- tence sufficing to indicate with which of the two parts of speech, preposition or adjective, one is dealing. 26. The four faces, anterior, posterior, internal and exter?ial, are each represented by their initial letter traced in charac- ters imitating certain Greek letters: atiterior by alpha, «; posterior by a letter recalling the rho, p; internal by an iota, «; and exter- 7ial by an epsilon, e. 27. The loop of the symbol for anterior is turned, be it said in passing, in the opposite direction from that of posterior. In regard to the symbol for this latter term, it is important to begin it by tracing with a pen a little horizontal mark one or two millimetres long, following very exactly the dotted line before ascending to form the loop; finally, a detail quite as important, it is necessary to take care that the last stroke of the loop descends vertically in relation to the Hue; the inverse inclination, that is to say, oblique from above to below and from left to right, is even preferable, so far as this stroke is concerned, to the inclination from right to left of ordinary writing. 28. There is nothing to be said regarding the abbreviation for internal, the sign employed having the same form in the Greek writing, and in English and French, as it has here. 29. As for the symbol for external, we would remark that it is not a capital E, as one might think at first sight, but a design analogous in form to a reversed 3, of the same height as the body of the cursive writing. 30. By an exception to the general direction (§18) which for- bids the union of signs in abridged writing there is allowed for MANNER OF ANNOUNCING THE MARK 235 greater rapidity a fusion of the six preceding symbols -with the letter c, abbreviation of the word curved, which constantly occurs in connection with them. 31. We have seen, indeed, that the form of scar qualified as curved should alwaj^s be followed by an indication of the face {^superior or i7iferior, anterior or posterior, internal or external) towards which the concavity of the curve is turned. On the other hand, it is the rule to omit in the written phrase the words with cavity, while continuing to announce them in the spoken phrase. Thus the phrases dictated: cicatrix curved with cavity superior, or cicatrix curved with cavity internal, become when transcribed: cie. c. sup. — cic. c. int. 32, The union of the letter c with the six signs above results in the production of veritable monograms which permit the repre- senting of a whole clause with a single toss of the pen (see in the lower part of the last column on the right of the large synop- tic table, the list of composite conveintionaIv signs). 33, The two super- abridged signs departing ever so little from the ordinary forms of writing of which it still remains for us to speak stand for the words le/t (or sinister, Fr. gauche) and right (or dexter, Fr. droit). The first is represented by its initial consonant g, which is distinguished from the similar abbrevia- tion of the word great by tracing the upper loop to the right of the long stroke, and not to the left as in the ordinary French or English small ^. This form of ^ is not absolutely exceptional; it is met with in some kinds of commercial handwriting, especially of English origin. It is distinguished from the symbol for posterior by its loop below and by its general inclination oblique from right to left, parallel to the ordinary direction of writing, and no longer vertical. It may also be said of this sign that it differs from the small h of German script or from the long s of old-fashioned French and English script only by a diminution in the height of the upper loop. 34. The word right is figured by means of a sign analogous to the dele of proof-readers, that is to say, an initial letter d fur- nished at the top and left of the ascending stroke with a descend- ing loop which is terminated by a final stroke that crosses again to the right (also used in German and Greek manuscript writings). 236 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS 35. 2nd. AbbreviatioJis reduced to the i?iitial letter of the word to be represented. The five fingers of the hand are represented by the initial of the [technical] name of each of them written in a manu- script capital letter, with the exception of the auricular (little finger), which, in order to distinguish it from the abbreviation of annular (third finger), is represented by an O. 36. The three kinds of inclination, horizontal, vertical and oblique, are written respectively by means of the consonants h, vr and h; this last in place of the initial vowel O, already employed for the auricular. Oblique internal will therefore be written h <-, oblique exteryial h s, oblique a^iterior b a, etc. It is allowed in practice for the symbol of vertical, vr, to take on in cursive writing the form of a w. 37. The symbols PI, I-M, MA, A-O, will be read respectively: bctwee?i thumb (pollex) a7id index; between hidex and incdius; between medius and annular; between annular and auricular. 38. The words relating to the shape of linear scars {cicatrices): rectilinear, curved (already mentioned), sinuous, and broken, are represented by means of the corresponding letters : r, c, s, and br. 39. J is the abbreviation for joint, and / that adopted for phalayix. One should unite by a final stroke and trace without lifting the pen the letters j or f and the number of the joint or phalanx which must always and necessarily precede them. Ex- ample: I st phalanx and 2nd joint are written if and 2J\ 3rd joint QXidi J rd phalanx , jj and jf, 40. Let us finally recall for the sake of memory the letters p. m. g., abbreviations alread}^ mentioned for the words little, medium and great, and the letter Ic already employed in the anthropometrical part to designate ankylosis. 41. 3rd. Abbreviations composed of several consonants together -without intervening vowels. It will be sufi&cient to enumerate them without comment, as the motives which have determined the preser\'ation of certain letters may be easily deduced from the preceding considerations and examples. MANNER OF ANNOUNCING THE MARK 237 42. The numeral adjectives: some (Fr. quelques) ,=:qq; several {Vx.plusieurs, compare plural )=:pls; numerous (^or numbers of ) =nh. 43. The qualifications of form: broken^^hr (already men- tioned); deviated^dv; sq2iare=^qr; hooked (Fr. e7i crochet, oaxn.- pare crotchet )=zcrch; cavttj'=cv; light or slight^^lg; parallel^^ prl; promine?it^prin; traverscd^trv. 44. The qualificatives of position : apart (or distanf), dst; situated, st. 45. The metric substantives ceiithnetre and millimetre, when they could not be indicated by deduction comformably to the directions of paragraph i8, page 218, will be represented respect- ively by the letters cm and mm. 46. The peculiarities: fossette or diviplc^fstj ncsvus or mole^^ nv; variola or small-pox^^vrl ; point^pt. 47. The abbreviations of this category that it remains for us to enumerate all relate to the parts of the body. Here is a list of them, arranged in conformitj^ with the directions of paragraph 9 on page 222 : I and II. Upper Limb (left and right) biceps .... . hep. cubital (humero-cubital articulation, or elbow) . cb. wrist (already mentioned, Fr. ^o/Vw^/") . . pg. finger, or digit ..... dgt.. palm ...... pm. base of thumb or pollex . . . hs. P. III. Face and Front of Neck face or visage ..... VSg. hair (Fr. cheveux) .... eiiV-Y. forehead ...... fr. frontal boss ej'ebrow, or supercilium eyelid (Fr. paupiere) angle (of the eye), etc, . nostril cheek-bone {^x . poinviette ) tragus mouth (Fr. bouche) maxillary, or jaw-bone larj-nx ...... Irx. hs. fr. src. pp. gl- nr. pmt. trg. he. tax. 238 STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS IV. Chest fork [Vr . fourcheite) .... frc. clavicle ...... civ. teat, or nipple . . . . tt. sternum ...... str. umbilicus, or navel ..... mbl. median, or median line .... md, V. Back of Neck and Region of the Back seventh vertebra ..... 7° • (spinal) column .... cl. omoplate, or shoulder-blade . . ompl. 48. 4th. Terms abridged according to the ordinary formula : consonants and vowels together. Most of the abbreviations of this nature relate to the terms which determine the nature of the pecuHarity, to- wit: amputated ..... amp. cicatrix, or scar ..... cic. circular ...... circ. furuncle, or boil ..... fur. freckles (Fr. rousseur) . . . roiiss. scrofula ..... scrof. tattooing ..... tat. triangle ..... trigl. We add the two opposite prepositions: behind (Fr. arri^re) . . . . ari. before (Fr. avayit) ..... avt. as well as the following parts of the body: ear (Fr. oreille) .... orl. root of the nose (Fr. racine da nez) . . rac. J Appendix A. JUDICIAL PHOTOGRAPHY GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS The anthropometrical observations, corroborated by the state- ment of peculiar marks and by the descriptive information for the face, are amply sufficient to assure the identification of any individ- ual who, after having been measured for the first time at an adult age, might come to be arrested and remeasured at some later time, no matter how many years may separate the two operations. But this does not hold good when the first signalment has been taken while the subject was under twenty years of age. The adding of a photographic portrait to the signalment becomes then so much the more necessary the further towards infancy it is desired to carry the investigation of the identity. It should be admitted that as a rule it is difficult to pursue a verifi- cation in the anthropometrical archives further back than the twenty-first year, and absolutely impossible beyond the eighteenth year, without the aid of a profile photograph from the right side. And again it is desirable that the photograph annexed to the signalment should conform as much as possible to the well-defined, uniform type adopted according to my indications for the central archives of the identification service. It is to the exposition of the rules defining this type of photo- graph that this appendix is devoted. The professional photo- grapher or the mere amateur who will observ^e these rules will find it exceedingly easy to attain the desired result. If special reasons, and particularly the resistance of the subject, should prevent their strict obser\'ance, all efforts must be concen- trated on the securing of 2i profile or thrce-qriarters print from the right side, reproducing the details of the ear. The pattern of the (239) 240 APPENDIX RIGHT ear is in fact (together with the color of the iris) the best and almost the only element of identification which is offered by minors of less than eighteen years. An instantaneous portrait will always be much easier to take in profile than in full face. In lack of a photograph it should be endeavored to make a drawing or even a mould or impression of this same ear. A sketch, again, even poorly executed by a person of little skill in drawing but having a sufficient knowledge of the morphological anoma- lies of the ear, might, in lack of better, take the place of photo- graphy. TECHNICAL INSTRUCTIONS 1. Each subject should be photographed, ist, in full-face, and, 2nd, in profile from the ?7]o-/z/ side, under the following conditions: a) of light, b) of reductio7i, c) of pose, and d) of mounting. a) LIGHT 2. The light for the full-face pose should come from the left of the sub- ject, the right side remaining in comparative shadow. 3. The light for the profile pose should fall perpendicularly upon the subject's face. b) REDUCTION 4. The scale of reduction adopted for the judicial photograph, both full- face and profile, is one-SEVENTh. In other words, the number of the objective should be chosen in such a way, and the distance between the objective and the posing-chair so arranged, that a length of 28 centimetres passing vertically through the external angle of the left ej'e of the subject to be photographed gives on the plate an image reduced to 4 centimetres, within a millimetre more or less (4 x 7^28). 5. It is on the external angle of the left eye that the apparatus should be focused for the full-face photograph; while for the profile photograph the external angle of the right eye is taken, these two parts corresponding respectively to the most illuminated median position of each pose. 6. To find quickly the relative position of the chair and the apparatus ■which determines this scale of portrait, seat a mlling subject of medium build in the posing chair very squarely and mth his face to the camera, making him hold vertically, in the plane of his face, against the outer corner of his left eye, a slender wooden rule on which a strip of white paper 28 centimetres long has been previously glued. The photographer, on the other hand, holding in his hand a bristol-board card 4 centimetres wide, should move his apparatus farther away or nearer until the 28 centimetres of JUDICIAI. PHOTOGRAPHY 24I the rule gives on the ground glass of the camera an image reduced to 4 centi- metres, as he can readily assure himself by placing his bristol-board card upon it (i). 7. In order to avoid the necessity of any experimenting at later sittings it will be sufficient to fix once for all on the floor of the studio two small cleats, which will allow the chair and camera to be replaced immediately in their respective positions. c) POSE 8. It is absolutely indispensable that in both poses for judicial photographs to be used for identification the subject should be bareheaded. 9. If for reasons peculiar to the case it should be necessary for the sub- ject to be also photographed zvitk his hat on, this last pose should be made the object of a third photograph, which it Avill then be ver}^ advantageous to take at full length, in conformity with the instructions that will be given in paragraph 25. 10. Take care that in both poses, the full-face and profile, the subject is squarely seated, his shoulders as much as possible at an even height, his head resting against the head-rest and his look horizontal, directed straight before him. 11. In the full-face pose, the subject should be caused to fix his eyes steadily on the camera, which will usually create no difficulty. In the pro- file pose, one can avoid the very frequent displacement of the eye sideways in the direction of the operator by asking the subject to look at some fixed point or, still better, at a mirror placed in a line with his face as far away as the width of the room will permit and at the same height as the objective, that is, at about i^ 20 above the ground. 12. Adjustment of the image on the plate. It is strictly forbidden to ' ' plunge " or " raise the nose of ' ' the camera. As the optical axis of the objective should always remain horizontal and the plane of the ground glass or sensitive plate vertical, the adjustment can be regulated only by the vertical displacement of the optical apparatus effected by means of the crank or lever of the camera. Thus the image of the top of the head, in order to appear properly on the plate, should be brought to 35 millimetres below the center of the plate, which leaves only one centimetre of light above the image, when the 9x12 size is employed. (1) Here is the theoretical solution of the same question: we know that the interval between the diaphragm and the object, or more exactly between the center of the object- ive and the part of the object chosen for the focus, is equal to the focal length of the objective used multiplied by the reduction number increased by one. On this principle, supposing an objective to have a focal length of 32 centim«tres, the distance which should separate its diaphragm from the external angle of the eye will be equal to 2 m. 56 (0.32 x 8=2.56). 242 APPENDIX 13. Moreover, it is strongly recommended, before regulating the placing on the plate, to decentralize the camera 18 millimetres downwards, so that the optical axis of the apparatus passes approximately through the middle of the space of 35 millimetres reserved for the face. This decentralizing necessarily results in bringing the objective to the height of the subject's eyes, that is to say, the ordinary position of the human vision. 14. For the profile pose turn the chair (^° from right to left. Place the subject completely in profile so that, seen from the apparatus, the head, the body and the top of the chair-back all appear entirely in a side view. 15. Before proceeding to the actual taking of the profile portrait, take care to verify and correct, if necessary, the figure of the reduction, which should then be regulated, as has been said above, on the vertical plane pass- ing through the external angle of the right eye. The special posing chair, which will be described further on, renders these preliminar}' verifications unnecessary by allowing the scale of reduc- tion for both poses and the lateral adjustment to be regulated once for all. 16. As part of the value of the profile portrait consists in the indication of the slope of the forehead, one should take care to have the prisoner push back any locks of hair which might hide his forehead. 17. The ears should always be disengaged from the hair, in both the profile and full-face portraits. To obtain this result in certain cases of shaggy and unkempt hair it will sometimes be necessary to confine the hair either with a piece of twine or a rubber band ( for the profile pose only ) . 18. Profile photographs in which the contour of the ear does not appear in its entirety will have to be taken over again. d) SIZE AND MOUNTING OF THE PRINTS 19. The prints should be cut at about 8 millimetres above the hair and pasted on a sheet of bristol-board, the profile on the left and the full face on the right. As much of the bust should be left as the height of the negatives will permit, perhaps between 8 and 9 centimetres, and nothing should be cut off from the width of the shoulders in full face photographs. 20. By employing a suitable multiplier the two poses may be grouped on the same card of 9x13 centimetres, obtained by cutting a card of 13 x 18 in two. The base thus measures 130 millimetres, of which 72 are devoted to the face and 58 to the profile. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS 21. The plates should never be retouched in any zuay, with the exception of the hollows or pricks in the gelatine, which would produce on the print black spots resembling a mole or a scar. Any embellishment or rejuvenating JUDICIAI, PHOTOGRAPHY 243 •of the image by effacing on the plate the wrinkles, scars and peculiarities of the skin is strictly forbidden. 22. In the photographic department of the Parisian Prefecture of Police, to avoid confusion in the transcription of the names and to facilitate the sub- sequent classing of the negatives, a provisional serial number is given to each of them, according to the order in which the subject was entered on the daily list of photographs to be taken. The numbers are printed on loose tickets of about 3 centimetres in width and are slipped one after another into a pocket placed on the top of the back of the chair seen from one side. 23. This indication reproduced on the negative by photography itself allows one, by referring to the list for the day, to immediately find again the name of the subject, which is then written on the gelatine in reversed letters underneath the profile. The date of the making of the negative is placed immediately after, written in figures in the usual order; a'aj, inonth, year. Finally, under the full face portrait, there is traced, farther towards the right, the general serial number which is to determine the definite placing of each negative in the archives ( i ) . FULL LENGTH PORTRAITS 24. Ftill length portraits, which are little used in judicial inquiries, should be taken only on the express request of the court. 25. For this kind of portrait, the photographer should place his subject in somewhere near a three-quarter pose, the left side by preference, being very careful not to cause any constraint in the attitude of the individual. With this in view, he should tell him in an off-hand way to put his hat on, and will thus seek, without awakening his distrust, to get him to place his hat on his head as nearly as possible in the same manner in which he usually wears it. Then the photograper should place beside his subject some objects appropriate to his social condition and selected with a view to give, by comparison, some idea of his height, such as a bureau a caf6 table, a chair, etc. 26. The reduction to be observed is 1/21 for the 9/13 size, or 1/14 for the very rare cases where recourse is had to the album size. 27. Whatever may be the pose and the reduction employed, a special heading should always give the figure for the latter, either at the side or the back of the print. (1) Dr. Lande, professor of medical jurisprudence and deputy mayor of Bordeaux, who directed the organization of a municipal anthropometrical service in that city, has ingen- iously replaced the inscription on the negatives in reversed writing (which requires some practice) by a direct inscription on a band of transparent paper, which is then turned over and pasted on the gelatine. The result obtained is excellent, if not better than with the direct writing. SPECIAL POSING CHAIR (i) MECHANICALLY ASSURING A UNI- FORMITY OF REDUCTION BETWEEN FULL-FACE AND PROFILE PHOTOGRAPHS theoreticai, considerations The dimensions of the seat (width 25 centimetres, depth 25 centimetres, conca\-ity of the back 2 centimetres) are purposely very limited in order to allow the subject as little latitude as possible in the manner of seating him- self, forcing him to sit exactly in such a manner that his spinal column is supported by the back of the chair. For the same purpose, a projecting border, slightly sharp, surrounds the seat and induces the subject to instinct- ively correct his position if at first he has seated himself a little side- ways. As a final precaution a metal arrow set into the middle of the upper edge of the chair-back enables the photographer to see at a glance while adjusting the head-rest whether the middle of his subject's back, indicated by the seam of the coat, coincides with the median plane of the chair. If not, instead of trying to rectify the position by a lateral movement of the body more or less forced, he should ask the subject to stand up and then immedi- ately afterwards to sit down squarely. It is quite evident that under these conditions, once the optical axis of the apparatus is directed perpendicularly to the middle of the chair, every subject who comes and sits down there may be photographed immediately in a front view without any "adjustment" having to be made laterally. The only individual adaptation that has still to be made is to regulate the height of the objective proportionately to that of the subject's bust. The reduction figure for any one objective depending only on the distance which separates the apparatus from the object to be reproduced, the immo- bility of the seat results in assuring at the same time the uniformity of the scale. This last is established and regulated once for all on the anthropometrical principles which we are about to present. We recall, in the first place, that the scale of reduction should be calcu- lated on a plane parallel to the sensitive glass and passing through the object chosen to regulate the focusing of the image, and that the spot prescribed for this operation, as regards the full-face portrait, is the external angle of the left eye (|g 4 and 5, p. 240). (1) Thanks to the simplification of the process by the use of this chair, a single oflBcer is enabled to take daily, in the space of two hours and without assistance of any kind, from fifty to eighty negatives, each one of two poses side by side and under con- ditions of the most rigorous uniformity. (244) JUDICIAL PHOTOGRAPHY 245 Now, accurate measurements taken on thirty subjects of various builds have enabled us to fix upon 19 centimetres as the average distance which separates the corner of the eye from the back of the chair. The determination of this anthropometrical fact enables us to make the reduction in a uniform, and in a certain sense an impersonal, manner. It is evident that it would be much more exact and more simple to replace " the 28-centimetre rule held by a wiling subject of medium build " (? 6) by a larger rod, held vertically at 19 centimetres in front of the chair-back. In this way the calculation for the reduction -^^nll escape the errors arising from differences of individual build, which otherwise would require the rule to be more or less advanced according to the subject. Finally, it will be more exact in proportion to the length of the rule upon which it is found practical to base it. After the examination of the conditions which mechanically regulate the placing on the plate and the reduction of the full-face portraits, we pass to the study of the profile photographs. The instructions prescribe that these latter should be focused on the ex- ternal angle of the right eye. Now, we may suppose, for reasons of sym- metry, that the full-face portrait has been focused on this side. If the instructions have designated for this pose the left eye, it is on account of the prescribed direction of the light which should leave the right eye in shadow. But it is e\adent that every full-face picture focused on the left eye mil be so at the same time on the right eye, and that this latter position ma}^ be regarded as being the only focal axis of the two poses. The conclusion from this begging of the question is that it would suffice in theory, in order to pass rapidly from the full-face pose to the right-hand pro- file pose without having to distvub either objective or focus and without subse- quent reduction, to turn the chair with the subject 90°, taking as axis of rota- tion the vertical line passing through the external angle of the right eye. Nothing is easier to determine than the position of the projection of this point on the seat. In the first place it goes \vithout saying that, by the defi- nition, it must be contained in the plane of adjustment which passes through the eyes and which, as we have said before, is 19 centimetres distant from the back of the chair. On the other hand, anyone can observe that the inter\'al which separates the outer corner of the eye from the median line (or more precisely from the ridge of the nose ) is equal to about 5 centimetres, and that this dimension varies very little from one individual to another. Con- sequently, the position of the vertical projection of the outer corner of the eye on the horizontal surface of the seat will be geometrically determined by the intersection of the parallel drawn at 19 centimetres from the bottom of the back of the chair with that drawn five centimetres to the right of its median Une. Nevertheless if, passing from theory to practice, we should seek to take a profile portrait immediately after a full-face pose by turning the chair pre- cisely on this axis, we should observe this fact, which can easily be explained however, that the new image obtained, while continuing to be in focus, would cease to be on the plate, and that the back and part of the rear of the head of the profile would fall beyond the limits of the ground glass. 246 APPENDIX Hence the necessity, if one wishes to succeed in preserving the necessary immobility of the objective, after having turned the chair 90°, oi pushing it forzvai-d a distance which experience shows to be 16 centimetres ( i ). This double movement, the rotation of 90° and the advancement of 16 centimetres, may be combined and executed simultaneously by placing the axis of rotation eccetitt'ically. A very simple geometrical construction furnishes the solution of this ele- mentary problem in mechanics. Another consequence of the immobility of the optical apparatus combined with the geometrically assured fixity of the axis of rotation of the chair, is that this latter returns at each pose to the same position on the ground-glass and the sensitive plate. Advantage has been taken of this circumstance, as we have seen in para- graph 22, to fix at the top of the back the small metal pocket destined to contain the serial number of each plate, which is thus uniformly and mechanically reproduced at the bottom and to the right of the profile pic- ture. By increasing the height of the ticket a little, it may easily be made to contain, also, the name of the subject and the date of the taking of the photograph. But this arrangement, which would avoid the inscription in reversed writing, would somewhat disfigure the profile image. Lastly, the profile of the back, the height of which has been fixed at 95 centimetres, bears a centimetrical graduation decreasing from top to bottom, which has been so arranged as to permit of ascertaining from the photo- graphic print the height of the trunk of the subject photographed. This information is indicated by the black line drawn photographically on the gelatine across the image of the graduation on the back by means of a needle fixed on the negative frame at 74 millimetres above the lower edge of the plate. This mechanical measurement of the trunk should coincide, within a centimetre more or less, with that resulting from the direct anthropometrical observation. Should a noticeably greater divergence take place, it should be attributed either to an error on the part of the anthropometrical operators, or, much more reasonably, to a transposition of the movable number on the back or of the names and inscriptions subsequently traced on the gelatine. This, then, is a valuable means of making sure that the name, the signal- ment, and the photograph are attributed to the individual to whom they really belong. To the posing-chair is attached a glass, on which the subject should fix his eyes during the profile pose. To enable it to be easily placed in any position it is supported on a stem of i "> 50. But the principal object of this accessory, called briefly mirror-stand, is to enable the photographer to more easily obtain an exact profile pose of the subject. All he needs to do is to place himself behind the latter and, at the (1) This advancement of 16 centimetres permits the using of any kind of camera and frame. The complete special apparatus, such as produced by our maker, reaches an adjustment to the plate, and especially a point of view, more exact by reducing the advancement to 5 centimetres, and consequently placing there the arresting notch of the frame. JUDICIAL PHOTOGRAPHY 247 same time that he adjusts the head-rest, to arrange his face in such a way that the image reflected in the glass appears to him as completely and exactly in full-face. He may then be assured, without any other verifica- tion, that it will as a result appear quite as accurately in profile in rela- tion to the optical axis of the objective. This stem serves besides as a support (on the vertical line passing through the middle of its back) to a standard 49 centimetres high, bounded b)^ two horizontal threads and two median lines, intersecting each other at a right angle, which permit the regulation of the adjustment to the plate and of the reduction, without needing an assistant to hold the standard-rule. The following directions summarize the management of the optical apparatus, the posing-chair and its various accessories. They should be reproduced in duplicate and glued spadewise to the back of the mirror- stand furnished by the manufacturer conformably to our models. The}' are put together in such a way as to regulate all the preliminary arrangements for a photograph out of sight of the prisoner and before his introduction into the studio, an advantage not to be despised for assuring the final success of the operation. PRACTICAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION AND HANDLING OF THE POSING CHAIR Draw upon the ground a straight chalk line about four metres long, par- allel with the glass partition which lights the studio. a) For the full-face photograph place the posing chair so that the light falls on it from the left side, the projection of the median line upon the hol- lowed plank which serves as a pedestal being itself exactly superposed upon the straight line of four metres prescribed above. b) Arrange the mirror-stand vertically on the chair, the mirror turned towards the back, and the standard-interval of 49 centimetres looking towards the objective, in such a way that the two nails which go through the foot of the mirror-holder enter the corresponding holes of the chair. c) Trace with a pencil upon a piece of ground-glass, placed temporarilj' in a negative holder, two median axes, one horizontal and the other vertical; measure with great precision on this latter a length of 35 millimetres above the center of the glass and another of the same dimension below, and mark the vertical inteiv^al of 7 centimetres thus obtained by means of two horizon- tal lines from i to 2 centimetres long. d) Place horizontally the optical axis of the apparatus (which one must take care to have pre^'iously decentralized iS f""^ towards the basej, bring it to the height of the middle of the upper half of the standard-inten-al, that is to about i m 20 above the ground, and place it perpendicularly to this sur- face, so that the image of the central point, determined by the meeting of the two median lines traced upon the standard-iiitei'val, coincides vsitli the center of the ground-glass. e) Place yourself behind the ground-glass and advance or draw back the apparatus (and, if necessary, the chair), following the line marked upon the ground, that is to say, keeping the optical axis perpendicular to the mirror- 248 APPENDIX stand, until the 49 centimetres of the standard produces on the ground-glass in the camera an image superposed exactly upon the vertical interval of 7 centimetres indicated in paragraph c. /) At the same time regulate theioc\xs,i-ago/ the image exactly here, in the •middle 0/ the copy of the presetit notice intentionally glued inside out upon the upper half of the 4g ^m standard. g ) Fix the hollowed plank under the chair with four nails fitting tightly into the floor, and do the same for the feet of the optical apparatus by means of the special screws with which it is provided. h ) Take the mirror-stand away from the top of the chair and put it on the side from which the light comes, the mirror exactly opposite the middle of the chair when turned in the position it should occupy during the profile pose. i) Seat the subject upon the posing chair and proceed to take the full-face portrait, according to the general directions: the axis of the optical apparatus, still horizontally placed (i), must be raised or lowered, according to the height of the subject seated, until the top of the image of the head just touches the horizontal line 2 centimetres long marked upon the ground-glass, in conformity with paragraph c, at 35 millimetres below the center of the plate. y) Make the subject stand up, turn the chair 90° from right to left, raising it gently and taking care to prevent the vertical stem from coming out of its socket ; make the subject sit down again in the new direction of the chair, telling him to look at himself in the glass of the mirror-stand, and proceed to take the profile photograph, without in anyway displacing the optical appa- ratus laterally, but raising or lowering it, if necessary, so that the image in profile is projected upon the ground-glass on absolutely the same level as that in full-face. k) /Remarks. It sometimes happens, in the case of subjects ver>' much bent or very obese, that the profile portrait taken in this way is carried too far forward and goes outside the plate. In such cases make the subject lift up his head until it reappears within the frame, even if there should result a somewhat forced position which, however, could in no way alter either the pattern of the ear or the line of the silhouette. (1) The apparatus made especially for judicial photography are decentralized in the prescribed degree and arranged so as to be always horizontal. They are also furnished above with a kind of large finder, made outwardly like a telescope, which enables the adjustment of the height of the plate to be directly regulated, without having recourse to the OTdina.Ty £round-£^iass holder. B. THE VERBAL PORTRAIT We give the name of verbal portrait to the minute description of an individual made especially with a view to seeking and iden- tifying him on the public street. The ofl&cer should be able to repeat this particular signalment on the spur of the moment and without hesitation; hence its name of verbal portrait. And yet that of written portrait would suit it quite as well, since, before being learned by heart, it ought to be dra^vn up with the mind in repose and committed to writing. The term does not refer to the more or less vague indications gathered from incompetent witnesses and which must be recorded as given for want of opportunity to verify them, but to an accu- rate description in appropriate terms, compiled from documents of indisputable authenticity, such as a photograph of the judicial type (profile and full face), or, at least, a signaletic card. The physiognomical analysis should always be completed, as soon as the materials for it are in hand, by the interpretation (from a descriptive point of view) of the anthropometrical part of the prison signalment; that is to say, of the part which is usually the most exact and the least open to dispute. The observ^ations wnll be written on special cards, the whole upper half of w^hich is reserved for the photograph, which is thus protected from soiling or injurj' by the lower half which folds over it. As a result the card when closed is reduced to half size, and can be easily carried in the coat pocket. The cover, or lower half of the card, bears on the front or recto the headings which make up the verbal portrait for the first two parts of the signalment (anthropometrical and descriptive), so that the reader is enabled to readily compare each term in the description with the corresponding part of the photographic portrait, when he has access to it, while the back (or verso') is devoted to the statement of pecuHar marks and to the sociological information. (249) 250 APPENDIX If the photograph is of the standard type (profile and full-face) the drawing up of the verbal portrait will be easy. The task is more delicate when one possesses only a commercial portrait, gen- erally a three-quarters view, but it should nevertheless be pursued according to the same plan. The large synoptical table of the descriptive information, placed at the end of the second part of the Album, has been composed mainly with a view to serv-ing as a guide in the drawling up of these notes (plate 6or). The scheme of headings printed on the special model of card for the verbal portrait T plates 80 and Si) affords a summary- sufficient for obtaining uniformity in the placing of all the observations, and for calling them to mind when needed, without the necessity of entering into many explanations on this subject. The headings for the profile: forehead, nose, chin, lips, and, if possible, ear, should be filled in and learned by heart in their entirety, while the headings relating to the front view are replied to only when the feature examined clearly departs from the mean, which is as much as to say that three-quarters of the headings of the third horizontal division will be answered only by dashes. In short, the establishment of a verbal portrait is equivalent to a more extended choice of characteristic traits, or, as we have explained above, to a methodical selection of the characters which are most likely to be remembered. The compiling of a verbal portrait maj' be compared, in the same order of ideas, to the creation in the officer's mind of a kind of caricature of the person to be recognized. What is a caricature, indeed, if not the combined selection and exaggeration of the characteristic traits? The results obtained by this proceeding from the point of view of identification are known to all. To whom has it not happened, for example, to recognize immediately some well-known personage by means of a caricature alone, which, in such a case, showed itself superior to the best of photographs? The rule might then be laid down that the verbal portrait should give first place to the same physiognomical features as those w^hich would be emphasized by the caricaturist. If a previous anthropometrical signalment exists, the peculiar- ities should be recopied from it, in such wise that, in case of arrest and denial of identity on the part of the person concerned, the comparison of them may be made immediately, on the subject THE VERBAI, PORTRAIT 25 1 present. But care should be taken to indicate by a small sinuous line traced vertically on the margin (see plate 8 1 ) the marks which one may have reason to suppose sufl&ciently apparent to be easily verified before the arrest, without the individual's knowledge. Such are the marks on the face noted in No. Ill, and sometimes those on the hands (see note on page 64 of the Introduction). Only the marks thus noted will need to be learned by heart. The translation of the anthropometrical observations into descriptive terms necessitates more detailed explanations. The exact indication of the height and of the trunk in centi- metres should always appear, and these figures should be learned by heart. The only precaution to be taken will be to increase the figure of the centimetres by one when the millimetres reach or go beyond the fifth. The other anthropometrical observations should also be copied in their entirety, but only the values extreme or eccentric, either by deficiency or excess, will then need to receive the oflBcer's attention. The divergency of a length from the average, which is shown in the accompanying table on page 254 ( i ) , is measured by means of a special value called the divergency from half the cases (or more shortly, simple divergency) (2). This fundamental value is indicated for each measure in the table at the top of its respective column. If an eccentricity amounting to a simple divergency is enough to very considerably augment the recognitory value of a signalment from the point of view of anthropometry and of identification in the measuring-room, it has but little importance from the point of view of descriptive signalment and of identification on the public street. (1) We may say in passing, and to prevent any future misinterpretation, that this table, which gives the median or probable dimensions corresponding to a given height, cannot be employed for the reciprocal problem, which consists in finding the probable height corresponding to a given dimension. (2\ This appellation, divergency from half the cases, is derived from the fact that this value, added or subtracted from the figure of a medium dimension, determines the limits of the central group, which includes half of the cases observed. Values of this kind must not be confounded with the figures of the table on page 24 of the Introduction. These latter refer to the error in measuring, that is, the amount of variation which there can be in an osseous length measured at different times on the same individual, while the table opposite relates only to the divergencies in length -which a certain measure may present among a group of 1,000 subjects of the same height (se* also the foot-note on page 29 of the Introduction). 252 APPENDIX So therefore the divergency from half the cases is only men- tioned in the table on p. 254 on account of the part it may be called to play in cases of disputed identity before the courts (see hitjvdudion , p. 31). The total height, the height of the trunk, and the length of ear excepted, an anthropometrical length becomes useful in descrip- tive signalment only at about two • and a half times the simple divergency above or below the medium. Values of this degree are so exceptional as to be only met with in one case out often, hence they are designated as divergencies from 9/10 of the cases. The figure will be found all calculated on the table, beneath the divergency from half the cases. The fact that the anthropometrical anomaly reaches the diver- gency from 9/10 of the cases is indicated on the card for the verbal portrait by underlining the value which is Jiotably too large, while the value 7iotably too small is placed in parenthesis. The sign, underlinement or parenthesis, will be doubled if the diver- gency above or below extends to more than three and a half times the divergency from half the cases, that is to say, when it exceeds the sum of the two preceding divergencies (that from ^2 plus that from 9/10 of the cases). An abnormality of this im- portance is observed onlj^ in one case out of fifty. Finally, every value which exceeds five times the divergency from half the cases should be regarded, until the contrary is proven, as the result of an error. These last values will be found mentioned in the table under the heading : diverge^icy from all the cases. This degree of eccentricity, which is observed less than once out of a thousand cases, should on occasion be underlined three times. L,et us take as a practical example the following anthropomet- rical signalment, which is that of a murderer recently arrested in Paris : Height I™ 66.3 f length 18.6 Foot 27.9 Head \ . , , = Reach I-" 78 i^Nidth 15.7 Middle f. 12.2 Trunk 87.7 TT..P^^^^ ^-^ Little f. 9.7 1 width (3.2) Forearm 46.6 Ear There is nothing to be said of the height of / "" 66, which only exceeds the average by the insignificant amount of one centimetre. THE VERBAt PORTRAIT 253 The average reach corresponding to this height is of z "" 6g\ that of our subject is / "" y8, or 9 centimetres in excess. Now the divergency from 9/10 is for this measure 7 centimetres; the reach signalized is therefore very large, without being exiraordmarily large, and we underline it once. The trunk is of 88, or about the average for this height. Neither is there any remark to be made regarding the diameters of the head and the length of the ear, which are little removed from the medium. But it is otherwise with the width of ear, which is 5 millimetres less than the medium. This is an eccentricity by defect which reaches the divergency from 9/10, so we place the figure for the width of ear in parenthesis. Let us pass to the examination of the figures of the third column: the foot of our subject, which is of 27.9, exceeds the ordi- nary foot of persons of his height by 2 1 millimetres, that is to say, by an amount greater than the divergency from 49/50, which is 20 millimetres. This foot then is of an extraordinarily great dimen- sion, such'ks would be met with in only two specimens out of a hundred. Conformably with the rule precedingly given, we mark it with a double line drawn beneath the number. The middle finger of our signalment is of 12.2, longer by eight millimetres than the middle finger in the table, that is to say, by an amount greater than the divergency from 9/10, but less than that from 49/50. It is the same in the case of the little finger. The fingers of the hand are then remarkably large without being almost monstrous like the foot. They should be underlined with only one mark. As for the forearm, ^6.6, it is larger than the average only by 14 millimetres, that is to say, by a quantity greater than the sim- ple divergency but less than the divergency from 9/10. This indi- cation does not then reach in this case a degree of eccentricity suf- ficient to make it useful in the descriptive signalment. In short, our subject is distinguished in an altogether excep- tional manner, from an anthropometrical point of view, by the length of his feet, and correlatively, in a lesser degree, by the length of his fingers, and it is probably this last peculiarity, com- bined with relatively broad shoulders, to which the eccentricity by excess in his reach must be attributed. The height being determined centimetre by centimetre, the corresponding mean dimensions of the ten other measures of the signalment, with indication of the degrees of eccentricity (or divergencies) to which each of them is liable in different subjects. HEIGHT centimetre by centimetre Divergency 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 5^ 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 7Z 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 X u < z 2 3 m cm mm 0.03 0.07 O.IO 14 35 50 0.15 70 HEAD 4 10 15 20 m cm mm mm 1.49 804 180 1.50 808 180 I. 51 813 181 1.52 817 181 1-53 821 182 1.54 825 182 1-55 829 183 1.56 8^2 183 1-57 836 183 i.";8 840 184 1-59 843 184 1 .60 847 185 1. 61 851 185 1.62 854 185 1.63 858 186 1.64 862 186 1.6s 866 186 1.66 869 187 :.67 873 187 1.68 876 187 1.68 878 187 1 .69 882 187 1.70 886 187 J. 71 889 187 1.72 895 187 1.73 899 188 1-74 902 188 1-75 905 189 1.76 908 189 1.77 912 189 1.78 915 190 1.79 918 190 1.80 922 190 i.8i 926 191 1.82 829 191 1.83 933 191 1.84 937 192 1.85 941 192 1.86 944 192 1.87 947 193 1.87 951 193 150 150 150 151 151 151 151 152 152 152 152 152 153 153 153 153 153 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 154 155 155 155 155 156 156 156 156 156 156 157 157 157 157 157 157 EAR 2 5 8 10 to 15 mm mm 58 35 59 35 59 35 59 35 59 35 60 36 60 36 60 36 60 36 60 36 61 36 61 36 61 36 61 36 61 36 62 36 62 36 62 37 62 37 62 37 62 37 62 37 63 37 63 37 63 37 63 37 f3 37 64 37 64 37 64 37 64 37 64 37 64 38 64 38 65 38 65 38 6S 38 65 3« 65 3« 65 38 65 38 6 14 20 30 230 231 232 234 235 236 238 239 241 242 244 ^45 246 248 250 251 253 254 255 256 257 258 260 261 263 264 266 267 268 270 271 273 274 275 277 278 279 281 282 284 285 FINGERS 3 7 10 15 mm mm 102 80 103 80 103 80 104 81 104 81 105 82 lO^ 82 106 82 107 83 107 83 108 84 108 84 109 85 no 8S no 86 III 86 III 86 112 87 112 87 113 88 XI3 88 114 88 114 89 "5 90 116 90 116 91 117 9' 117 91 118 92 118 92 119 92 119 92 120 93 120 93 121 94 121 94 122 94 123 95 123 95 124 96 124 96 9 21 30 50 398 400 403 405 408 410 413 416 418 421 423 426 429 431 434 437 439 442 444 447 449 452 454 457 459 462 464 467 469 474 477 479 482 484 487 489 492 495 497 500 HEIGHT centimetre by centimetre Divergency in -|- or in — the height being given) from % from 9/10 from 49/50 from all of the cases 1-45 .46 •47 .48 •49 1.50 •51 •52 •53 •54 1.55 ■56 •57 .58 •59 1.60 .61 .62 •63 .64 1.65* .66 • 67 .68 .69 1.70 • 71 .72 •73 • 74 1-75 .76 .77 .78 •79 1.80 .81 .82 •83 • 84 1.85 (254) THE VERBAI, PORTRAIT 255 The osseous lengths are susceptible, as regards the descriptive signalment, of another kind of interpretation which, under certain circumstances, may become very useful : we mean the ascertaining, by means of an anthropometri- cal signalment, of the size-numbers and the approximate dimensions of the corresponding pieces of clothing. We have indicated in a note to the Introduction (p. 18) the origin of these calculations and the rule to be followed in transforming an antliropometrical length of foot into shoemaker's pointing [i. e., the degrees of the size-stick] and vice versa. For the first case, the only one with which we need to con- cern ourselves here, from 12 to 20 millimetres are added, according to the presumable elegance of the shoe (i), and the sum multiplied by 3/2. The result divided by 10 gives within a small fraction the number of the pointing on the size-stick. The height of the crotch of a pair of trousers may be obtained in the most simple manner by deducting the height of the trunk from the total height. This difference will give exactly the inside length of leg of a pair of well- fitting trousers worn with suspenders, that is to say, a maximum length w'hich, in practice, may surpass by from 2 to 4 centimetres, or even more, that which one is likely to meet with in poorly-dressed subjects (2). The size of a stiff hat is calculated separately for the two diameters by deducting for each of them 145mm from the corresponding figure given by the anthropometrical signalment and dividing the remainder by 6.25, the millimetrical value of the interval between the hatters' sizes. The size of soft hats and caps is obtained by dividing by 2 the sum of the two preceding measurements (length and width for the stiff hat). Do not neglect to mention the half sizes. The sizes of the circumference of the head for a soft hat rise, in fact, by half-sizes from o to 8^. Each increase by a half-size is exactly equivalent to an increase of one centimetre in the circumference. The size o corresponds to a distance of 47 centi- metres around the head, the size ^ to 48, the size i to 49, the size i^ to 50 centimetres, etc. [The preceding paragraph applies only to hats of French make. The English size-numbers are intended to represent the diameter of the hat in inches, and therefore no deduction should be made from the cranial diameters furnished by the anthropometrical signalment. Add, on the con- trary, 6mm to each measure, and divnde the sum by 25.40, the millimetrical value of the English inch, reducing any fractional remainder to i6ths or 8ths of an inch. Thus a head measuring 187 by 154mm would be fitted with a stiff hat of size 7 9/16 by 6 15/16. American hatters make their stiff hats of a certain (1^ Twelve millimetres for round or square-toed shoes, and 18 to 20 millimetres for those with what are called pointed toes. (2) To calculate the height of a subject from the height of the crotch of a pair of well- fitting trousers the inside length of the trouser-legs is multiplied by two, and to the pro- duct 8 or 10 centimetres are added for crotches of more than m. 80; 10 to 12 centimetres for those (of medium dimension) of between m. 75 and m. 80; and 12 to 15 centimetres, or even more, for those less than m. 75. The result will always be only approxima- tive, and considerably too small in the case of trousers that are badly-fitting, that is to say, too short. 256 APPENDIX conventional form, and afterwards adapt them in the shop to heads of unusual proportions as required; and they therefore give them but a single number, which is calculated, as in the case of soft hats, by di^'iding by 2 the sum of their two diameters expressed in inches. The sizes for soft hats, on account of their elasticity, which causes them to stretch, usually run from two eighths to three eighths smaller than for stiff ones, so that a head of iSjmm by 154mm %vould wear a stiff hat of size 6 15/16 or a soft one of size 6 11/16. Usually, especiall}' in cheap hats, the eighths are the lowest frac- tions employed, so that the hats just mentioned might be numbered either 6J4 (stiflF) and 6^ (soft) or, more probably, 7 and 624^ (i).] The indication of the size of the hat (distinguishing between the stiff hat and the soft hat ) will be a valuable completion to the descriptive signalment for the verbal portrait, though too much attention should not be attached to this information, which personal caprices, the fashion, etc., may modify at pleasure. PHOTOGRAPHIC IDENTIFICATION The scrupulous obsen^ance of the rules of j udicial photography- described above assures to the different photographs of the same individual so many and such precise points of comparison that, no matter what physical changes have inter\^ened between the various sittings, his identity may be established immediately and without hesitation. See in plates 59^ and 59<5, the facsimiles of profile and full-face portraits arranged one above the other in pairs relating to the same subject. Although we have chosen the most striking dissimilarities which it was possible for us to obtain, the comparison of the fronto-nasal outlines and the morphological details of the ear, in the profile pictures, can leave no room for doubt as to the identity of the person; while the resemblance of the full-face photographs is largely destro3-ed here by a concurrent change in the hairy sys- tem and in the fleshiness of the subject (plate 59a, figs, i and 2), (1) German hatters simplify matters very much by numbering each hat according to the number of centimetres in its circumference. Thus the head specified above as wearing an English soft hat of 6 15 15 would wear a German hat number 55. The following table gives the equivalent sizes of stiff hats in the German, French, and English systems, for heads of medium sizes: French Sizes I diameter abo-ve ^ l';/i6 ,, ,/ ,, ,,,/ ,, .e-,/ .nches ir: ^^pointAr W^ 54 54^ 55 IS% S^ S^/z quarter-inches J German Sizes circumference in centimetres English Sizes j^^ ^ ^y ^ „/ diameter in incbes i / '^ /o / ' i / ^^ i /s SX 3'A 3H 4 4X 4K 4^ The verbai, portrait 257 or by a nervous contraction of the eyebrows (plate 59a, figs, i and 2), or a lateral deviation of the eyes (plate 59a, figs. 3 and 4). The inverse problem, which consists in aflBrming the non-identity of the individuals in two photographs presenting a certain general resemblance in physiognomy, is solved with the same degree of ease and certainty by the comparison of the fronto-nasal outlines and the details of the ear. Analogies of this sort may be ascribed to any one of the four principal causes following: professional patholc ethnica family Similarities of -l ^ . ^ \ origin. Regarding the professional resemblance, of which we have already had occasion to speak, on page 211, apropos of 'Cao. g enteral impression, we will say only a few words. It consists entirely in the general appearance, the costume, the cut of the beard and hair, the mannerisms, etc. So it disappears at once in an anatom- ical examination. Every disease has its aspect, its fades, as the doctors say, and the general resemblances resulting from it are greater in propor- tion as the organism is more profoundly stricken. Thus all per- sons whose respiration is affected, asthmatics, consumptives, etc., have their eyes more or less prominent and a general appearance of pain which tends to make them look alike. But in no case is pathological resemblance more striking than when it results from some malformation of the bones. All hunch- backs, for instance, resemble each other; to the expression of dif- ficult respiration they add a necessary resemblance in the carriage of the head and shoulders, etc. Again, it is the cranial malformations, it need not be said, which occasion the most perfect physiognomical resemblances. All individuals with a ''shako-shaped'' head (plate 60a, figs, i and 2) or « prominent chin, popularly called '' jimmy-jawed''' (plate 60a, figs. I and 2), have a family likeness. Although these deformities may cause a similarity of the fronto-nasal outline, the ear always sufl&ces to individualize the subjects. Thus the lobe in fig. I (plate 60a) is intermediate as to contour and adherence, 258 APPENDIX while that in the corresponding figure, No. 2, is square and blend- ing. Similar remarks may be made regarding the lobes shown in the profiles 3 and 4 of the same plate. Ethnical resemblances, that is to say, between foreigners of the same race, and especially those of an exotic race, are also deceiving. Thus, to the eyes of a European newly arrived in China all the Chinese look alike; the physiognomical differences do not become perceptible to him for many months. Without going so far for an example, it is a fact that the gypsies of our own country often present a great morphological analogy among themselves (plate 6o(5, figs. I and 2). This is because to their community of race there is generally added a relationship more or less near, either with or without the knowledge of the persons concerned. Villages are not rare in France [and such occur even in the older portions of the United States] where the inhabitants, all relatives and resembling each other within certain limits, bear the same patronymic and are distinguished among themselves only by surnames. And yet up to the present time we have not found a single instance where this morphological resemblance, even be- tween brothers, extended to the ear (without speaking of the still more conclusive differences of the anthropometrical signalment). An exception should be made, as far as the ear is concerned, in the case of the twin brothers shown in plate 6o<^, figs. 3 and 4. In spite of the analogy of this organ, the non-identity of these two subjects is clearly demonstrated by a difference of six milli- metres in their width of head. However, although we have not yet happened to meet with two twins who, besides this identity of ear, presented a concordant anthropometrical signalment, the metrical differences have often been so small that we must admit that such a coincidence is possible. In a case of this kind the identification would have to rest principall3^ on the statement of peculiar marks. It is unnecessary to remark that this exception (which we felt under obligations to point out) does not diminish in practice the recognitory value of photography and of anthropometrical signal- ment. The possibility of confounding one twin brother with another should not be taken into consideration except when the birth-registers actually show a double birth of the name and date indicated. This is manifestly not a commonplace line of defense within the reach of ever}- one. C. ADDITIONS TO THE ANTHROPOMETRICAL SIGNALMENT ICircular issued by Dr. Bertillon in January, 1884] I. MEASUREMENT OF THE BI-ZYGOMATIC DIAMETER (To replace the measurement of the width of ear, see p. 116) The term zygoma is applied to the bony band or arch which extends from the cheek-bone to just above the auditory orifice; and we understand by bi-zygo7natic diameter the maximum hori- zontal distance by which the two zygomata are separated. The bi-zygomatic diameter thus defined is measured with the caliper compass used for the measurement of the cranial diameters, and by following a similar course. First Stage (plates i8 and 19) The subject being seated on the stool, make him separate his legs and stand in front of him as close as possible. Hold the branches of the calipers near the points and place them symmetrically a short distance from the tragus. Make the instrument oscillate up and down and back and forth, at the same time moving it further and further from the tragus, and follow, on the graduation, the variations of the index-mark o. As in the previous measurements, the observer ascertains the figiu-e which would appear to him to correspond to the maximum distance. Second Stage Fix the branches of the compass at the figure found, conformably to the manner of operating indicated for the measuring of the cranial diameters. Third and Last Stage Replace the points of the compass on the zygomata and make sure by perfectly symmetrical oscillations, sometimes vertical and sometimes hori- zontal, that the compass has the proper opening, which may be recognized by the friction of the points, which should slightly wrinkle the skin. (259) 26o APPENDIX Approximation : The greater or less thickness of the fatty layer covering the zygomata prevents the attainment of the degree of precision requisite in the measuring of the cranial diameters. We would estimate provisionally the approximation of the bi-zygomatic measurement at i '""^ plus or minus. II. DIGITAIv IMPRESSIONS OF THE RIGHT THUMB, INDEX, MEDIUS [middle finger] AND ANNULAR [third finger] Method of operating : Cover a sheet of polished copper with a very thin layer of printer's ink, as uniformly as possible, by means of a roller made of gelatine. Place the extremity of the anterior face of the subject's finger on this black slab, exercising a slight pressure, and transport the finger thus blackened on to the space reserved for this purpose at the bottom of the anthropo- metrical card. The impression is obtained by pressing lightly on the back of the finger. It is necessary to take the imprint of each finger in succession. The space reserved for the recording of the filigrees of the fingers is found at the lower right hand- corner of the anthropo- metrical card. It measures about 95 """ by 45 """ and bears the indication of the fingers which should be printed (see plates 79a and 79^. ALBUM FIRST PART PI.ATES REI.ATIXG TO THE ANTHROPOMETRICAI. OPERATIONS Plate I MEASURING FURNITURE showing arrangement oi mural graduations 33.^ouj9e5' "FT . — Vertical rule one metre long for measuring the height (^Instr., p. loo). ]5, — Graduations on paper or oilcloth for measuring the reach (^Instr., p. 103). B. — - Rule half a metre long for measuring the trunk or height of a man seated ( Instr., p. 105). Q. — Portable square with double projection, used in measuring the height and the trunk. J^. — Stool used in measuring the trunk. 1^. — Movable foot-stool to facilitate the measuring of the foot, of the cranial diameters and of the ear. M, — Trestle specially intended for the measuring of the forearm, and affording a point of support (P) to the subject during the measuring of the foot (Instr., p. 118). Plate 2 CAI^IPBR COMPASS for measuring the length and width of the head To read the indications of the instrument turn to the point directly opposite the zero mark drawn on the upper edge of the bolt. For example, the opening of the branches in the abo've drawing is about /^^m j>mm. Plate J for measuring the length and width of the ear Broad fixed branch Broad movable branch t Narrow fixed branch Narrow movable branch 1 : - ° Index mark at the zero CIZZ) Thumb rest g... 10 -^ To read the indications of this instrument turn to the point directly opposite the zero mark traced on the middle of the right edge of the opening of the slide. For example, the opening of the branches in the abo-ve drawing is about Jcm jmm. Plate 4 I,ARGB CAI^IPER RUI^B for measuring the foot, the middle and little fingers and the forearm Heel Small fixed branch Small movable branch Large fixed branch Large movable branch Index mark at the zero -15 -16 -17 -18 -19 20 •2 1 •22 •23 •59 _) Thumb rest To read the indications of the instrument turn to the point directly opposite the zero mark traced on the middle of the left edge of the opening in the slide or thumb rest. For example, the opening of the branches in the abo-ve drawing is about /ocm ^mm. Plate j- MBASURING THE HEIGHT (Height of a man standing) Place the subject against the wall, the backbone about 12cm to the left of the graduated metre [and not against the metre); bring the square down, the face with rounded corners downward, taking as a vertical guide the projecting edge of the metre, and then read the indications of the graduation without displacing the subject {Instr., pp. 100 to 103). Plate 6 MEASURING TH^ REACH 3Di^oufte^ The subject, still having his back to the wall, is directed to extend his arms horizontally in the form of a cross, leaning if necessary either to the right or the left until the tip of his right middle finger touches the projection; then he regains his equilibrium by moving slightly outward the leg on the side toward which he has leaned, so as to make the line of his shoulders horizontal with the axis of his arms. The measurer then presses the arms of the subject lightly against the wall, and makes sure, before dictating their figures, that the tip of the middle finger continues to touch the starting-point of the graduation (/nifr., p. 103). Plate 7 MEASURING THE TRUNK (Height of a man seated) f1 3DutouJSe^ Make the subject sit squarely on the stool, see that he holds himself erect, and place and manipulate the portable square in the same manner as in measuring the height (/«s?r., p. 105). Plate 8 MEASURING THE I^ENGTH OF HEAD (a) First Stage. — The left point of the compass being placed and firmly held at the root of the nose, the operator, keeping his eyes fixed on the scale, brings the right point down over the back and middle of the head, and ascertains within a millimetre the probable maximum length [Instr., p. 107). Plate MEASURING THE I.BNGTH OF HEAD {h) •SSEdtUOD 3l[] JO suiJE 3i{j |o 'jEjuoziJoq ]soui]E 'uouisod uoi3E]n33j 3ij} aopofj — •juatunjjsui 3i|; jo uouisod aqa puE SuuaSuy sija spjESaj se XfjEinDUJcd 'juauiaSuEJjE sjt asnpojdai oi Suuisap J3jnsv3m e Xq paiprns aq pinoqs ajnSy siqj qoiqM uiojj m3Ia jo JUioj Second Stage. — Special "view, taken from above, of the position represented on the opposite page. Point of view of an ohser'ver who, in the presence of a measurer operating under his eyes, desires to verify the correctness of the position taken. — Notice the regula- tion position, almost horizontal, of the arms of the compass. Plate 10 MEASURING THE I -5 o S .s'g c2s- View taken from above after the execution of the maneuvres of the first stage; the edge of the table, the axis of the forearm and hand, and the graduated stem of the instrument should all be parallel. Plate joa MEASURING THE I/EFT FOREARM (c) (View taken from behind the operator] Second Stage. — The operator moves the rule from right to left until the fixed branch fits against the extremity of the elbow, while with his left hand he pushes the movable branch against the fingers of the subject [Irstr., p. 127 ). Plate ^oh MEASURING THE I.EFT FOREARM (d) (View taken from in front of the operator ) 3)uJ^ouJ5?X, Third and Last Stage. — With his right hand the operator flattens out the back of the subject's hand, while with his left he pulls gently on the stem of the rule in order to keep the fixed branch in contact with the elbow; then he reads the indica- tion of the graduation [Iristr., p. 127 ). ALBUM SECOND PART PLATES RELATING TO THE DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION Plate ?r THE FOREHEAD I Inclination 2 Height 3 "Width I. Forehead with inclination recedins. 2. Forehead with inclination intermediate. 3. Forehead with inclination vertical. 9. Forehead ot great width. Plate 32 TH:^ F0R:^HEAD continued; AND THE ROOT OF THE NOSE (Peculiarities ) I. Superciliary arches promi nent. 2. Frontal bosses prominent. . Frontal sinuses prominent. 4. Forehead with curved profile. >f^ ''^-'^^l^^^^^l k y M 5. Root of the nose with cavity small. 6. Root of the nose with cavity large. 7. Root ot the noi e very 8. Root of the nose very broad. 9. Root of the nose with cavity descending verv low. Plate 33 SYNOPTICAI, TABI^B OF THE FORMS OF THE NOSE I. Nose with profile (^con)cave elevated. 4. Nose with profile rectilinear elevated. 7. Nose with prurile convex elevated. 2. Nose with profile (con )cave horizontal. 5. Nose with profile rectilinear horizontal. S. Nose with profile convex horizontal. 3. Nose with profile ( conjcave depressed. 6. Nose with profile rectilinear depressed. 9. Nose with profile conve.x depressed. Plate 34. NOSBS PRESENTING SOME ANOMAI.IES OF FORM OR SOME DIFFICUIvTiES OF CI.ASSIFICATION I. Nose [con] cave very ele- vated and so short it might almost be called convex 2. Nose so slightly convex that that it might almost be called rectilinear. 3. Nose extraordinarily humped. 4. Nose [con] cave-very-sinuous horizontal. 5. Nose rectilinear-sinuous horizontal. 6. Nose slightly humped-sin- uous horizontal. 7. Nose sligntiy concave-sinuous with base much depressed. i^. Nose rectilinear-sinuous with base depressed. 9. ^ No.^c ji.^nuN .U..»CA-VC1)- sinuous with base depressed. Plate J5 NOS:eS CHARACTERISED BY THE EXTRAORDINARINESS OF ONE OF THEIR DIMENSIONS I. Xuse [conjcave elevated of very 3. Nose rectilinear elevated of very great projection. great projection. 5. Nose convex elevated of very great projection. 2. Nose of the same form as No. i, 4. Nose of the same form as No. 3, but of very little projection. ! but of very little projection. 6. Nose of same form as No. 5, but of very little height and medium projection. I 7- Njse [conjjcave (depressed) of little projection and with tip a little thick. S. Nose slightly conve.x horizontal 9- Nose of same shape as No. S, but of very great height. 1 of very little height. Plate j6 THE DIMENSIONS OF THE NOSE SEEN IN PROFII^E Synoptical table of combinations of the three degrees of height with the three degrees of projection I. Nose of little height and little projection. 2. Nose of-' little height and medium projection. 3. Nose of little height and great projection. 4. Nose of medium height and little projection. 5. Nose nf medium height and medium projection. 6. Nose (if medium height and great projection. 7. Nose cf great height and little projection. S. Nose of great height and medium projection. 9. Nose of height and great jection. Plate 37 THE DIMENSIONS OF THE NOSE SEEN FROM THE FRONT! Synoptical table of combinations of the three degrees of height with the three degrees of width '1 dl£_ I. Nose of" little height and little width. 2. Nose of little height and medium width. 3. Nose of little height and great width. 4. Nose of medium height and little width. 5. Nose of medium height and medium width. 6. Nose of medium height and great width. 7. Nose of gieit hei_,lit in little width. 8. Nose of great height and medium width. 9. Nose of great height and great width. Plate 38 THE PECUI^IARITIES OF THE NOSE 4. Nose pointed [effili). 5. Nose thick {gJ'Os). 6. Left nostril flattened [aplafie). 7. Nose with partition exposed {sons-cloisons decouvertes). 8. Nostrils pufty {euipdtees) 9. Nose bilobed. Plate jp THE I/IPS I. Naso-labial height little and prominence ot upper lip. 2. Naso-labial height great and prominence of lower lip. 7. Median furrow of upper lip accentuated. Plate /o Plate 41 G^NERAI, SHAPE OF THE HEAD SEEN IN PROFII^E 1 'mt^ I. Negro with medium prot;nath- It,/- .u- 1? %■ Prosinathism limited to bones at ° . '^ = 2. Ivpe or a prognathic European. --^ '^ , ■ • % ism. base ot nose (nasal prognathism ). 7. Head "=hako-shaped" (f;/ boH- 8. Head -'keel-shaped" [encareue]. 9. Head "pouch-shaped" ;/d'/ ^« poils) or acrocephahc. or scaphocephalic. {etl besace) or cymbocephahc. Plate ^2 GBNBRAI, SHAPE OF THE HEAD SEEN FROM IN FRONT I. Face shaped like truncated pyramid (iir pear-shaped). 2. Face lozenge-shaped. 1. Face round. 4. Face broad 7. Jaws distant (or widely separated). 8. Zygomata distant. 9. Parietals distant (or head "top- shaped" — tete en toitpie). Plate /J THE HAIR I. Hair curlv. 2. Hair frizzly. 3. Hair crinkly. 7. Baldness frontal. S. Baldness tonsural. 9. Baldness jVonto-parietal. Plate 7/ THE BEARD I . Goatee ( bavbe de bouc) ■ 3. Full beard, short and unkempt. 4. Horseshoe [ J't'l' a c/iez'al ") . 5. Collar in American style. 6. Imperial {harbic/u). 7. Moustache and "hare's-teet" {pattrs dt- lap! a). S. Muttuii-^lioji whiskers (Russian style). 9. Side-whiskers and moustache (Austrian style). Plate ^5 THB BYBROWS (a) I. Eyebrows near. 2. Evebrows distant. 4. Evebrows high. 5. Eyebrows oblique-internal. 6. Eyebrows oblique-external 7. Evebrows niuijh arched. 8. Evebrows rectilinear. 9. Eyebrows sinuous. Plate 46 Plate /7 THE BYBLIDS I. Lids little slit. 3. Lids little open. S. Outer angle of lids elev 7. LTpper lids covered. 2. Lids much slit. ( )ut( 1 .ingle ot lids depressed. 8. Upper lids uncovered. 9. Lids bridled at inner corner. 10. Right upper lid drooping. r^ II. Upper lids overhanging. 12. Lower lids pufly. Plate 48 THE EYBBAI,!, AND ORBIT I. Eyeballs sunken Interocular small. 5. Orbits low. 2. Eyeballs protruding. 4. Interocular large. 7. Lower segment of iris uncovered ( or iris raised ) S. Right strabismus, convergent. 6. Orbits high. 9. Sockets deep [iW'cafet'S). Plate /p THB MOUTH I. Mouth small. 2. Mouth large. 3. Mouth with corners elevated. 4. Mouth with corners depressed. 7. Scar of chapping { gercures) on lower lip. 8. Mouth heart-shaped {eti cocur). 5. Mouth pinched. 6. Mouth gaping (bee). 9. Upper incisors uncovered. Plate so THE WRINKI^ES ^r:k I. Frontal wrinkle single. 2. Frontal wrinkle double. 3. Frontal wrinkle multiple. \JL 4. Interciliary wrinkle single. 5. Interciliary wrinkle on left , 5 huerciliarv wrinkle double side only. Plate 51 THB WRINKIyBS (continued) AND THB FACIAI, EXPRESSION I. Interciliarv circumflex. 2. Horizontal furrow at root of nose. W^^ i^^ ll^f mi ^1 3. Naso-labial furrow, jugal turrow and vertical neck-wrinkles in an old man. 4. Naso-labial furrow in young 5. Accentuation of outer portion man. ! of naso-labial turrow in smiling. . Accentuation of middle and upper portion ot naso-labial furrow in weeping. 7. Depression of head of left eye- brow under influence of light. 8. Nervous elevation of eyebrow | 9. Discordant mimicr\ — elevation and eyelids — multiple of eyebrows and lowering wrinkle of forehead. of lids. Plate 52 Plate 53 Plate 54. THE BAR Antitragus INCLINATION I. Horizontal. 2. Intermediate, 3. Oblique. 4. Rectilinear. 5. Intermediate. 6. I'lujecting. REVERSION 7. Turned outward. 8. Intermediate. 9. Erect. DIMENSION 10. Small. II. Medium. 12. Large Plate ^5 THE EAR General form and separation of the Internal Windings INKERIUk FULL) I. (Con)cave. 2. Intermediate. 3. Convex. SUPERIOR FOLD 4. Nil or effaced. 5. Intermediate and with general shape rectangular. GENER.-^L FORM 6. Accentuated. 7. Triangular. 8. Oval. 9. Round. REPARATION 10. Superior. II. Posterior. 12. Inferior. Plate 56 THE BAR Recapitulatory view of the most characteristic serial forms, which should be described on the card in all cases I. Superior border flat. 2. Superior border very large. 3. Posterior border very 4. Posterior border very small. large. 5. Lobe descending. 6. Lobe gulfed. 7. Lobe very small. 8. Lobe very large. g. Antitragus horizontal. 10. Antitragus with (con)cave profile. II. Antitragus turned outward. 12. Shell traversed. 13. Inferioi told convex in section. 14. . Inferior fold (con) cave in section. 15. Superior fold nil. 16. Superior fold accen- tuated and very long. Plate S7 PBCUlvIARITlES OF THE BAR (a) ist, of the border (figs. 1-12); 2nd, of the lobe, (figs. 13-16). - n, • • J V 1 2. Darwinian enlaree- I. Darwinian nodositv. ° ment. i 3. Darwinian projection. I 4. Darwinian tubercule. 5. Notched border. 6. Supero-posterior contour square. 7. Supero-posterior contour acute. 8. Antero-posterior contour acute. g. Superior contour birtected. 10. Border rumpled and II and 12. Enlargements of the same ear from a superior contour acute. profile and a tuU-tace photograph. 13. Lobe dimpled. 14. Lobe with inclina- 15. Lobe with inclina- tion oblique-internal. tion external. 16. Lobe with anterior torsion. Plate 58 PBCUI/IARITIBS OF THB EAR (/>) ist row, tragus and shell; and row, superior fold; 3rd row, grooves and incisures; 4th row, minimum and maximum ears. I. Traeus bifurcated 2. Shell flattened behind antitragus. 3. Shell entirely flattened. 4. Shell very wide. 5. Superior told joining 6. Superior fold with border. three branches. 7. Superior fold with many branches. S. Hematoma of su- perior told. 9. Lower point of navic- ular fossa with very broad border and prolonged across lobe. 10. Absence of lower point 11. Post-antitragian of navicular fossa. 12. Narrowness of ex- ternal auditory canal. 13. Ear with all its at- tributes "minimum," 14. "Maximum" ear with implantation vertical. 15. "Maximum" ear with implantation very oblique. 16. "Maximum" ear, ex- cept the superior fold which is very small. Plate 5p« Plate 5p b Plate 60 a Plate 60 b U < pq P< i4 tj M o ;?; o o M w W n~ P P P o M 52; W P M I Iz; o bord e bore dant. :h me o III. ^ Information ' very slow or very rapid, with short steps or with long steps, light or heavy, tripping or sedate, measured or swinging. f gesticulation abundant. \ absence of gesticulation. otrudinTgl^"*^^ d'^'^^ct or oblique. '^ — steady or unsteady. • — slow or quick. — flying. — staring. — sliding. near-sighted (myopia). ; ^ far-sighted ( presbyopia ) . " 'f *P^5"'°'^'c drawing together "< of eyebrows. , I winking of the eyelids. • broa ^ < sniffling. advancing of the lips, lifting or lowering of the corners, mocking expression of the mouth. f tic of right or left eye. i^ tic of cheek, etc. smokes; chews; takes snuff, bites his nails. •d a V A J? V ^ o )pl< voice deep or shrill, feminine voice in man or vice versa. lisping, stammering, etc., etc. metropolitan accent, provincial accent, country accent. ' the vowels, the consonants, the misplacing of the tonic accent. ' mistakes in gender, mistakes in agreement, mistakes in construction. new or old. neat or neglected. made to order, ready-made. Habiliments , »eK>ll,. ./ I bend, on .1... hi,!,.. [Sod] WST OF ABBREVIATIONS Used in the Anthropometrical and Descriptive Signalments, etc. (i) (For abbreviations used in statement of peculiar marks, see 77a.) Absent (see Nil) ear Accentuated ear Adhering ear Agrees anthropometry Ankylosis anth. Areola absent eye Azure eye Bent (or pliated ) anth. Black ( Fr, noir ) hair Blending {Vr.fondu) ear Blonde hair Bright or vivid hair Bulging forehead "Cave" (= concave) . . . .nose Centimetre anth. Chestnut eye, hair Concentric eye Convex nose Curvature or "vaulting" anth. Deep (intone, Fr.yc)«f/)eye,haif Dentilated eye Dentilated-con centric eye Depressed (Fr. abaisse ) . .nose Descending ear Deviated anth. Effaced ear Elevated (Fr. releve) nose Eminent ear Equally important eye Erect ( Fr. droit) ear Greenish (or verd) eye Gulfed ear Horizontal Humped (Fr. busque] nose Identified Inferior ear Intermediate Jail (or house of correction). . . Large ( or great ) Light (or clear, said of tone ) eyCi hair (Second toe) longer (than great toe) by anth. Maroon eye Maximum dimension . . .anth. -3 § e Englisli Alternatives nl. ac a. = k. ax. noir bent black hi. blend. "vif. b •viv. cv. cm. ch. con. •vex. •v. cur-v. d. deep d-c. ah. desc,, d. depr. d. rel. el. em. = d. erect h. grn. huiq, tnf. bmp. corr, g- cl. jail. Ige. light > mar. (J z Medium Metre anth. Millimetre anth. Minimum anth. Nil ear Oblique ear, shoulders Open ear Orange eye Oval ear Penitentiary Posterior ear Projecting (Fr. saillant) . . .ear Prolonged anth. Radiating eye Receding forehead Rectangular ear Reviewed anth. Round ear Same ( idem ) eye Separated ear Sinuous nose Slaty (Fr. ardoisee) eye Slightly Small (or petty ) Smooth (or united) ear Square ear Station (Fr. "house of arr^^/" ) Strongly or very Superior ear Traversed { ^ ^^^J ,• Jge")"'' } ^^r Triangular ear Trickery anth. Turned (Fr. verse) ear Turning grey hair Verified Vertical Very large ( Fr. tris grand ) . . . Very small (Fr. tris petit) Without fixed domicile Without papers ( sans papers) . . Without profession or business Yellow (Fr. jaune) eye m, mm. o-v. central post. s. P''- r . f. rec. r-v, rnd. id. s. ( ) arr. sup. tr'v., t. -vrf. 'g- '/>• s. d. s.pp. s.p. j- (i) In the original these abbreviations are scattered through the volume (see especially for the eye p. 146, for the hair p. 149, for the nose p. 161, for the ear p. 177, and for the sociological headings pp. 07-00); but they are collected here for the convenience of the student, and more especially to permit of giving English equivalents for those of the abbreviations based upon foreign words. The entries in bold-faced type indicate the headings under which the abbreviations are severally used. TAis table includes all the abbreviations prescribed in any part of the hook except those relating to the statement of peculiar marks. For those used in the headings on signaletic cards see plates y8-8l and index. ALBUM THIRD PART PLrATES RELATING TO THE STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS Plate 6i SUBJECT IN THE POSITION OF THE SOI^DIER WITHOUT ARMS (a) Profile view Left side of drawing, anterior plane or face ; right &\At, posterior plane or face. Application of directions in chapter I of the Third Part of the Instructions (page 212 et seq.) to the description of the scars represented on this plate: nature, shape, cur-ve, dimensions and direetion of each mark to be taken, considered without regard to its locality: No. I. — Cicatrix rectilinear of 6 oblique anterior. No. 2. — Cicatrix curved with cavity posterior of 7 vertical. No. 3. — Cicatrix curved with cavity superior of 6 oblique posterior. No. 4. — Cicatrix curved with cavity superior of 4 horizontal. Plate 62 SUBJECT IN THE POSITION OF THE SOI^DIER WITHOUT ARMS ( h) Fig [. — Left side of drawing, right external face ; right side, left external face. X y, median line. Fig. 2. — Left side of drawing, left external face ; right side, right external face. X Y, median line. Application of directions given in chapter I of the third part of the Instructions (page 203 et seq. ) to the description of the scars represented on these two figures: nature, shape, cur-ve, dimensions and direction of each mark to be taken, considered without regard to its locality: Fig. I. No. I. — Cic. rect. of 5 hor. No. 2. — Cic.of operation for croup, rect. of 3 vert. 3. — Cic. rect. of 3 obi. int. No. No. No. 5 No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 — Cic. rect. of 3 obi. ext. — Slight cic. curved with cav. sup. — Cic. rect. of 6 hor. of 10 obi. ext. — Cic. curved with cav. sup. of 7 obi. ext, — Deep cic. curved with cav. inf. of 6/0.4 almost hor. Fig. 2. No. I. — Cic. rect. of 2/0.5 °''l- *"'• No. 2. — Slight cic. c. with cav. sup. of 4 obi. ext. No. 3. — Cic. sinuous of 9/0.5 vert. No. 4. — Cic. rect. of 6 obi. int. No. 5. — Cic. rect. of 5 obi. ext. Plate 63 ANTERIOR FACE OF THE TWO UPPER I,IMBS (in tlie position of tlie soldier without arms) FAl UJl W" /f u. Fig. 2. Fig. I. a) Designation of parts A, humerus or upper arm ; E, humero-cubital articulation ; F A, forearm ; W, fold of the wrist. Left side of drawing, external face of right upper limb; right side, external face of left upper limb; in the middle, internal faces of the two members turned towards each other. b) Complete description and localization of marks represented I. Left upper limb (fig. i) No. I. — Naevus at 1 1 above cubital left external. No. 2. — Tattooing: Pour la VIE of 9 2, horizontal at 5 under cubital left anterior. No. 3. — Tattooing: a heart of 5/5 shaded, surcharging MARIE at 2 under pre- ceding inscription. No. 4, — Cic. curved with cavity superior of 5/0. 3 oblique external at 3 above wrist left anterior. II. Right upper limb (fig. 2) No. I. — Cic. (of bleeding?) rectilinear of 1.8 oblique internal at 3 under cubital right anterior. No. 2. — Furuncle at 12 under cubital right external-anterior. No. 3. — Tattooing: an anchor of 6/3 at 6 under cubital right anterior. No. 4. — Cic rectilinear of 3 horizontal at 4 above wrist right anterior half internal. Plate 64. POSTERIOR FACE OF THE TWO UPPER WMBS ( after the pronation or half- turning of the forearms in holding them forward for inspection) Fig. 2. Fig. I. a) Designation of pans A, humerus or upper arm; E, humero-cubital articulation; F A, forearm; W, articular line of the wrist. Left side of drawing, internal face of right upper limb; rigkt side, internal face of left upper limb; in the middle, the external faces of the two members turned towards each other. b) Complete description and localization of maris represented I. Left upper limb (fig. i) No. I. — Cic. rectilinear of 2 oblique internal at 4 above cubital left anterior external. No. 2. — Cic. oval of 7/4 vertical at 5 under cubital left posterior (apparently tattooing effaced). No. 3. — Cic, rectilinear of 6 oblique internal at 9 above wrist left posterior. II. Right upper limb (fig. 2) No. I. — Cic. of blister of 6/4 at 9 above cubital right anterior external. No. 2.- — Cic. curved with cavity inferior of 6 oblique external at 5 under cubital right posterior. No. 3. — Cic. rectilinear of 5 oblique external at I 3 under cubital and at 10 above wrist right posterior. No. 4. — Large freckle-nsvus at 8 above wrist right posterior. No. 5. — Tattooing: a bracelet with locket wrist right posterior. Plate 65 ANTBRIOR FAC:e OF TH^ I,BFT HAND (a) (in the position of the soldier without arms ) O, auricular or little finger; A, annular or third finger; M, medius or middle finger; I, index or first finger; P, pollex or thumb. A', A 2i and A 5, positions of ist, 2nd and 3rd phalanges of left annular, anterior. Ji, J 2. and J3, positions of the folds of ist, 2nd and 3rd joints of left annular, anterior. P' and Pi, positions of ist and 2nd phalanges of left pollex; Ji and J^, positions of the joints of left pollex. Plate 66 ANTERIOR FACE OF THE I.EFT HAND (6) (in the position of the soldier without arms) Description and localization of maris represented No. I. — Deep cic. curved with cavity internal of 4/0.2 vertical middle base of poUex left anterior. No. 2. — Cic. slightly curved with cavity superior of 4 horizontal «t I above ist joint index left antero-external. No. 3. — Cic. rect. of a vertical end of 3rd phalanx medius left anterior. No. 4. — Cic. rect. of 2 vertical between annular and auricular left anterior. Plate 6'j POSTERIOR FACB OF TH^ I^EFT HAND (a) (after pronation or half- turning of arm in act of holding forward for inspection) •a c O, auricular or little finger; A, annular or third finger; M, medius or middle finger; I, index or first finger; P, poUex or thumb. Ai, A 2 and A , positions of ist, and and 3rd phalanges of annular; Ji, Ja and j', positions of the folds of ist, 2nd and 3rd joints of annular; J> and J 2., positions of ist and second joints of poUex. X, space between pollex and index, left posterior; 2, space between index and medius; 3, space between medius and third finger; 4, space between annular and auricular. a, position of the ist phalanx of left pollex, postero-external edge. c, position of the ist phalanx of left pollex, postero-internal edge. b, position of the 2nd phalanx of left pollex, postero-external edge. d, position of the 2nd phalanx of left pollex, postero-internal edge. Plate 68 POSTERIOR FACE OF THE I.EFT HAND ih) (in the position of half- turning or pronation) Description and locali-zation of marks represented No. I. — Cic. curved with cavity superior of 2 oblique external on 2nd joint pollex left posterior. No. 2. — Cic. slightly curved with cavity superior of 4 horizontal at i under ist joint index left antero-external. No. 3. — Cic. rectilinear of 3/0.2 oblique external 2nd phalanx index left posterior. No. 4. — Nail left medius striated. No. 5. — Cic. rectilinear of 3 vertical on ist joint annular left posterior. No. 6. — Cic. curved with cavity inferior of 1.5 oblique internal ist phalanx auric- ular left posterior. No. 7. — Tattooing: a heart between pollex and index left posterior. Plate 6p FACE SEEN IN PROFII^E (a) Designation of parts I, temple; 2, cheek-bone; 3, cheek; 4, lower maxillary; 5, root of nose; 6, tip of nose; 7, right wing of nose; 8, right angle of mouth; 9, point of chin; 10, right lobe; 11, right tragus. Plate yo FAC^ SBl^N IN PROFII,^ {h) Descriplion and localization of marks represented No. 1. — Furuncle at 1.5 above external point eyebrow right. No. 2. — Cic. triangular of 0.7 a side at 3 before tragus right. No. 3. — Large naevus at 3 under and before lobe right. No. 4. — Cic. rect. of 3 oblique anterior at 3 below lobe right, under maxillary. Plate yi FACE SEEN FROM THE FRONT {a) Designation of parts I, hairy scalp; 2, right frontal boss; 3, left frontal boss; 4, median line (repre- sented by a dotted line extending from top of head to base of neck); 5, external point (or tail) of right eyebrow and external angle of right eye; 6, internal point (or head) of right eyebrow; 7, internal angle of left eye; 8, external angle of left eye and external point of left eyebrow; 9, root of nose; 10, cheek-bone; 11, left maxillarj'; 12, point of chin; 13, larynx; 14, sternal fork. Plate 7^ FACB SEBN FROM THE FRONT ih) Description and locali-zation of marks represented No. I. — Cic. rectilinear of 2 horizontal at 3 above eyebrow left half external. No. 2. — Cic, rectilinear of 1/0.2 oblique to left at I above root of nose. No. 3. — Cic. rectilinear of 2 horizontal (slightly oblique external) middle eyebrow right. No. 4. — Cic. rectilinear of 1.7 oblique external right side of nose at 2 under root. No. 5. — Naevus at 2 under external angle left eye. No. 6. — Scrofula with cavity superior of 4 oblique anterior at 6 above and to left larynx under maxillary. No. 7. — Naevus hairy at 1.5 under larynx. Plate 73 TRUNK SBEN FROM THE FRONT (a) Designation of parts ser-ving as datum points, doivn as far as the ivaist I, median line (represented by a dotted line drawn from the top of the head to the umbilicus); 2, umbilicus; 3, larynx; 4, sternal fork; 5, left clavicle; 6, left shoulder; 7, right shoulder; 8, right teat; 9, left teat. Plate 7/ TRUNK SBBN FROM THB FRONT {h) No. I.- No. 2.- No. 3-- No. 4- No. 5-- No. 6.- No. 7- No. 8.- No. 9-- No. lO Description and localization of marks represented — Naevus at 6 under larynx and at 3 to left median. -Cic. of operation for croup of 2. 5 vertical at 3 under larynx. -Deep cic. rectilinear of 6/1. 5 slightly oblique internal at 4 to right of fork on clavicle. -Naevus at 9 to left fork on shoulder. -Cic. rectilinear of 3.5 oblique external at 7 under fork and at 3 to left median. -Naevus at 2 above and behind teat right. -Very deep cic. curved with cavity superior of 8/0.2 at 15 under fork and 2 to right median. -Naevus at 3 under teat left. -Cicatricial point at 10 under teat and at 6 to left median. — Cic. round of burn of 3 at 10 above umbilicus, on median, three quarters to left. Plate 75 TRUNK SBBN FROM BEHIND (a) Designation of parts ser-ving as datum points donvn as far as the -waist I, median line represented by spinal column; 2, position of the line of the waist; 3, prominent or 7th vertebra; 4, left omoplate; 5, right omoplate. Plate y6 TRUNK SB^N FROM BEHIND (fo) Description and localization of marks represented No. I. — Cic. of furuncle cross-shaped at 2.5 to left column and at 3 above 7th vertebra. No. 2. — Cic. rect. of 3 oblique internal at I above and to right of 7th vertebra. No. 3. — Cic. curved with cavity inferior at 7 to left 7th vertebra. No. 4. — Naevus at i to right column and at 3 under 7th vertebra. No. 5. — Deep cic. slightly curved with cavity superior of 5 oblique external at 12 under 7th vertebra and at 9 to right column. No. 6. — Deep naevus at 18 under 7th vertebra and at 10 to left column. No, 7, — Cic. rectilinear of 3/0.2 oblique external at 24 under 7th vertebra and at 6 to left column. J [-- ..] STATEMENT OF PECULIAR MARKS Alphabetical Uat of Terms Abbreviated, with their abbreviaUon SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF THE MOST COMMON SIGNALETIC TERMS STATEMENT OF PECUHAR MARKS [Foru5.eoflkf-.i^nUr\ PRESENTED IN THE ORDER PRESCRIBED FOR THE DESCRIPTION AND LOCALIZATION OF PECULIAR MARKS AlPHABETICAI, LIST OF AUTHORIZED ABBREVIATIONS litrru- u.... &(].> 'sr E.|ll.> Above AUrtrl- f Eydid(Fr.>Jtt/»»*^«f) AMrtrl illn. ««. p.,„ ::• "'" DESCRIPTION IrOCAIrlZATION With the significance of each {And] .., * ?::::7;:::::: 4' /r [P"] V NATURE OR DES 1^ FORM AND CURVE DIMliNSlON GENERAL rNCJ.lNATION LOCATIVE PREPOS.. ENUMERATION OF THE PARTS OF THE BODY. PROCEEDING FROM SIDES AND FACES ( For uir of the reader) F«,k(Fr. /.«.<*,,«) (•> •/■-' P.in..,,i, TION (6) !■) OR DmELTION [»1 [And] .. Muillary or jaw-bone Special I,i8t 0( tf«r FronulboM »,,i C,», Pwerior or lejr -p P"< Abccj! _ R«lilm«r Dimemion J«> Horironl.1 * on (■■■ "■■■<■ •■ "1 No. I %Jr or« No. HI Fai. No. IV Cl,., O.J/...,./ Left(iowAe) 1 oT Aluer'ior"'* No,trl[ .Ire^^ymemionedinpartin theAlph.beti<4lLi.nniheir App.«o>ly {Fr.«r«- »..,„ .^ GrciorUrg* J" *"' ""ir.".".'"'": f« Anlryluul ""/• ^ !=:::::::. 7Pa!!,„;.,::;::::; »'« B,.,,,"""^'"" Jr, H«d(tf/f) - P„k f>> i"sl>'(*'") rSi W ." E.peci.lly(ornot.bly) EirtJ.n..ri. (..»,)... Auriculi. or litlU fin- J, Hook(Ft.(hc. • ""/ .... Deformed {dttfriort 1 i| E.,er..,. <_£ Of;*),fbll..edb,.«gureof at ilw.yi precede, a numerical Crpu. '.'.'.'.'. b.P Forchend Eye (ortV) 1' Teat Lin. (themedi.n.nd " Inrernil 'h/'p Brolcen (wid of. line) J Si'o"r',Ei ? ?= I„,e.n.l or inner.... ~^ /.«, L7."j!;;;„b,'.v::: De.i.>.d («id of ph.. Broieen (fitrrf)..,. .', o"id"°n?".',o,d"3 inri'c.'»e7re°,«!'li.l°"°'" Indci or fin, finger . 1 Eyebrows or lupercilii Eyelid! {paupiins) n Mia'n".'.!''..'""!:: 7i ,i Between pollei ind in- . Inter..! B'«P 4,, j™ ■•■■y" L rrew) f' CI.!:"""' ^j £ Clavicle Ewk-bone i Right Broken ^ Lcfi (■» ».if»r) 1 V. StuMtd "7, £;"■".'.. °: ""."""rV:...!.. Qualificatives ger T Omopl.ce crch Hook Eyelid [For Engliih uie the followlns tamili«r *nd ilceady interni- C»"iT - ^;j;y;f;;;— • Slish,or.B,h,l, ... Sn,.U(o,p,r.,) .... „ - Hooked (,....,<„).. - zlZTJz';;::°z",z. Righi a Finger or digil .... fm ■-■*•>"""'• u 7,h vertebr.. ' r Finger or digi. f.m ?SLnce Joint (.rEieul.tiun). Chcek-booe |Fr. /««■ tml (.I«*X( Lower, i» Inferior... Muillary .. ;«!- %•" " ,.m. Pi.r.,d(.ido,.„) ,. R^^'rl';':::::::::: r' Si""ll(f"») , ., Between pollex .nd in f Ridge (of the n.,e).. B.,t.cl„ (/„„) - t E.'t'!!r.Uro.,., r R«rtLe« ? ..(F-.i) ^■::i^;:. "■•: MedUn [linVof b^^ii Mole, >n Nkvdi. ;: Third fiosrr. .r^Ao^ Tip,.„'poin,. ;_r Prolubeiance of flab Spotied S;arrAn,; •h'Ped'ete.' ,^i Slight .'..'..[ 0.vlfir') Short ('•"") E.pe=lJI,(..,™„.,) 4 ,;, fi, ^*°.T'" .!""','",'.". ;ir Mouth (*..,«,) .... L,p,(«.TO) Polnl (of ,h, chin, eyebrowr, etc) Dimple (of the chin) Larjn. /•' Leg(ju»ir) In.tep ic.u-Je-p'iJ). , . Poot(^VJ) z 1 Dimple or fouerte Lltje or great Angle or corner lndV."or°li™6"g., Right Eyebrow ot tupeicil- » 'tligi. lifTs'Sej" '*""'"' u N«Yu' '^'"'"''*"'' Tnvei^ed rr* Shoulder, (;/o„to) _ Infer,or«i under Situiced ^ ,. :.. Ill Tritngle or triangul.r „lll Tnvcned or cban- . Ankxloied _r t""'"'" d ho cncvit. (t .,, "TT.::::.":^ .. Upptr, .rr Superior. -0 ...„ Twijled ~l Slight or .lightly Irigl TuBui Tri.ngle conc.it, Curecd, with anterior Etpccillly or noubljr . . l)n..pl.l. ..,; T "' ";" „, ""i""' ■-r- ofo.'""" "-"V7-" "an\!s" "P< « tx _„ finger "a, Vmicd"'"'" Appwently Variola or imall-poi <-P Curved, wHhpolterior c'r^dTSh eelernal ^^ ,!:;:. L,o„.„,<,„^..„;„r.,L,j: " »-•"■■■'!» ^ iodi„,„ ,.., ,h. .„d ,r,„ .hieh i, i. p,..d d.„ ,„, .do,,, or..hre,i„ioo. .od ,h., i, .ho.id .o„.e,.eh„, he .r,„.o oo, io «,. The ..be, .„.. o, „..„ .n.„er, .,. ,h. .,o,M. ...h.rir.d for o.e o„ ,H. .i.„..,i, „,d.. :i SSl'etr. '^ Ve'r'itV ''" ""'"'" ^ \ i^ Plate 77. SPECIMEN OF ABRIDGED WRITING. Description and I^ocalization of the Peculiar Marks mentioned in Plates 63-76. Plate 63. I .JL^H^ uMi&i/£i/?nA; drCte/tuny- to*. Pour g^VIEof ^^@ 5 -^ C0 I W. ^ MARIE @ % -r -taAJjOLcU/yi^ H . ytumttA^I^V £lyn^ ChiWUcrv. ^ — y <^ "^ "^ -o ft S>.^ la -^ c;6-^«)) £_cx. ^ . toJC . 1 tvn.cl^ of ,% @ 6 _^ c^ ao(. PLATE 6A-. (cx>^oju/vvfcl*y tcvt. e^-^^ Jl-O'^|0(? Puate 68. OVX/- A.og-3cc_^ 1.5 e-^^Ji^ f toi-p Plate 70. -guc, M . 000 "trVL/aL. Cr|- 07 ^ uu Root (depth; V»» _ base^?y»Jl) •5*^ Height-ZVaatJ! |< "Height Projec. Width ' -'^ Width _5ju bord. O.'Mav-'S'. - lobe c.i&U. a m%!^^ D. .^0.^ anti-trg. ; p r fold / s ;/.. ul._L=k^yr D l^pec rd M-^o^M*^ ■^ bear^ /"~-">«><^ o § / Pigment S/— hair <^. "^^^ "V^-^-^u " I Sanguin. -ifc. Should. WX-/.^Sfc_ Girth _/>«« charac. traits V^^ '''^''^ ^^**-r«-iV . III.— Notes on the measurements.- Peculiar marks and scars. T JtJb /, | ^-~>w ^ ^>^ ^ ^ -s. J? \ X^ .vJl a> -t q( (^iLjuU^) ^,V / y.^. — 'To M y rAOTMER J§-Jl jcS^ f J2C_ JLLl^Si ff^ xC =^==^ yQ:2-*iVt -^ JLJb. //>c^(a-^-t-cJ^iS/ _£A-C«!__-3rV_ JS-^ ^ V/X^^jLu^^ / j.,.v^a: |4L. cA i^ --p. III. {H) j^ j- -^ -^ — V- -C^ ^ i^P # ■'«.^-t-A--A-J >vAM,t^**- ^y >. ^ oLP..>..rs.S- ^ -^ 0,jjl JA^ ^ -^ |> ^ ■wy .v-a^x>»A ■ ^ e? , »— ^ < " cL^r -?/ . ^ ^°Jt:>.. iSl. g*^ ^.irw ^>^>^ r taken -r ^^\^ . iS^, l«Qa. hy j Names -l GIia.»>>*^ , <^. ^^ , officer at <^Ait^ Con. No-Z4(_ Signalment j .^^^^^^.j^^^.^^ S A!X. /A"^ JSQa. by | initials j /^^n^wAX,Q> of central anthropometrical service, Paris. Translation written out in full of the description of peculiar marks in abridged -writing on the specimen card above. Notes. — (1) right arm amputated at 4<^n> above wrist ankylosed at cubital. (2) left omoplate projecting (humpback). (3) 3rd phalanx of left medius shortened (whitlow) and nail curved back. I. Tattooing 1 pansy biceps left [side] external [face]. Cicatrix rectilinear of 1<^'" horizontal middle cubital left anterior (of bleeding). Tattooing 1 tomb under TO MV MOTHER at 4cm under cubital left anterior. (o'ver'j III. (4) Left eye amputated (5) parietal baldness (wears wig). Cicatrix rectilinear of 2<^'" horizontal middleeyebrow, right. Naevus at S"^™ under and behind left corner mouth. IV. Wart at •l"^'" under and before right teat and 6'^'" from median. Cicatrix rectilinear of 4<^'" oblique to right at 8'^'" above umbilicus on median. Deep furuncle at "S*^"" under to left fork and 3'^"' from median. (o-ver) Plate yg SIGNALETIC CARD of the size to be classified anthropotnetrically, with manuscript entries ( Verso') No. 3^,6'^(. Name! ( fami/y and zi-ven): / ^^if K/\J\JiA^AJ^ Nicknames and aliases: — <«igi" ^ <> ^X-*^ Born on ^W-^^*- I ^1^ IS-Slv at (?/0-K^ garites : SV^iaX ^ O p.^^.f^p„t (O Son of^ Profession: Papers of identity:. Relations .xindof- ^A^-AuUL-^K^ C^j^^^y-if,,.^ ~ ,3.^.^^.^-Xa>^ la^t „,;A,nr.- ^JL^ya, i(^M.j^ Xt^^ J^AMjL. Military irrTvVrr • fya-itf ^Y-T'Liig f ' y-r*-r^ ■"''^^-r^**/ ■ . Previous convictions, number "f- J Cauie and place of last previous imprisonment: ^Vi* ~i . r^.n,- -j *y^ ^«>> A r rC«^J^,-g-.~^ . Present imprisonment, specification of offense: \r ^^— i .«yi.>.- «■> , ■ t K.'^*^ Jju»,> aj!4. Known Arrests. ^ Sundry Information. <''~'-»-'t-*< 4 6^ >-^ tit^ A ^ .«,^ ^ yy c^ _f: S<.^>v^ t^ fl.,6buUvwJ L ?\««'< < -C .fcO' TX , S~» ^x^.^^ XMJ^'V ^.o^^^-A^A *a. ■ J yg^vtJ. ^ .<«<*»^v< /^tA oblique in- ternal 2nd phalanx annular left [side] anterior [face] . II. Tattooing 1 sailor leaning on an anchor at 4cm under cubital right anterior. 2 naevuses, distant by 4'^'" vertically at 4^™ under cubital right internal. Cicatrix oval of 4/3 horizontal hiding an inscription at 3 under cubital right posterior. Naevus hairy at 2 under middle clavicle, left. V. Deep cicatrix starry of 4/3 at 2*™ under omoplate, right. VI. 5th toe of each foot turned over 4th» Amputation of 4th toe, right. {on the verso) Wine-mark oval of 6/4 middle left buttock. Cicatrix oval of 3/1 at 5 above knee, right, external face. \_P/aie 7p a] SIGNAI^BTIC CARD FOR FUSING ANTHROPOMETRICAI,I,Y Special form used at Paris when subject is photographed [Recto, with judicial photograph and finger-prints.) height, 1">„ curvature — reach, Im — trunk, 0"" left foot- left medius left auricular left forearm ' class - I areola- periph. u \ pecul.- age born on- at in app. age . color- pecul. I 5 rPiement. (J^l^pecul Taken at Paris, on — by 'color — m I pecul Sanguin.- [For mechanical reasons the headings of the French card are necessarily reproduced in the following fac-similes of finger-prints taken by Dr. Bertiilon in Paris.] verified on- -by- Impression of right: Thumb Index Medius and Annular Remarks 1 . The other side ( 'veno ) of the card represented above is exactly like the one on plate 79, as far as the head- ing " Present imprisonment, specification of offense," inclusive; and the rest of it is a reproduction of the por- tion of the card on plate 78 provided for the notes and statement of peculiar marks, beginning " III. — Notes on the measurements," etc., and omitting the headings at the bottom for dates of taking and verifying the signalment. 2. In all the cards now in use by the French govern- ment the bi-zygomatic diameter (see p. 2r)9) is substi- tuted for the width of the right ear, as above. 3. In most places except Paris the cards used for the anthropometrical and alphabetical files (see p. 67) differ only in size, and both have the form represented on plates 78 and 79. In Paris, however, the cards for the anthro- pometrical file are now of one of the forms given above and in plate 79 b\ while those filed alphabetically are exactly like the form on plates 78 and 79, except that the bi-zygomatic diameter is substituted for the width of ear, and that two lines are left for the notes above and outside of the double columns for the statement of peculiar marks, instead of one line at the beginning of the first column. SIGNAI.BTIC CARD FOR FII^ING ANTHROPOMETRICAI,I,Y Special form used at Paris when no photograph is taken {Redo, with space for finger-prints.) I.— Anthropometrical Observations. height, In- curvature reach, In^- trunk, Qf" - 'Arches - inclin. . Height. Width . ^pecul. — Ilength- width - bl-zyg.- right ear- left foot- left medius- left auricular . left forearm - 'class - areola- peripherv- ^pecul age — born on- at -18- app. age- II.— Descriptive Information. 'Root (depth) ridge base- gi Height Projec. Width -pecul. Labial height- prom border thickness- •pecul. fbord. Orig c3 I lob. contour, ^\ . ... 60 I anti-trg. tnclin.- [fold, infer -Sup -adher.. -profile- -Post.- -model . -, openmg- Dimen. — supe —re-version- -iform -Dimen.- -j separ. Contour of face- position — direction form dimen. pecul. — color opening model upper- pecul. projection — pecul. rbits . Interocular - frontal . ocular . buccal . pecul expression Hairy system and Complexion. color nature insertion .abundance — 1 o ( Pigment. o'S •< color nature — implant. - pecul. -Sanguin.- pecul. Taken at Paris, on^ by -188- rified by- ■S ( Dimen. I I pecul. _ ( inclin Height- pecul. _ H ^fronto-nasal naso-buccal- Cranial height U ^malform — pecul. — pecul. — Concha: Height- . Width- -pecul -Degree of fleshiness- C Neck, Length Width '3 ■{ Shoulders, Width incli. y Girth Bearing, speech, dress, etc.. [Space for finger-prints .J Remarks. 1. The verso or reverse of this card is exactly like that of the form with photograph, represented in plate 79a. 2. Medius=xmA6.\& finger ; auricular=litt\c finger ; index=^(irst finger ; anna/ar=third finger. Fro«/o-nfli /» (Photograph omitted in this edition. A much more recent one is given in plate 79a, which see.] a. O o 3- •a " -a ,_, a. i Anthropometric Observations Chromatic Indications. height, ln> ft'Y. l] curvature I reach, Im A''0 .'tv trunk, Om ?^.g . length — /g. J I ( width — /6'. 6 £ ( length O. 3/ 5^1 width 3. a left foot ^^JMl^ left middle f.Qo.OO) left little f. ^. ^ left forearm^Sg". S* )) •= f class -3- i areola A*. «0'^. ''*^- .pecul.. periphery 'W',^' Vi'hi' n ( Pigmentary-^.ijt 1^ f Pigmen c3- ( Sanguir ^. Arches yu indin.piiai^^ Height Width /^~v.. VculiifMff^.., UMAw CuXv.ti, (Uk^lJlt. Descriptive Information (analyzed from profile): General Contour .^^s-^WJ*"^ „ ( Labial ht-^jd^ J ( pecul. ^fc^^C^l /- inclia Mtfy-^=^^ I 3 Height js^ ( pecul. WJtoftJ ^Root (depth) _::!^v5d_ ridgeMsiL^ base wt5£^J. *j Height Projec. Width LAA.> yw\y /vw ^bord. Orig Sup.-iu — Posl.-ic — , opening: lob. cont.^^(^adher^^^:*:^model.^!itiaSiDifnen^t:^Si_ anti-trg. inclin /"""/• rcver, Dimen. _ fold infer super^^^ic-^ form ; Sep "^pecul. Descriptive Information (analyzed from full face): General Contour ^^'^fM.rr^;^, f**y ^ 111 hair >^w l^p^ beard W^-Ax ? C position Jl-ny .0 ■{ volume >*'^>*t " V. pecul. I{ opening S:^Sfc_*»JL model upper Projection of eyeball. Interocular pecul. of eye wrinkles pecul <~a^ ^>ty a. expression neck X»Vv>«^ HTj*^ attitude, earmg . Should. /irJ«_ /-cSfi I b Girth habiliments indry ^? -JtiJtA., »od of body 14, 25, 102, 103 of reach 103 see Vaulting. Curved (c. ) cicatrices .. 61, 217, 218, 235, 236, 77a finger-nail 225 profile of forehead 32 see Recixrved. Customs authorities, signalment by . . x Cut ear 115. 171 of beard 189, 60c scar of 215 Cutting out of photographic prints . . 242 CV. or c. = cavity or concavity. .237, 77a Cymbocephalichead 185, 41 d. =dentelated 146, 147, 8/a d. or ^ = dexter = right 61, 235, 77a d. = descending (lobe) 177 d. ^ deviated (toe) 120 d. = droii = erect (antitragus) 177 D. = dimension 163, 165, 166, 177 d-c. =■ dentelated-concentric . . . . 146, 147, 8/a d-r. = dentelated-radiating Sia Dandified gait 205 Danish accent 209 Dark eyes 33 Darwinian enlargement, nodosity, projection and tubercule. .170, 57 Dash = absence of antitragus 166 of areola 146, 147 of cm^'ature 102 of peculiarities. . . 169, 223 Date of photograph 243 on card 96, 99 Datiun points 214, 222, 231, 77a of back 228, 75 face, ears and neck 226, 69, 71 Datum points of forearms 224 hands 64^ 67 neck and chest, 227, 73 upper-arm 223 prepositions relating to, 221 Day -laborer recognizable 211 Dead bodies, identification of vii Death certificates, signalment in ... . 80 Decametre, value of xx Decay, signalment necessitated by., vii Decentralizing the camera.. 242, 247, 248 Dechiquetee = jagged 171 Decimetre = 3.937 inches xx scale. 90 Deciphering of abridged writing .... 232 Decl. = prisoner's statement or dec- laration 98 Declassed person recognizable 211 Deeds, signalment in 80 Deep {/once, f.) tone (of color) 146-7, 60J voice 206 Defense against signaletic conclusions, 258 counsel for 232 Deformity of head 113, 185 nails 77a nasal bones 159 toes 120, 121 peculiarities resulting from viii resemblance resulting from 257 Degingand^e = gawky 205 Dehanchee = swinging 205 Dele-mark 235 Delicate nostrils 159 Z)rt'z skin 200, 224 Fonce {£.) ^deep (in tone), 146-147, 6od Fondu = blending 165 Foot, average length of for each height 254 fourth basis of classification. . 21 measurement of.ii, 17, 18, 24, 26, 1 18-122, 20, 21 middle finger 21 its relation to sizes of shoes, 18, 255 Foot in linear measure = .30481 metre xx Foot caliper, 90-92, 11S-120, 123-129,/, 4 Foot-stool 78, 107, 1 18, / Forearm, anatomical faces of. .220, (5j, 64 average length of for each height 254 INDEX 15 Forearm, datum points of 223, measurement of. .ii, 3, 18, 24, 26, 1S6, /, 4, 28- the fifth basis of classification, Forefinger, see Index. Forehead [front, fr.).. 152-153, 186, 201, 202, 237, J/, ji-, headings for 45, 250, insertion of hair around .... its elevation in children .... itg inclination its shape its wrinkles 192, 199, shown in photograph Foreign accent 178. Foreigners, apparent resemblance of. Foreign signalments, use of Forgery makes signalment necessary, Fork, sternal (frc, /rJt. ) . .227, 228, 23S, 7^. Form, description of of areola 138, 146, ear peculiar marks, 214, 217-218, Formula, descriptive for description of eye. . 140- 143, 145, for calculating size of shoe from length of foot for statement of peculiar marks 221 see Mnemonic. Fortement (forii.) ^strongly, very much 152, Fossae, or fosses of ear 162, see Digital and Navicular. Fosse tte or dimple {fst. ) 237, in chin lobe of ear 171, see Dimple. Foundrymen, their characteristic scars Four (IV. )^= part of body above waist, (4) = chestnut eyes 141, Fourchctte (frc, /rt. ) = sternal fork JPl-. = forehead 237, Fracture of forearm Fraise = strawberry-mark. .:.... 215, France.. iii, vii, ix., 44, 69-71, 148, 185, 209, 224 -jod 77a 60c 188 187 51 188 200 242 207 258 ix ii 77a 47 8/a 168 77a 5 M7 18 -222 156 169 77a 182 172 57 222 8ia 77a 77a 129 77a 216 France, its centralized signaletic ser- vice 232 penal laws of 12 results of Bertillon system in. . .71 -76 see Bordeaux, Lille, Lyons, Mar- seilles, Nancy, Paris, Toulouse. Frank glance 206 */2'C.=fourchette=sternal fork [frk. ) 238, 77rt Freckles {fkle., ronss. ^^ rousseiij-) notation of 150, 238, 77a French accent 208, 209 chestnut 135 signalments ix sizes of hats 255, 256 style of beard, see Imperial. French, the international police lan- guage ix Friction of calipers in measuring head, 259 Frizzly hair 187, 189 *frk. {*frc. ) — sternal fork 238, 77a Froissie = r\ira-p\QdL 171 Front = forehead. Front of body represented by IV 222 teeth, loss of 198 view, headings for 250 Frontal baldness 188 bosses 153, 188, 226, 236, ji", 7/ sinuses 153, j2 insertion of hair dor wrinkles 200, 7gb Frontiers, necessity of signalment on viii, 70 Fronto-nasal profile 184, 257 wrinkles, see Wrinkles 7gb Fronto-parietal baldness 188 Frost-bites 171 Fugitive criminals, capture of . . .4, 6, 66 Full face photograph, 243, 55, 201, 202, 240, 244, 245, 247, 248, J7. 79a Full-length photograph 241, 243 Full orbit 197 Fundamental shades of iris, see Ground-colors. Fur.=furuncle or boil 238 Furniture for measuring-room, . . .85, / Furrows at joints 224 of face (see Jugal, Submen- tal, Supramental and Wrink- les).... 50, 178, 181, 182, 199-202 Furuncle (fur. )==boil scar, 215, 227, 238, 77c i6 INDEX Fusion of antitragus with helix 172 J^uya>il=receding 152 g.=gaiiche=le{t 61, 235, f/a ^.=great or large 177, 233, 236, ^^a Gait, description of 204, 205, 60c Galton, Francis, his system of identi- fication 14 Gamin, Parisian, accent of 207 Gaping mouth 198 Garments, see Clothing 210 Gauche = left 61 , 235 Gawky (gait) 205 Gelatine of sensitive plate, defects in 242 Gelatine-roller for finger-tips 260 General appearance, description of 178, 204 characters 202 demeanor 205 form of ear 168, 177 impression 210, 257 Geneva, Bertillon system at 66, 79 (7(?«0M=knee 77a Geographical names, abbre\4ation of 96 C^rr/or 5= chapping on lips 181 German accent 208, 209 script h 235 sizes of hats 256 Gestures, description of 204, 205, 60c gf. = gulfed (ear) 175, 177 Giant height 36 Girth, notation of 175 Gitanos or gj-psies Sob Given names, notation of 79, 8/ gl.=ang\e or corner (of eye, mouth, etc.) 237, 77a Glance, description of 205, 206, 60c Glass, see Mirror. Glass eye 146 Globe of eye ( see Eyeball) 195 Goatee 189 Goitre 203 Government patronage of Bertillon sj-stem 10 Graduation on back of posing-chair . 246 calipers 90, 91 wall / Grammatical blunders 209 Gras=^thick. or fat 203 Grasseyement = thickness = mispro- nunciation of 207 Grave (voice )=deep 206 Great or large {g.) 150, 152, 233, 236, 77a Great toe 119 Greek letters 233, 234, 235, 6od, 77a profile 184 Green eye 34 Greenish color in iris (v.) 42, 137, 146, 60c 8ia Grey eye 34, 131, 8ia hair 149, 6od Greyish zone and iris 134, 145 Grimaces, noted 206, 60c Grisonnant (grs. )=turning grey 149 Ground-glass of camera 241, 246-248 Ground-colors of eye, 41, 43, 44, 137, 8ia ^rs. =turning grey {grisofitia7tt) ,i^(), 6od Guiding-rod for ascertaining form of anthelix 167, 168 Guillamne, Dr., cited 78, 79 Guilty, punishment of, secured by signalment, see Criminals . . viii Gulfed {gf.) lobe of ear, 49, 165, 175, 6od Gypsies, resemblance among. ,. .258, 60b 2i.=horizontal 161, 177, 204, 77a Habiliments (see Clothing) 210 Habits 204, 206 Hair [ckeveux, chvx. ), its color, 41. 147-149, 237, 77a implantation of 178, 4^ varieties of 187, 188, 43 of children 187 of subjects photographed. , . 242 vocabulary for 60c Hairy nae\nis 216 scalp 71 system 149, 256 Half -metre scale 86, 87, 88, i Hammer-shaped toe 121 Handkerchief 210 Hands, their anatomical faces, 214, 220, 65- 67 their habitual postxire 204 their parts 223 Hare-Up 181 Hat, notation of 210 wearing of in photographic sittings 241, 243 sizes of 255 Hatred, physiognomy of 201 Hazel eyes 136 Head, artificial deformities of 185 carriage of 204 shape of 186-187, 41, 42 INDEX 17 Head, measurements of, ii, 17, 20, 21, 68, 107-113, I vocabulary for 60c Head of eyebrows 190, 200-202 Head-caliper 68, 90-92, 107-112 Head-rest for judicial photograph, 241, 244, 247 Headings on signaletic cards, 45, 53, 93. 95. 133. 152, 178, 249, 250, 78, 81 capital initials in 47, jgb Health, characteristics of 193 Heart-shaped mouth 199 Heavy step 205 Hectometre, value of xx Height, average 29, 38 dimensions corresponding to each 254 in verbal portrait 251 measurement of ii, 16, 24, 25, 100-103, numerical limits of its de- grees 34- recognizable from photo- graph relation of size of trousers to 255 seventh basis of classifica- tion signaletic importance of . . . . variations in 14, 36, loi, verbal description of 34, Height of forehead nose 157, trunk, see Trunk. Heirs, impersonation of prevented by signalment • vii Helix of ear 162, 172, 173 Hem of ear 114 Hematoma of ear 173, 5^ High concha 172 eyebrows 190 orbits 197 Hippology 3 Holland, Bertillon system in ix Hollow {creuse) 77a Hollow of ear, see Concha 172 orbits 197 Hollows in gelatine 242 Homer cited 13 Hooked {en crochet) crch. hook) ci- catrices 217, 237, 77a nose, see Parrot nose 34 5 37 246 21 203 203 36 J^ 33 Horace Greeley beard, see Collar. Horizontal (2i) antitragus, 51, 165, 175, 177. 6od cicatrices 218, 219, 236, 77a nose 52, 156, 161, jj origin of anthelix 172 roundness of back 204 section of ear 166, 175 shoulders 203, 204 wrinkles 192, 199-201 Horse-dealer, recognizable 211 Horse-shoe, cicatrices in shape of . . . , 217 House of correction ( corr. ) 6od Hoyos-Baron insurance case 80, 81 Humero-cubital articulation, see Cubital 223 Humerus=upper arm 6j, 64 Hump-backs 102, 257 Humped [bjisque) nose 155, 159, 6od Humped-sinuous nose 155, 160 Hunting of men 6, 7 Hunting permits, signalment on 3, 32, 53 Hygienic conditions of measuring- room 85 I=index or forefinger 236, 77a i=inclination 165, 78 i^ntermediate=dull violet blue (in eye), 139, 146, 177, 204, 8ia i=internal, see iota. . . . 139, 146, 147, 6od id.=idem=^th.e same 8 /a Identification., .vii, viii, 6, 11, 64, 75, 7g by accent 207 anthropometry iii, 23, 32 ear 45, 46, 240 eccentric measures 251 eye 240 partial signalment 68 peculiar marks, 59, 63, 64, 232 photographs,4,202,24i, 256-258 tattoos 216 wrinkles 200 different systems of 13 in public places 130, 249 of signalments viii, 84 Identification, value of ix cards for travelers, etc 80 service of Paris, see Bertillon system, iii, vii, 10, 54, 66-69 of criminals, Ryckere on ... . 79 Identity, cases of disputed 257 i8 Jdf.=identified 68, Illegibility, how to avoid Illegitimate birth Illinois State Penitentiary Illinois State Ref ormator}- I.-M.=hetween index and medius fingers Immigration laws, necessity of signal- ment for enforcement of . . . . Immobilizing camera and posing- chair Imperial ( cut of beard ) Impersonation prevented by signal- ment Imp i£-mc a it'=un-pigmented Implantation of beard 149, 178, ear eyebrows 178, 190, hair 149, 178, 187,188, Impressions of ear 13, finger-prints Imprisonments, former, noted 79 z;/.=inclination 172, 176, /!iac/ieve=un&msh.ed Incisors 1S3, Incisures of ear Inclination ( indin. ) 78 of antitragus. . .51, 165, 175, base of nose 52, chin cicatrices. .. ,214, 219-220, corners of mouth eyebrows forehead 51, 142 lobe of ear shoulders 176, 203, scheme of degrees of Incomplete ankylosis Incompletely maroon eyes. Indented ears, how measured Index (Jj-forefinger, 213, 224, 225, 260, 65, 66, Index, remarks on this Index-mark on instruments 19, India, Bertillon system in 78, Indistinct, or slight marks Individuality So, 203, Inequality mark ( > ) Jnf. =^inferior (separation of ear) . . . Infants, artificially deformed Inferior {int. )=lower ( -^ ) . . . 234, INDEX 6od 232 97 viii ix 2:.6 248 1S9 \4i &ia 179 174 192 226 240 260 , 81 203 77a 198 169 , 80 177 156 181 236 198 190 . 31 172 204 52 125 137 115 236 77a ix 91 151 77a 206 121 177 185 77a Inferior cavity-cur\'e ( ''— ^ ) 218, 235, 76, 77a (infer.) fold of anthelix... 166, 168, 172, 175, 177,56, 80 members, see Lower limbs. separation of ear 160, 60a Inflammation of finger joints, see Wliitlow. /«yb;';;/(?^shapeless 77a Inflexion of neck 204 Initials of headings on cards, 47, 150, 163 used as abbre\nations. . .233, 236 Injur}' to eye 134 Injustice prevented by signalment, vii, \-iii Insane, identification of the 8 Inscriptions tattooed on body 216 Insertion of hair 187, 188 pavilion of ear 169, 174 Installation of measuring-apparatus, 88, 80 posing-chair 247 Instantaneous photography 240 Instructions for signalment, 83-238, 259 method of studying 83 Instruments, signaletic, i, 18, 22, 28, 87-92, / Insurance, necessity of signalment Interciliary wrinkles, (see Vertical) 192, 199, 200, 202 Intercrural fossa of ear 162 Intermediate (f ) ankylosis 125, 6od anthelix 49, 166, 167, 168 antitragus, 49, 50, 51, 165, 166, 177 border of ear 48, 166, 177 ear 50, 165 inclination of forehead, 51, 152, 153- 31 lobe of ear 50, 166, 177 or violet color of iris, 43, 131, 135, 139. H6, 147, 60c shoulders 204 Internal, or inner ( — . i^O 77^ advantage of using word .... 213 angle of eye 226, 7/ cavity, curve with (c i'), 235. <5i>, 77a cubital 223 faces of limbs... 212, 214, 62, 6j <^ Internal fold of ear ,see Anthelix, 49, 50, 51. 163 oblique, see Oblique 219 overhanging of eyelid 1 93 point of eyebrow 226 represented by iota ( : or i) . . 234 windings of ear, see Ant- helix ^s abbreviations ix, 7 International associations of crimi- nals 79 bureau of signalment 79 exchange of signalments, etc. ix, 80 language of police ix Prison Association 5, 78 use of Bertillon system, 70, 73,78- 81 Interocular=space between eyes .... 196 Interpretation of osseous signal- ments 225 Interrogation mark, in statement of peculiarities 215 Inter-tragian canal 179 Introduction of Bertillon system, vii, viii Inverted commas, see Dash (substi- tuted on English cards). Investigation of signaletic cards. . .ix, 70 Iota ( £ or i ) :=internal or inner. 6 1 , 239, ^ya INDEX 19 Japanese 151, 196 Jaundiced complexion 150 /atine=yeU.ow 146, 147 Jaws 183 distant or separated {ecarte) . 186 identification by 13 prominence of 182, 184 see Maxillary. Jawbones or maxillary {mx.) Iris. 134 240 131. as means of identification, 13. described by Buffon and Aristotle 42 its color 41, 44, 8/a its peculiarities 196, 8/a Irregular border of ear 171 heads 113 incisors 198 Italian accent 208, 209 chestnut 135 Italics, conventional use of 165 j.^oint ( of finger) p'/a j.=yellow [jatine] 146, 147, 8ia j, faulty pronunciation of 207 j. a.=jainais arreie=nev&r arrested. 98 Jagged {dtchiqtieUe) border of ear. . . 171 Jails ( corr.) Sod adoption of Bertillon system in iii Jainbe=\^% see yja 226, 237, 88a 257, 60a 125, 224 Jimmy-jawed 184, Joints 103, represented hy j 236, jja Joue^chee'k //a Journal des Parquets, cited 80 Journal des Tribunaux, cited 79, 80 Judicial authorities, adoption of sig- nalment by iii, ix certitude of identity 64 copies of signalments for. , . 232 photography, 47, 54, 64, 113, 195, 202, 239-249, 256-258, ^ga 80 value of signalment (see Courts) 65, 73 Jugal furrow 199 i-=ankylosis 126, 129, 6od, yja Kanaka 151 Keel-shaped head 185 Kilometre, value of xx Knitting eyebrows 202 Laborers, hands of 123 Lachrymal caruncle 134 Laineux=-woo\\y 187 Lande, Dr., inscription of 243 Language, peculiarities of 211, 60c Large (^.) 152, 164, 177, 198, 233, 236, 77a Large caliper rule (see Foot caliper) 18, 19 Za^^«;^width ( Lr. ) 176 Larmiers or tear-channels 158 Larynx (irx. ). .203, 227, 237, 7/, /j, 77a Lashes of eyes 193, 194 Lateral faces of body. 212 Latin or ordinary letters supple- mented by Greek 233 Laughter, physiognomy of. 198, 201, 207 Laws against recidivation 73, 74 Lawsuits, value of signalment in 80 Lawyers, necessity of this work to.. x 20 INDEX I/carning of signaletic methods, 9, 61, 83, 232 Left {gauche), abbreviated by ^ or ^ 61, 235, 77a place of word in cicatricial phrase 213, yya Left eye, focusing on 240, 244, 245 side of body obser\'ed first 222 Leg {jambe) -/ja Legal documents, signalment in 80 Legerenient {legt. ) ^^ slightly 156 Legibility of abridged writing 231 Legislation, penal 12, 69 Legitimate and legitimated children distinguished 97 Legt. ( Igt. ) =/4^^r(?;«^«^=slightly , i , 156 Length of ear 24, 113-116, 254, 16 eye 158 eyebrows 191 foot 21 forearm 21 head, average for each height 254 measurement of ii, 17, 24, 107-110, 8, II primary basis of classifi- cation 20 little finger 21 middle finger ii, 21 neck 203 Le Royer, H., cited 5 Letters, conventional use of 47 mispronunciation of cer- tain 207 used as abbreviations 233 Z^z^r^^=lips 181 i^.=light, slighter indistinct ..237, jja Z,z>z<=place. Life insxirance, , signalment in, vii, viii, x, 80, 81 Light or slight {Ig.) 237, 77a step 205 (1. ) tone 146, 147, 149, 6od Light, apparent color of eye affected by 41, 43 for judicial photographs, 202, 240, 245 wrinkles resulting from 202 Lighting of studio 247, 248 Lille, signaletic service at 69 Limbs, anatomical faces of 212 "Limit explorations" in anthropo- metrical file 22 Limit, use of word in notation of eyes 144, 8ia Limoges, peculiarities of Frenchmen from 186 Limping gait (see Medium) 205 Line of hair 26 wrist 75 Linear cicatrices or scars 217, 219, 236 measure, system of xx Lines, how described 47 Lines of articulation, theoretic 224 insertion of beard 189 Z/^/>M=blubber-lipped or blubber- mouthed 181 Lips, description of 250 headings for. . .178, 180, 181, 60c varieties of J9 Lisping 207 List of abbreviations 232 figures and plates, remarks on X Little or petty [p., sm.) 150; 152, 163, 233 > 236, 77a Little finger (little f.) or auricular, (O), 21, 24, 125, 213, 224, 65, 66, 77a, 78, 80 average length of for each height 254 sixth basis of classification , . 21 Lobe (lob.) or lobule of ear, 49, 114, 115, 162, 165, 169, 171, 172, 175, 177, 226, 257, 258, S3, 56, 57, 6g, So, 60c vocabulary for 177 Localization of peculiar marks, 63, 214, 221-229 Locative prepositions in cicatricial phrase 214, 221, 222 Long eyebrows 191 eyelashes 194 head, limits of 20 neck 203 skull 185 Looks, good or bad, result of com- plexion 150 Loss of teeth 198 Low eyebrows 190 orbits 197 Lower, see Inferior ( — G > 234, 77a eyelid, shape of 194-195 INDEX 21 Lower members, statement of pecu- liar marks on 229 part of body represented by VI 222 Lozenge-shaped face 186 L .=^large2ir=-widXh. 176 Jt.rx.=larynx 237, 77a Lupus yya Luxation of arm I04 Lyons, signaletic service at, 69, 76, 84, 231 in=medium 146, 147, 236, 7ja, 8/a Jtf^medius or middle finger. . . .236, j^a lH=model (of lobe) 165, 209 M'-A=between medius and annular fingers 236 M-shaped cicatrices jja McClaughry, Major R. W iii, 5, ix Bertillon system introduced by ix this translation under su- pervision of X Magistrates, use of signalment by. . . 77 Mahogany-red hair 41, 148 iJ/a?«=hand see jja Malformation of bones 185, 257 Manners to be noted 205 Mannerisms to be noted 257 Manouvrier, Dr 7, 74 mar. = maroon 146-147, 6od, 8ia Marigold-yellow in eye 143 Marks, localization of 221 Maroon {mar.), eyes 33, 42, 131, 135-139, 146-147, 6od, Sia Maroon-in-circle eyes 137, 139, 141 Marseilles, signaletic service at , 69, 76, 84, 231 Masculine voice in woman 206 Maxillary (mJt. ) or jawbone (jaw.) 183, 226-227, 237, 6g, 7/, jja Maximum dimension represented b)- (J 20, 6od discrepancy tolerable .... 24, 27 implantation of eyebrows. , . 191 mhl. = umbilicus or navel 238, jya md. = median line of body 238, "jja Mean, divergency of measures from . 32 INIeasure of foot for shoes iS Measured gait 205 Measurement, correct method of . .8, 15 Measurement, error in 251 of bi-zygomatic diameter . . . 259 height 246 torsion 01 anthelix 167 trunk 246 width of ear 259 Measurements ii, 15 Measurer, name of, to be noted 99 Measuring-boards, 85, 86, 100-102, 204, / Measuring furniture 85, / Measuring-room 85, 132, 133, 251 Mechanic, recognizable 211 Mechanical measurement of trunk . . 296 Mechanism of wrinkles 200 INIedian branch of anthelix 167 fold of ear 162 fossette on chin 182 frontal wrinkles 199, 200 furrow on upper lip 181 limits of dimension 21 (md.) line of body, 227, 238, 62, jja signalment, figures of . . . .29, 31 Medical lawyer, services of 211 Medium (m.) 150, 152, 164, 233, 236, 6od, jja length of head 20 tone of e^-e 146-147 Medius ( JW ) ^ middle finger 213, 224, 225, 236, 65-66, 77a average length for each height 254 impression of 260 measurement of, ii, 122, 124, 22- 2J Melun, French government printing ofl&ce at 150 ^Members, see Limbs. INIemorizing of abbrev-iations ix of anomalies of eg,r 162 classes of eyes 137 details of visage 4 Mental qualities, description of \nii suffering, physiognomy of.. 201 MeJiton = chin see j-ja Mentonnih-e = chin-whiskers 189 Metallic measuring instruments. . .90- 92 Metre (m. ) = 39.37 inches xx scale 16, 86, 87, 88, /, 5, 6od Metric signalment (see Anthropome- tric) 229 system xix, 93- 95 22 INDEX Middle {milieu, ml.), use of word in cicatricial phrase 221, 226, y^a Middle finger {middle f.)....\\, 78, 80 called medius (itf.) 122, 224 measurement of .... 24, 4, 22- 2j print of 260 relation of, to foot 21 relation of, to height 254 third basis of classification. . 21 Migration of criminals caused by sig- nalment 74 Mile, its equivalent in metric system, xx Military man, attitude of 204 servdce, record of, 98, 60c, 79, 8/ tactics 100, 212 uses of signalment ix, x, 80 Millimetre {mm.) ^-03937 inch, XX, 94, 95, loi, 218, 237, 251, 6od, 77a Millimetrical differences in measure- ments 24 Mimicry, physiognomical . . , 204-206, 60c Mince = slender 203 Minimum dimension represented by OC 20, 6od number of peculiar marks. . . 229 Minors, signalment of viii, 78, 161 Mirror, pocket, carrying of 210 Mirror-stand attached to posing-chair, 246-248 Mispronunciation of letters and words 207-210 Mistakes in measviring ... .24, 25, 93, 116 in reading graduation of instru- ments 95 Misunderstandings prevented by sig- nalment viii mm. = millimetre 237, yja Mnemonic formulae, 150, 214, 220, 230, 231 Mobile glance, see Unsteady 206 nostrils 159 Mode of insertion of hair 187, 188 Model (shape) of lobe of ear 165, 171, 175, 177 of surface of ear 50 Molar teeth 183, 187, 199 Mold of ear 13, 240 Mole (2iv.),see Naevus, viii, 215, 219, 227, 237, 77a false appearance of, on pho- tographs 242 Mollet = calf of leg j-ja Moral qualities, description of viii Morphological characters, 45 > 54, 152-178, 60c signalment (see descriptive), viii vocabulary 47, 177 Mouche ^ fly (a kind of birth-mark), 189, 215 Moue {/aire la) = to pout 181 Mounting of judicial photographs, 240, 242 Mouth {bouche, he. ) 181, 60c, yya descriprtion of 178, 197 elevation of corners of 201 wrinkles around 199 Movements of body, description of . . viii eyeballs 205-206 Mulattos, complexian of 40 Muller, Gallus, instrumental in intro- ducing Bertillon system viii Multiple superior branch of anthelix, 167, 173 wrinkles 199 Multiples (in photography) 242 Mvu-al graduations 16, 100, 106, / Murderer, signalment of a 252 Muscles of skin 200 Muscular contractions 192, 201, 206 Mustache 149, 189 Mutilation makes signalment neces- sary vii Mutual benevolent associations pro- tected by signalment vii mx. = maxillary = jawbone ^^a N-shaped cicatrices 2'7^ Nacreous circle in iris . . 145 Naevi = Latin plural of naevus 215 Naevus (nv. ) = mole. ..60, 215, 237, y/a Nails, see Finger-nails 206 Name, change of, necessitates signal- ment viii, 68 classification of cards by, ... 66 found by anthropometry 64 notation of 95, 96, 79, 8/ not necessary for identifica- tion of signalments viii similarity of, necessitates sig- nalment II Nancy, signaletic service at 69 Naples-yellow in eye 136 Napoleon's grenadiers, head-dress of , 185 Narine = nostril see jja Narrow eyebrows 191 root of nose 159, 32 INDEX 23 Nasal cartilages, dividing of 185 profile 184 Naso-buccal wrinkles (see Wrinkles), "/gb Naso-labial furrow 199, 201 height 180 Naso-prognathic face 183, 41 National signaletic office viii Nationality, notation of 205, 211 Natura non facit saltus 34 Nature of hair 187 of peculiar marks 214-217 Navel or umbilicus {mbl.) 227, ^/a Navicular fossa of ear 173, j8 nb. = numbers of, or numerous .... ^^a Nearness of eyebrows 190 Nearly, use of word in cicatricial phrase 219 Necessity of this work x Neck, description of 178, 202-204, 60c peculiar marks on, 226, 228, 237, 238, 77a Negative-frame 246 Negatives 243-244 Negroes 135, 151, 182-183, 187 Nervous contraction (see Tic) of eye- brows 192, 257 Neutral color in iris 43 New offenders distinguished by sig- nalment viii Nice, signaletic service at 69 Nicknames to be noted 96, 79, S/ Nil (ni.) =absent, 164, 167, 175, 177, Sod Nipple or teat {tt.) 217, 238, ^^a No others, use of this formula 229 Nodosity of ear 170 JVoir =black 149, 6od Non-identity, demonstration of, 24, 27, 64, 217, 258 Non-linear cicatrices 227 Non-metallic measuring instruments, 87-90 Normal type of face 186 North America, Bertillon system in. . viii Northern Europe, characteristics of people of 135, 148 France, language of 209 Norwegian accent 209 Nose 154-161, 226, 69 headings relating to, 45, 250, 60c inclination of base of 52 dimensions of, 157, 196, J5-j<5, J7 peculiarities of 158, 34-38 Nose, shape of 34, 180, 32-33 root of 196, 199, 69 Nostrils {nr. ) 156-157, 237, 77a Notamment = notably, particularly, 77a Notation of eyes, basis of 135 Notched ear 170, 57 Notes on cards 145 nr, = nostril 237, jja nt, = notably y^a Nuance = color, shade. Number of photographs taken daily, 244 Numbering of classes of eyes .... 140, 141 of joints and phalanges of fin- gers 224 peculiar marks 60, 223 Numerical expression of gradations of size and form 34 Numerous, or numbers of, abbreviat- ed nb 237, j/a nv, = naevus or mole 237, yya O. = auricular or little finger . . . 236, y/a O. = original border of ear 163, 174 o. = open border of ear 177, 6od Obese persons, how photographed. . . 248 Object commonly represented in tat- toos 216 Objective, photographic 240-242 regulation of height of 244 Oblique {b) antitragus. .51, 165, 177, 6od, jja cicatrices, how noted . . .218, 219 glance 206 shoulders 203 Oblique anterior ( b o< ) , insertion of ear 174 meaning of term, 219, (5/, 63- 64, 70, 72, 77a Oblique external (be), eyebrows, 190, 77a meaning of term . . .219-220, <5j-5yf, 72, 76 Oblique internal (b {.) eyebrows 190-191, 77a inclination of lobe 172 meaning of term, 56, 219-220, 76 Oblique posterior (b _p ), meaning of term 219, 61, 77a Obliquity of eyelids 192-193 peculiar marks 220, 230, 77a Obliterations of tattooings 216-217 of wrinkles in photographs. , 202 Oblong cicatrices 217, 219 24 INDEX Observation, physiognomy of 201 Obstacles to progress of Bertillon sys- tem in U. S viii Obtuse-angled ankylosis 125, 225 Occiput, hair on 188 projection of 108, 186 Ocular globe, see Eyeball 193, 195 wrinkles 199 Odd-eyed 146 CEil = eye jja Of, use of word in cicatricial phrase, 221-222 Offence, to be noted 98 Offenders, classes of , distinguishable, 211 Officers, use of signalments by . . , 249-250 Official exposition of Bertillon system, ix Oil-cloth, graduations on 85, 87, / on floor of measuring-room , 85 Oiling instruments 92 Old age, characteristics of . . . 193-194, 199 offenders distinguished by sig- nalment viii Old-fashioned s ( ir ) = sinister = left 235 Omega (w) used to represent max- imum dimension 20, 6od Omission of words in cicatricial phrase 213 Omoplate ( ompl. ) = shoulder-blade 23S, 75. 77a Onde = wavy 187 One (I j == left upper limb 222 (i) ^ unpigmented ej-es . . 141, 8 /a Open ( o) border of ear 177, 6od Opening of eyelid 206 nostrils 226 peculiar marks, 214, 217-219 Openness of border of ear 48, 177 mouth 198 Operating, method of, in taking finger-prints 260 Operator, name of, to be noted 99 Opposition of sound in cicatricial phrase,, 230, 231 Optical axis of camera 242, 247 Optional use of abbreviations 231 Orange {or. ) eyes 42, 136-139. 144-147. 60c, 6od, 8ia Orange-limit eyes 144 Orange-yellow pigment in eye. . 135-137 Orbit of eye 178, 195-197, 48, 60c Order of classification of signalments, 22 enumeration of peculiar marks, 214, 222 reading cicatricial sentence 62 society promoted by signalment vii taking measures > 22 words in cicatricial sentence., 62, 63 Oreille {orl. ) =■ ear 237, jja Organic vices of articulation 207 Organization of identification service in Switzerland 79 Original ( O or ORIG. ) ridge of bor- der of ear (helix) , 164, 174, 177, 52, 80 fold of ear (anthelix) . . . 167, 172-173 Original, signaletic terms of, given. . ix orl. = oreille = ear 237,77a Orteil = toe //a Orthognathism 182-183, 4/ Oscillation of calipers in measuring head 259 Osseous lengths ( see Anthropometry), 67, 257 ascertaining size of clothing from, 255 Outer, see External /^a Outlines of eyebrows 190 Outlines, seriation of 47 Outstretched arms, length of, see Reach. ov. = oval 177, ^^a Oval (ov.) cicatrices 217, 219, 77a (O. ) ear 168, 177, 6od face 186 Overhanging eyelid 193, 197 Overlapping incisors 198 p. = petty = small (sm. ) . .233, 236, ^/a p. := poUex or thumb (Th. ) ^^a P. = posterior (border of ear) 174 p. == profile (of antitragus) 165 Padded eyelid 194 Paddle-shaped incisors 198 Paddles of ear caliper 114 Pale areola 42 filaments in iris 138 complexion 149 Palm of hand (pin.).. 212, 224, 237, ^/a Palpebral cleft 201 Panaris, see Whitlow 225 Pantoufle {en)=^ slipper-shaped 188 Paper ruled for measuring 87 legal, signalment on viii Papers of identity \\\, 97. 79, 81 Parallel {prl.) marks of scars,. 237, ^^a INDEX 25 Parenthesis, its use in descriptive signalment, 37, 38, 53, 140, 143, 156, 6od, 81a in verbal portrait 252 Parietal bones, separation of 42 Paris, working of Bertillon system at, I, 2, 19, 20, 21, 54, 66-69, 71-72 76, 77, 116, 138, 161, 243, 252, 79(1 Parisian forms of signaletic cards .... x gamin, accent of 207 Parrot-nose, see Hooked 166, 180 Partial ankylosis 255 Particiilih'e= peculiar. Partition of nose 159 Parts of body, terms and anomalies peculiar to 222 Passions, their physiognomical ex- pressions 201 Passager ^ transient 215 Passes and passports, signalment on, 3, 32 Pathological causes of loss of hair. . . 18S complexions 150 resemblances 257 signalment viii Patronymic, villages of one 258 Patte-d'oie = goose-foot = crow's feet, 201 Patterns of areola 45 Paupihrs [pp. ) ^= eyelids {lids), 237, //a Pavilion of ear (see Ear) 169, 174 Pearly circle in iris 145 Peculiar marks, description of, in abridged writing ^^ identifying value of 13, 32 localization of 221, 229 signalment by viii, x, 58, 64-65, 212-238 vocabulary and abbreviations for, //a Peculiarities (pecul. ) .... 78, 79a, ^gl>, 80 absence of, indicated by dash . • 223 of anthelix 167 ear 169, 175, 177, 57, 55 eyeballs 196 eyebrows 191 eyelids 194-195 iris 145, 147, 8/a neck 203 nose 158, J2 skin 243 table of 60c Pederast 99, 211 Pedunculated ear 169 Peisse, the anatomist, cited 4 Penal labor 85 laws 12 value of signalment 73 Penciled eyebrows 191 Pendant lips iSi Penitentiary {t/iaisou cefilrale,* cen- tral ) viii, 28, 66, 6od administration 72, 130 Per, sign for ^^a Perfection of Bertillon system vii Periphery (periph.) of iris,44, 134, 136-139, 147, 60c, 75, /9a, jgb, Sia Permits, signalment on viii Perpendicular digital fossa 173 Personal identity, signalment for establishment of viii Petty (p) == small, little 233, 6od pg. ^poignet = wrist 233, 237, 77a Phalanges of fingers 61, 224, 6j-66 Phalanx (f), see Phalanges 7/a Philosophy of anthropometry 30 Phonograph, signaletic use of.... 13, 206 Photography, instructions for. .. 231,239 Photographic identification 256-258 service at Paris 54 Photographs , see Full-face and Pro- file 171, 202 commercial 195 full-length 241 in Album, remarks on 5, 55 interpretation of 200-201 means of identifying 46 necessary in case of minors.... 78, 161, 239 on cards 249, /ga, 80 unreliability of ordinary 195 use of, by detectives 5 with hat on 241 Photography, expense of 77 immoderate use of 77 insufficient as meai>s of identi- fication 12 judicial use of 4 signaletic value of 13, 58, 258 Phrenologists, value of this work to, x Phj-sical si:ffering, physiognomy of, 201 Phj'sicians x, 257 Physiognomical analysis 54.249 character of mouth 198 expression 192, 200-203 mimicry 206, 60c 26 INDEX Physiognomical resemblances x 257-258,590, 6od value of wrinkles 201 Physiognomists, usefulness of signal- ments to 180 value of this work to x Physiognomy, expression of 178,5/ of naso-labial furrow 201 relation of ear to 169 eyebrows to 190 mouth to 178 orbit to 197 teeth to 198 Physiological origin of wrinkles .... 202 P. -I. = between thumb (pollex) and index 236, 7712 Pickpockets 73 Pied = foot 77a Pierced lobe of ear 171 Pigmentary (Pigment. ) coloration of skin ( see Complexion ) . , . . 40, 41, 150, y8, 79a punctiform naevi 215 Pigmentation of iris 41, 135-140,146, 8ia Pilar}' system, see Hairy system. Pimples, notation of 150 Pimply nose 158 Pincer les IH'res = compressing the lips 181 Pinched mouth, see Compressed, 198 Pipe, use of, to be noted 206 pi. = pliated = retracted or bent, 120-121, 126, 6od Place for measuring . . - 85 notation of, on card 99 Planes, anatomical 212 Plat and plate = flat 174, 177 Hi = fold. Pliated = bent = retracted 120 pis. = plusieurs == plural or several (svl.) 237, 77a " Plunging" the camera forbidden. . 241 pni. = palm 237, 77a ptat. = pommette = cheek-bone ( ckbone ) 77a Pocket on back of posing-chair,243, 246 Pocket mirror, carrj'ing of 210 Pocket-picking 98 Poignet = poig7te (p^.) = wrist,233, 77a Point cicatricial {pt. cic. ) 77a (pt. ) of chin 226 Point of eye 134 of eyebrow 7/ Pointed nose 158 tragus 162 Pointed-toed shoes 255 Pointing, hatter's 256 shoemaker's 28, 255 Points, insertion of hair in 188 Poi trine = chest. Police, adoption of Bertillon sys- tem by \-ii, 66 international language of ix use of photography by 202, 243 value of signalment to,x, 4, 6, 65, 72 Police departments, number of, in U. S. using Bertillon system, viii science, signalment the ^•iii Political reformers, necessity of this work to s Pollex (P.) =thumb, 224-225,237. 77a. 65 anatomical faces of 213 Povimette = cheek-bone 226 Portable square, see Special square, 7, 7 Portraits, photographic, see Photo- graphs, 240 Pose for judicial photographs. . . .240-241 Posee = sedate 205 Posing-chair for judicial photo- graphy, 7, 240, 243-244, 247-248 post. ^ posterior fold of anthelix.. 177 Post-antitragian, see Post-tragian. Posterior border of ear (Post.), 48, 164, 170, 173-175, 177. 5^. 5<5, So ca\'ity, curv'e with (c»_p), 218, 235, 6/, 77a contour of ear 171 cubital 223 face, anatomical, 212-214, 224, 238, (5/, 67-6S fold of anthelix {post.) 177 space between thumb and index, 225 separation of ear {post. ) 6od Posterior oblique, see Oblique 219 Postero-extemal face 213, 67 Postero-internal face 67 Postero-superior contour of ear, see Supero-posterior 171 Post-tragian fissure or incisure, 173-174, 5.? Posture of hands and arms 204 INDEX 27 Pouch-shaped head 1S5 Pouting lips 181 pp. ^ paiipi^re = oyQlidi {lid), 237, ^/a pr. ^= prolonged 115 pt. = point 237, ^/a Practical instructions for handling posing-chair 247 utility of signalment \4ii Practice in signaletic work.. 84, 91, 102 Precision in measurement .... 2 1 , 25, 260 statement of peculiar marks. ... 56 Preface of publishers vii Prefecture of Police at Paris, \'ii, 74, 76, 161, 167, 243 Premium for discovery of errors .... 76 Prenotns = given names. Prepositions in cicatricial formula,22 1-222 Preventive value of signalment 74 Previous convictions to be noted 98 Pricks on sensitive plate 242 Printer's ink, impressions of finger- tips in 260 Printing office of French government at Melun 150 Prison congresses i, 73-74, 80-81 life, effects of 211, jga officials X, 205 Prison Association, International. . .5, 78 Prisons, adoption of Bertillon system by viii, 85 necessity of signalment in ... . 12, 133, 199 signaletic practice in, X, 4, 22, 64-66, 69, 133, 199, 249 Prize for reporting failures to identify, 76 Prize-fighters, ears of 173 prl. = parallel 237, ^^a prm. = prominent 227, 77a Procurers recognizable 211 Profession or trade, to be noted, 97, 79, 81 Professional characteristics 205 , 211 offenders recognizable 211 photographer 239 resemblances 257 training noted 60c Profile, analysis of 60c complementary features of, 178, 180-186 headings for 250 (prof.) of antitragus, 49, 165, 175. 177, So chin 181 Profile, analysis of 60c of face 183-184, 69-^0 forehead 51, 152 head 186 nose 154, 159, 184, 33 skull 185 photograph, 54, 115, 239, 240, 242, 244-246, 57, 7ga scale of inclinations in 52 view of 61 Prognathism 182-184, 4^ Progress, modern, signalment an im- important step in vii Prohibition of new abbreviations 232 Projection (Projec.) 7S, 80, jgb Darwinian 170 of antitragus 49, 166 chin 181, 184, 257 incisors 198 larynx 203 nose 157 occiput 185-186 second toe 121 shoulders 204 superior branch of anthelix, 167 Projecting {saillant, s.), antitragus, 177, 6od Prolonged ear ( pr. ) 177, 6od Prominence, see Projection. of cheek-bones 186 forehead 152-153 frontal sinuses 32 jaws 1S2-184 lip 180 superciliary arch 196, j^ Prominent or protuberant, abbreviat- ed prm 237, 7ya Prominent or seventh vertebra ..221, 75 Pronation, arms and hands after, 64, 67-68 Pronunciation, defective 207-210 Prosecutors, use of signalments by , 7 1 , 77 Protruding eyes 196 lip 181 Protuberance of chin, see Ball 182 Protuberant {prm.) or prominent . . /7a Provincial accent, to be noted, 178, 207, 209 pt. = point 77a pt. eie. = cicatricial point, see pt., 77a Puberty, see Adolescence. Public places, identification in . . 130, 251 Safety, see Police 65 28 Publication, preparation of signal- ments for 223 Publishers' preface . . vii-x Puffy eyelids 194 nostrils 159 Pug nose 34, 156 Pulverized sulphur, color of, in eye. , 136 Punctiform naevi 215 Punishment of guilty assured by sig- nalment viii Pupil of eye 131, 134, 8ia Pupil in measurement, see Apprentice. Pupillary zone 134 Pure maroon class of eye 135-137, S/a Pyramidal face 1S6 q. = square (lobe of ear) 177, 6od qq. = quelque ^ some Jja qr. := square (mark) 237, ^^a Quadrille paper 87 Quadruple superior fold of ear 173 wrinkles 199 Quality of the voice 178, 206 Quelque ( qq. ) ^ some 7ja Quetelet, discoverer of law of seria- tion 33 Quick or rapid glance 206 Quid, see Chewing tobacco. R, faulty pronunciation of 207 r. = radiating (areola) 146-147, 8ia r. = rectilinear .... 61, 161, 177, 236, "/ja r. = reversion (of anti tragus) 166 rac. [racine) = root of nose (root), 238, 77a Race, see Ethnic 150, 211 Racial resemblances 258 /Racine = root. Racine die nez = root of the nose , . . 238 Radiating (i*. ) areola ..13S. 146-147, bod, 8ra Raised iris 1 96 "Raising the nose" of the camera forbidden 241 Rapid gait 205 or quick glance 206 Rapidity in dictating 230 writing 61, 63, 230 of speech 211 Raven black hair 147-148 Raw sienna color in eye 136 Reach, average for each height 254 cause of extraordinary 253 measurement of . . . .ii, 16, 24, 103, /, 6 Readers, uninitiated 232 Reading of statement of peculiar marks 62 Rear view of trunk is^ 7^ Receding (y«j'a«/, f. ) cheek-bones.. 186 chin. 181 forehead 5i. 152-153. 3^ Recidivation, laws for prevention of, 73 noted on card 69, 98 signalment the means of proving 11 Recidivists, emigration of 79 recognition of, 25, 64, 67-69, 72, 74, 232 Recognition from behind 203 of criminals 4, 6, 73, 75 Recognitory value of photography . . 258 of signalments 27, 251, 258 Recollection, aids to 203 Recording peculiar marks 230-238 Records, judicial {casters) 98 Recourbe = recurved = curved back, yja Rectangular (ree. ) ear 168, 60a insertion of hair 188 Rectilinear (r. ) ankylosis 125, 225 antitragus 49, 166,175, 177 cicatrices, . .61, 217-219, 236, jja {rec.) ear 177 eyebrows 190-191, 202 fronto-nasal profile 184 nose 48, 155, 159, 161, jj Rectilinear-sinuous nose 48, 155, 160 Recto of signaletic cards ( = front, or side upwards when in use), 96, 99, 249, ^S, So Recurved cicatrices 77a Red cards in alphabetical file ....... 71 eyelids 194 eyes 135, 136 hair and beard 41, 148 in iris 141. I44-I45 Reduction of judicial photographs, 55, 240, 243-244 Re-entering eyelids 193 Reflection, physiognomy of 201 Reformatories, adoption of Bertillon system in viii Reformers, social and political, value of this book to x Regard = glance 205 Regular contour of ear 171 rel. = el. = elevated 161 INDEX 29 60b 28 Si 257 220 248 177 Relation of height to other measures, 25 1 Relations, to be noted 77, 79, Sr Rcleve {rel. ) = elevated {el.) 161 Rcnseignement = information. Repeating of photographs 242 Repetition of instructions, reasons for. 2 Repoiissee = flattened 172 Resemblances in physiognomy, caus- es of 257, 60a, necessitate signalment ... 27, Residence, to be noted 97, jg. Respiration, expression of difficult . . Results obtained in France 71-76 Retouching of photographs.. 195, 202, 242 Retraction of great toe ( pi. ) 120 Reversal of faces on extended fore- arm Reversed writing on photograph .... "Reversion" (rever.) or turning of antitragus 50-51, 166, Reviewed (rv. ) 6od Rheumatism, its effect on joints not- ed 104 Rho ( P or _p ) = posterior 61, 239 Rhj^hm of cicatricial phrase 230-23 [ Richer, Dr. Paul, cited 4 Rickets, its effects to be noted 104 Rictus, description of 178 Rides = wrinkles. Ridge of nose 48, 154, 158, 226, 245 Right, place of this word in cicatricial phrase 213, 64, jo represented by Q 235, jja Right ear, value of, for identification, 113. eye, focusing on 240, hands, prints of fingers on. . . . represented by rf or Q ...... side, observed last 222 side, profile photographs to be from 240 right-angled ankylosis. .. .125, 225 tip of ear 170, 171 Rigid attitude 205 rnd. = round (lobe) 177, Sod Roman numerals used to designate parts of body 222-223 Rome, Prison Congress of i, 73, So Root of nose {rac, root) . . . 109, 154, 196, 226, 238, j^, 69, 7/, ^/a wrinkles on 199, 200 240 245 260 61 Rotundity, see Roundness. Roumania, Bertillon system in 78 Round [rnd. ) ear 16S, 177, 6od face 186 of eye 134 shoes, size of 255 shoulders 205 Rounded lobe of ear 165 Roundness of back, see Crook-backed, 204 Rousseiir ( rc»z^.w. )== freckle [fkle), 238, /7a Royale = beard under lower lip ... . 189 Ruddy complexion 40 Rule for photographic reduction, 240, 245 Rules used in measuring / Rumpled border of ear 171 Russia, Bertillon system in ix, 78 Russian accent 209 rv. = re\'iewed 105, 113 Ryckere, E. de, cited 79, 81 S, faulty pronunciation of 207 s. = saillant =^ projecting antitra- gus {proj. ) 6od s. = separated (lobe of ear) .... 177, 6od s. = sinuous (nose) 161, 236,77a S. = superior (border of ear) 174 s. p. = sans profession 97, 6od s. d. =: without domicile or fixed residence 97 s. pp. ^= ^\'ithout papers 97, Sod S-shaped dorsal line of nose 159 Sadness, physiognomy of 19S, 201 Saignee = fold of elbow 213 Saillant = protruding (eyes) 196 Saillie = projection 157 Sailor recognizable 211 St. Petersburg, Bertillon system at . . 66 Salesman recognizable 211 Saluting, manner of, to be noted 211 Same, represented by id. (idem), 146-147, Sod Sanguineous (SangTiin.) coloration of complexion .... 40, 41, /S, jga Sautillante = tripping 205 Saw-toothed = zigzag 217 Scale of pigmentation of iris 136-138 Scalp 1S9, 226, 7/ Scanty eyebrows 191 eyelashes 194 Scandina\-ian accent 209 Scaphocephalic head 183, 41 30 INDEX Scars (cJC. ), see Cicatrices, viii, i8i, 213, 215, 227, 242-243 '2i%77a Science x, 1,2,72-73 Scientific detective system x experiments 88 method of signalment 80 Scientific police system viii Scissors, used in anthropometric sig- nalment 87, 89, 123 Sciving-knif e, scars of 57 Sclerotica or sclerotic 134, 196 Scrawl, how to avoid 232 Scrofula ( scrof. ) notations of marks of 227,238, jya Scrofulous persons 226 Se disant = calling himself 96 Search for fugitive criminals 4 Second joint and phalanx 224 toe longer than first (> ) 6od Secretary, see Clerk 92, 232 Sector in iris 42, 137, 145, 8/a Self -absorption, physiognomy of ... . 201 Semi-circular insertion of hair 188 Semi -lunar profile 184 Senile circle in iris 145 Sensitive plate 241, 246 Separated incisors 198 jaw 186 (s.) lobe of ear 165, 177, 6od zygomata, see Distant .... 186 Separation ofear(sep.)) 50, 169, 175, 177, 80 eyebrows 190 eyes 196 helix and anthelix 173 Seriation, numbers of subdivisions in, 37-38 of colors of hair and beard, 147-148 dimensions, law of 33 eyes 42, 138, 140-141 peculiar marks impossible 63 Service of identification at Paris, see Identification service 66 Seven (7):=maroon e3'es 141, 8/a Seventh vertebra . . .221, 228, 23S, 75, 77a Several {plusieurs, [cf=^compare]plu- ral, pi., svl. ) 77a Sexes, classification by 19 voices characteristic of 206 Shade of eyebrows, see Color 191 "Shako-shaped" head 257 Shape of body, description of viii peculiar marks 217 Shapeless ( informe) 77a Shaving, its effect on appearance. . . . 189 Shell of ear, see Concha, 162, 172, 5(5,5.=superior separation of ear, 177, 66d Super-abridged abbreviations 233 Superciliary arches 152, 190, 196 Supercilium (see Eyebrow) 237, jya Superior or upper ( ^ , up. ) . . .234, jja border of ear (sup. ) 164, 170, 171, 174, 177.5-^.57.5'?. ^oa branch of anthelix 167 ca\'ity,curve with( c C ),2i8, 235, 61, 68, y2, 7(5, 7ja concavity or convexity 1 78 fold of ear, 1 62, 173, 175, 56, ^8 member, see Upper limb .... 2 14 prognathism 183 separation of ear {sup.), 169, 177, 6od Supero-posterior border of ear, . . 168, 170 Super-position, see Surcharging 216 Supple hair 187-189 Suppression of words in cicatricial phrase, 231 Supra-mental furrow 182 Surcharging of tattoos 6j Surgical operations 1 26 Surnames, see Nicknames and Family names 258 Surprise, physiognomy of 2or Swarthy complexion 40, 149, 150 Swedish accent 209 Swelling on ridge of nose 15S Swinging gait 205 Switzerland, Bertillon system in. . .78, 79 S^dlables, how accented in different lan- guages 206 INDEX 33 Sjmibols in abridged writing. .7, 233, 237 Synoptical table of cicatricial terms, 214, 223 descriptive terms, 250 Synthetic terms, 152, 179, iSi, 199, 205-206 t.=traversed lobe of ear 177, 6od t. ^. or t^.=very large or great, 174, 177, 6od t. p. or fp.=very small or petty, 174, 177, 6od T-shaped cicatrices /■/a Table of contents, remarks on ix Table, see Trestle-table. Tail of eyebrow 190-191 Ta ille^neighi . Tailor's marks on clothes 210 Tapering noses 15S Tattooing (tat.), viii, 57, 216-217, 225, 238, 6j, 64, 68, 7ja Teaching of signal etic sj^stem 232 Tear gland, see Lachrymal. Tear-channels 158 Teat ( tt. ) or nipple 227, 238, 7J, //a Technical instructions for judicial pho- tography 240 terms, this index a vocabular)' of ix Technicality of system,apparent x Teeth 183, 184, 198-199 Temples 188, 226, 6g Temporal wrinkles 201 Terms, anatomical 212 Teie=head 185 Teutonic accent 209 The, suppression of this word in cicatri- cial phrase 222 Theft, varieties of 98 Thick eyebrows 191 neck 203 nose 158 Thickened finger nail 225 Thickness of lips 180-181 of speech, see Grasseyemeni ... 207 Thief, recognizable 211 Thieves, number of, decreased by signal- ment 73 Thigh (aiisse) 7/a Thighs, habit of putting hands on. . . . 204 Thigh-bone, growth of 14 Third finger or annular {A), 224, 260, 65, 66, 77a joint and phalanx 224 Three (lll)^face and front of neck 223 (3)=orange eyes 141, 8ia Three-limits eye 143 Three-quarters pose for photographs, 239. 243. 250 Thumb or poUex (P.),i3, 213, 224, 236, 260, dj, 66, yya Tic or twitching 206, 207 Tichborne claimant, illustrates use of signalment 80 Timbre of voice 206-207 Tinners, characteristic scars on 57 Tip {pt., see Point) of nose 154, 158- 159, 226, 6g Tiqueie=^spotted 77a Tobacco, use of, to be noted 206 Tone of color of iris. .45, 135, 13S, 146, 60c voice 211 Tonic accent, position of 209 Tonsural baldness 18S Top-shaped face 186 Tbrfi^/^^twisted 7/a Torn ears, how measured 115 Torsion of inferior fold of anthelix 49 "Total" separation of ear lobe. . . 172, 177 Toulouse, peculiarities of Frenchmen from 186 signaletic sers-ice at 69 Tow-colored hair 148 tr.^trickery loi, 102, 104, 105, 129 tr. =very 8/a Trades, characteristic marks of 57 Tragus {trg.) 116, 162, 169, 172-173, 174, 177, 226, 237, 259, sS, 69, 77a Tramps 79, 210, 211 Transient peculiar marks 215 Translator for foreign signalments un- necessary ix Transmission of accent by heredity . . . 207 Transparency of skin, notation of . . . . 150 Trapezium, interciliary 200 trav.=traversed. Traversed, (<2*v.) concha 172, 202, 227, 77a, 6od (t) lobe 50.105,175, \'jT,6od Trench or fold of elbow 213 Tres grand^=v&ry large 174 Tr^s petit^^x&ry small 174 Trestle-table i, 28, 30b tr^.=tragus 770- f ri. =triangular ear 177 34 INDEX Trickery {tr.) on part of subject measured... 25, 106, 127-129, 6od fri^i. =^triaiigle 238, //a Triple class number of eye 145 wrinkles 199 Tripping step 205 Trousers 204, 212, 229, 255 Trouted or trouty ej-es 145, 8/a Trunk, anatomical faces of 212 average length of, for each height of I, 254 datum marks of, 227, /j, 75, 76, // measurement of. .ii, 17, 24, 25, 105, 246, 251, 7, 6 irv.=tra versed 175, 227, 77a tt.=teat or nipple 238, ^/a Tubercules, Darwinian 170 Tubercules of tragus 172 Tunis, Bertillon s^-stem in 78 Turned (v., verse) antitragus 50-51, 177, 6od Turned-up nose 34 Turning grey {grs. ) 149, 6od of antitragus 166, 175 Twnns, their resemblance ... .46, 258, Sob Twisted nose 158 Twitching, see Tic Two (II ) = right upper limb 222 (2) = yellow class of eyes, 141, 8/a Type, negro 183, 187 Typographical peculiarities, signifi- cance of 96, 163-164, 79(5 U. = united or smooth (lobe of ear), 177, 6od Ultimate aim of signalment viii, 81 Umbilicus(2njb2.)^navel, 227, 238, 75, y^a Uncovered eyelid 193 Under ( —^ , under) 221, 234, y^a use of word in cicatricial phrase 221 Underlining, significance of, 37, 38, 53, 140, 156, 252, 253, 8/a, 6od Undulation of hair 187 Unfinished {inachev^) tattooing /^a Uniformity in measuring 23 in reduction of photo- graphs 244 Unilateral interciliary wrinkle . 199 Units of measurement 93 United eyebrows 191 United States, Bertillon system in, viii, 78 United States government, metric system adopted by xx United States and Canada Wardens' Association \'iii Universal application of signalment, viii Unpigmented eyes 42, 133, 138, 8/a Unpigmented-limit eyes 144 Unsteady gait 205 Upper ( Q , up.), see Superior, 234, ^^a arm, cicatrices on 220 datum points on. . .224, 6j, 64 eyelid 193-194 limb (right), represented by II 222 limb (left), represented by I, 222 limbs . .63, 64, 213, 223, 237, yja lip, height of 180 Utensils, carried, to be noted 210 Uvula, pronunciation of r with . . . . 207 V. = convex (inferior fold) 177 V. = turned (antitragus) 177 V. = vaulting == curvature 104, 105 V. = verd = greenish, 139, 146-147, 6od, 8/a V-shaped cicatrices 217-218 Vagabonds, see Tramps. Vairojis = odd-eyed 146 Values, anthropometrical 252 Variations in measurement, see Dis- crepancies, Errors 106 Variola ( vrl. ) or smallpox 237, jya Variot's method of effacing tattoos . . 57 "Vaulting" (v.) ^curvature (of back or reach), 102, 104, 106 Veiled eye 193 Velue = hairy '^ja Ventre = stomach. Verbal portrait, x, 5, 47, 54, 173, 179, I 84- I 85, 201, 249-258 card for 80-81 Verddtre = verd or vert = greenish, 139, 146-147 Verification, occasion for second .... 26 of accuracy of instruments, 88-89, 91 identity 68 measurements, vi, 17, 108, III 112, 259, /J peculiar marks 62 photographs 246 signalments 68, 77, 239 Verified {vrf. ) 68, 69, 6od Verniers 19 Verrue = wart ^/'a Versement = ttirning over ( of anti- tragus) 175 Verso = back, or side downwards when in use (of cards), 96, 249, 79, 81 Vert = greenish 146-147 Vertebra prominens, see Seventh ver- tebra. Vertebral or spinal column ( column, cL) 14, 16, 204, 22S, ^^a Vertical ( v. ) cicatrices ( vr. or w.), how noted 21S-219, 236, 77a forehead 51,152.153, 31 insertion of ear 174 interciliaries 192, 199, 201 interval 248 roundness of back 204 wrinkles between eyebrows, 192, 199, 201 Vertical-interval 248 Very, indicated b3' underlining 6od Very large or great (v. g., or (^., tres gratid ) 6od small or petty (v. sm., tres petit) 6od "Vex"= convex 155, i6r inferior fold of anthelix 166-168, 175 Vices of articulation 207 *Vif. (*ViV. ) = vivid or bright. , 149, 6od Villages bearing one patronymic... 258 Violet-blue or intermediate eye 43. 131. 139. 146-147. 8ia Visage ( vsg. ) , see Face 186, 237, y^a * Viv. = bright or vivid 6od Vocabulary, technical signaletic ix, 47, 60c, jya Voice, description of ... 178, 206, 211, 60c Volume of body 175 eyeball 195 eyebrows 191 Vowels, peculiarities of in foreign languages 208 vr. = vertical 236, 77a vraist. = vraisentblablement = appar- ently ( app.) 77a vrf. = verified 68, 6od vrl. = variola or smallpox 237, 77a vsg. = visage or face 236, 77a w. = vr. = vertical 236, 77a Waist line 7S Waistcoat 204 Wardens' Association of U. S. and Canada A^iii Wart ( verrue ) viii, 77a Watery or weeping eyelids 194 Wavy hair '. 187 Whiskers, see Beard 149, 189 INDEX 35 White of the eye 131, 134, 196 race, color of skin in 40, 154 Whitlow or felon (panaris ) 225 Whorl of hair between eyebrows .... 191 Wide eyebrows 191 Width of ear, average for each height, 254 measurement of 24, 26, 1 16 replaced by bi-zygomatic diameter 15, 24, 116, 259 forehead j/ head, average for each height 254 measurement of. . .24, iio- 113, 12-14 classification of 20 nose 157 Wig, wearing of, noted 78 Wind, wrinkles caused by 202 Windings of ear, see Anthelix, 162, 166, 173 Wine-marks 215 Wings of the nose 154, 201, 226, 6g Wiping the nose, manner of 211 Without (^sans) fixed residence or domicile {no res., s. d.).97, Sod papers (s. pp., no pp. ) . . .97, Sod profession or business (s. p., no bus. ) 97, Sod Witnesses 27, 249 Women, signalment of 19 Woolly hair 187 Workings of Bertillon system vii Wounded persons, identification of 80 Wounds 112, 215 Wrinkles, 178, 192, ]'99-202, 210,50,57,60 not to be effaced from pho- tographs 243 Wrist {pg., poignet) .... 224, 233 237, S3. 64, 77a Writing figures of measurements. . .93-94 statement of peculiar marks 61-63,231 Written portrait 249 X-shaped cicatrices 217, 77a Yard=i. 91443 metres. Yellow {j.,jaune) eye 42, 136-139 146-147, 60c, Sod, Bra pigmentation of skin 41 Youth, characteristics of 193 Z-shaped cicatrices 217, 77a Zero used to indicate millimetre 77a Zero-mark on instruments 19, 91 Zezaievien t^m.\s^ron\xnc{a.t\on of 5. . . 207 Zigzag cicatrices 217 Zones of iris 134, 145, 8ia Zoolog}', signalment compared to 12 Zygoma, definition of 186, 259 Zj'gomata (plural of zj-goma) 186, 259-^60, 42 n f I University of California SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 305 De Neve Drive - Parking Lot 17 • Box 951388 LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90095-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed. >^-^- UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY \ .^ .^ l^ M ^J:L.>f^^,J' |.\ ^^, V \^ i ^' vm^ «*' (V- - SUPPLIED BY THE SEVEN BOOKHUNTERS STATION H-BOXee-NEv/voRKClTY Out-of-Print Books ^-^ :^^:^